pfsense-wifipine-hostapd.md

1. Prepare Network Interface

1.2 Requirements

apk add bridge iw wireless-regdb

1.2 Create Bridge Interface

Edit /etc/network/interfaces and add:

auto br0
iface br0 inet dhcp
  hostname wifipine
  bridge-ports eth0

Comment out any existing lines configuring eth0 as this should now be handled via the bridge configuration.

1.2 Set Regulatory Domain

iw reg set DE
reboot

2. Setup hostapd

2.1 Requirements

apk add hostapd

2.2 Install configuration files

Place the .conf files from the assets/config directory into /etc/hostapd/wifipine

2.3 Update the hostapd service

Add the following to the file /etc/init.d/hostapd just above the lines setting the configuration.

# Define the configs to use
: ${CONFIGS:="/etc/hostapd/wifipine/wifi6e_2ghz.conf /etc/hostapd/wifipine/wifi6e_5ghz.conf"}

2.4 Update config file permission

chmod -R 755 /etc/hostapd/wifipine/

2.5 Start & enable hostapd on boot

rc-update add hostapd
rc-service hostapd start

---

Tipps & Tricks

Get supported Frequencies, Channels and Bands:

iw list | grep -A 15 Frequencies:

List of 6GHz Channels

https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_WLAN_channels#6_GHz_(802.11ax_and_802.11be)

wifi6e_2ghz.conf

##### hostapd configuration file ##############################################
# Empty lines and lines starting with # are ignored

# AP netdevice name (without 'ap' postfix, i.e., wlan0 uses wlan0ap for
# management frames with the Host AP driver); wlan0 with many nl80211 drivers
# Note: This attribute can be overridden by the values supplied with the '-i'
# command line parameter.
interface=wlan0

# For nl80211, this parameter can be used to request the AP interface to be
# added to the bridge automatically (brctl may refuse to do this before hostapd
# has been started to change the interface mode). If needed, the bridge
# interface is also created.
bridge=br0

# Driver interface type (hostap/wired/none/nl80211/bsd);
# default: hostap). nl80211 is used with all Linux mac80211 drivers.
# Use driver=none if building hostapd as a standalone RADIUS server that does
# not control any wireless/wired driver.
driver=nl80211

# Driver interface parameters (mainly for development testing use)
# driver_params=<params>

# hostapd event logger configuration
#
# Two output method: syslog and stdout (only usable if not forking to
# background).
#
# Module bitfield (ORed bitfield of modules that will be logged; -1 = all
# modules):
# bit 0 (1) = IEEE 802.11
# bit 1 (2) = IEEE 802.1X
# bit 2 (4) = RADIUS
# bit 3 (8) = WPA
# bit 4 (16) = driver interface
# bit 6 (64) = MLME
#
# Levels (minimum value for logged events):
#  0 = verbose debugging
#  1 = debugging
#  2 = informational messages
#  3 = notification
#  4 = warning
#
logger_syslog=-1
logger_syslog_level=2
logger_stdout=-1
logger_stdout_level=2

# Interface for separate control program. If this is specified, hostapd
# will create this directory and a UNIX domain socket for listening to requests
# from external programs (CLI/GUI, etc.) for status information and
# configuration. The socket file will be named based on the interface name, so
# multiple hostapd processes/interfaces can be run at the same time if more
# than one interface is used.
# /var/run/hostapd is the recommended directory for sockets and by default,
# hostapd_cli will use it when trying to connect with hostapd.
ctrl_interface=/var/run/hostapd

# Access control for the control interface can be configured by setting the
# directory to allow only members of a group to use sockets. This way, it is
# possible to run hostapd as root (since it needs to change network
# configuration and open raw sockets) and still allow GUI/CLI components to be
# run as non-root users. However, since the control interface can be used to
# change the network configuration, this access needs to be protected in many
# cases. By default, hostapd is configured to use gid 0 (root). If you
# want to allow non-root users to use the control interface, add a new group
# and change this value to match with that group. Add users that should have
# control interface access to this group.
#
# This variable can be a group name or gid.
#ctrl_interface_group=wheel
ctrl_interface_group=0


##### IEEE 802.11 related configuration #######################################

# SSID to be used in IEEE 802.11 management frames
ssid=Maltes awesome WiFi

# UTF-8 SSID: Whether the SSID is to be interpreted using UTF-8 encoding
utf8_ssid=1

# Country code (ISO/IEC 3166-1). Used to set regulatory domain.
# Set as needed to indicate country in which device is operating.
country_code=DE

# The third octet of the Country String (dot11CountryString)
# This parameter is used to set the third octet of the country string.
#
# All environments of the current frequency band and country (default)
#country3=0x20
# Outdoor environment only
#country3=0x4f
# Indoor environment only
country3=0x49
# Noncountry entity (country_code=XX)
#country3=0x58
# IEEE 802.11 standard Annex E table indication: 0x01 .. 0x1f
# Annex E, Table E-4 (Global operating classes)
#country3=0x04

# Enable IEEE 802.11d. This advertises the country_code and the set of allowed
# channels and transmit power levels based on the regulatory limits. The
# country_code setting must be configured with the correct country for
# IEEE 802.11d functions.
# (default: 0 = disabled)
ieee80211d=1

# Enable IEEE 802.11h. This enables radar detection and DFS support if
# available. DFS support is required on outdoor 5 GHz channels in most countries
# of the world. This can be used only with ieee80211d=1.
# (default: 0 = disabled)
ieee80211h=1

# Add Power Constraint element to Beacon and Probe Response frames
# This config option adds Power Constraint element when applicable and Country
# element is added. Power Constraint element is required by Transmit Power
# Control. This can be used only with ieee80211d=1.
# Valid values are 0..255.
#local_pwr_constraint=3

# Set Spectrum Management subfield in the Capability Information field.
# This config option forces the Spectrum Management bit to be set. When this
# option is not set, the value of the Spectrum Management bit depends on whether
# DFS or TPC is required by regulatory authorities. This can be used only with
# ieee80211d=1 and local_pwr_constraint configured.
#spectrum_mgmt_required=1

# Operation mode (a = IEEE 802.11a (5 GHz), b = IEEE 802.11b (2.4 GHz),
# g = IEEE 802.11g (2.4 GHz), ad = IEEE 802.11ad (60 GHz); a/g options are used
# with IEEE 802.11n (HT), too, to specify band). For IEEE 802.11ac (VHT), this
# needs to be set to hw_mode=a. For IEEE 802.11ax (HE) on 6 GHz this needs
# to be set to hw_mode=a. When using ACS (see channel parameter), a
# special value "any" can be used to indicate that any support band can be used.
# This special case is currently supported only with drivers with which
# offloaded ACS is used.
# Default: IEEE 802.11b
hw_mode=g

# Channel number (IEEE 802.11)
# (default: 0, i.e., not set)
# Please note that some drivers do not use this value from hostapd and the
# channel will need to be configured separately with iwconfig.
#
# If CONFIG_ACS build option is enabled, the channel can be selected
# automatically at run time by setting channel=acs_survey or channel=0, both of
# which will enable the ACS survey based algorithm.
#
# See https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_WLAN_channels#6_GHz_(802.11ax_and_802.11be)
channel=7

# Global operating class (IEEE 802.11, Annex E, Table E-4)
# This option allows hostapd to specify the operating class of the channel
# configured with the channel parameter. channel and op_class together can
# uniquely identify channels across different bands, including the 6 GHz band.
# 131 signifies channel width: 20 MHz
# 132 signifies channel width: 40 MHz
# 133 signifies channel width: 80 MHz
# 134 signifies channel width: 160 MHz
#op_class=134       # Not needed for 2.4ghz

# ACS tuning - Automatic Channel Selection
# See: https://wireless.wiki.kernel.org/en/users/documentation/acs
#
# You can customize the ACS survey algorithm with following variables:
#
# acs_num_scans requirement is 1..100 - number of scans to be performed that
# are used to trigger survey data gathering of an underlying device driver.
# Scans are passive and typically take a little over 100ms (depending on the
# driver) on each available channel for given hw_mode. Increasing this value
# means sacrificing startup time and gathering more data wrt channel
# interference that may help choosing a better channel. This can also help fine
# tune the ACS scan time in case a driver has different scan dwell times.
#
# acs_chan_bias is a space-separated list of <channel>:<bias> pairs. It can be
# used to increase (or decrease) the likelihood of a specific channel to be
# selected by the ACS algorithm. The total interference factor for each channel
# gets multiplied by the specified bias value before finding the channel with
# the lowest value. In other words, values between 0.0 and 1.0 can be used to
# make a channel more likely to be picked while values larger than 1.0 make the
# specified channel less likely to be picked. This can be used, e.g., to prefer
# the commonly used 2.4 GHz band channels 1, 6, and 11 (which is the default
# behavior on 2.4 GHz band if no acs_chan_bias parameter is specified).
#
# Defaults:
#acs_num_scans=5
#acs_chan_bias=1:0.8 6:0.8 11:0.8

# Channel list restriction. This option allows hostapd to select one of the
# provided channels when a channel should be automatically selected.
# Channel list can be provided as range using hyphen ('-') or individual
# channels can be specified by space (' ') separated values
# Default: all channels allowed in selected hw_mode
#chanlist=100 104 108 112 116
#chanlist=1 6 11-13

# Frequency list restriction. This option allows hostapd to select one of the
# provided frequencies when a frequency should be automatically selected.
# Frequency list can be provided as range using hyphen ('-') or individual
# frequencies can be specified by comma (',') separated values
# Default: all frequencies allowed in selected hw_mode
#freqlist=2437,5955,5975
#freqlist=2437,5985-6105

# Exclude DFS channels from ACS
# This option can be used to exclude all DFS channels from the ACS channel list
# in cases where the driver supports DFS channels.
#acs_exclude_dfs=1

# Include only preferred scan channels from 6 GHz band for ACS
# This option can be used to include only preferred scan channels in the 6 GHz
# band. This can be useful in particular for devices that operate only a 6 GHz
# BSS without a collocated 2.4/5 GHz BSS.
# Default behavior is to include all PSC and non-PSC channels.
#acs_exclude_6ghz_non_psc=1

# Enable background radar feature
# This feature allows CAC to be run on dedicated radio RF chains while the
# radio(s) are otherwise running normal AP activities on other channels.
# This requires that the driver and the radio support it before feature will
# actually be enabled, i.e., this parameter value is ignored with drivers that
# do not advertise support for the capability.
# 0: Leave disabled (default)
# 1: Enable it.
#enable_background_radar=1

# Set minimum permitted max TX power (in dBm) for ACS and DFS channel selection.
# (default 0, i.e., not constraint)
min_tx_power=50

# Beacon interval in kus (1.024 ms) (default: 100; range 15..65535)
beacon_int=100

# DTIM (delivery traffic information message) period (range 1..255):
# number of beacons between DTIMs (1 = every beacon includes DTIM element)
# (default: 2)
dtim_period=2

# Maximum number of stations allowed in station table. New stations will be
# rejected after the station table is full. IEEE 802.11 has a limit of 2007
# different association IDs, so this number should not be larger than that.
# (default: 2007, docs: 255)
max_num_sta=16

# RTS/CTS threshold; -1 = disabled (default); range -1..65535
# If this field is not included in hostapd.conf, hostapd will not control
# RTS threshold and 'iwconfig wlan# rts <val>' can be used to set it.
rts_threshold=-1

# Fragmentation threshold; -1 = disabled (default); range -1, 256..2346
# If this field is not included in hostapd.conf, hostapd will not control
# fragmentation threshold and 'iwconfig wlan# frag <val>' can be used to set
# it.
fragm_threshold=-1

# Rate configuration
# Default is to enable all rates supported by the hardware. This configuration
# item allows this list be filtered so that only the listed rates will be left
# in the list. If the list is empty, all rates are used. This list can have
# entries that are not in the list of rates the hardware supports (such entries
# are ignored). The entries in this list are in 100 kbps, i.e., 11 Mbps = 110.
# If this item is present, at least one rate have to be matching with the rates
# hardware supports.
# default: use the most common supported rate setting for the selected
# hw_mode (i.e., this line can be removed from configuration file in most
# cases)
#supported_rates=10 20 55 110 60 90 120 180 240 360 480 540

# Basic rate set configuration
# List of rates (in 100 kbps) that are included in the basic rate set.
# If this item is not included, usually reasonable default set is used.
#basic_rates=10 20
#basic_rates=10 20 55 110
#basic_rates=60 120 240

# Beacon frame TX rate configuration
# This sets the TX rate that is used to transmit Beacon frames. If this item is
# not included, the driver default rate (likely lowest rate) is used.
# Legacy (CCK/OFDM rates):
#    beacon_rate=<legacy rate in 100 kbps>
# HT:
#    beacon_rate=ht:<HT MCS>
# VHT:
#    beacon_rate=vht:<VHT MCS>
# HE:
#    beacon_rate=he:<HE MCS>
#
# For example, beacon_rate=10 for 1 Mbps or beacon_rate=60 for 6 Mbps (OFDM).
#beacon_rate=10

# Short Preamble
# This parameter can be used to enable optional use of short preamble for
# frames sent at 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, and 11 Mbps to improve network performance.
# This applies only to IEEE 802.11b-compatible networks and this should only be
# enabled if the local hardware supports use of short preamble. If any of the
# associated STAs do not support short preamble, use of short preamble will be
# disabled (and enabled when such STAs disassociate) dynamically.
# 0 = do not allow use of short preamble (default)
# 1 = allow use of short preamble
preamble=1

# Station MAC address -based authentication
# Please note that this kind of access control requires a driver that uses
# hostapd to take care of management frame processing and as such, this can be
# used with driver=hostap or driver=nl80211, but not with driver=atheros.
# 0 = accept unless in deny list
# 1 = deny unless in accept list
# 2 = use external RADIUS server (accept/deny lists are searched first)
macaddr_acl=0

# Accept/deny lists are read from separate files (containing list of
# MAC addresses, one per line). Use absolute path name to make sure that the
# files can be read on SIGHUP configuration reloads.
#accept_mac_file=/etc/hostapd.accept
#deny_mac_file=/etc/hostapd.deny

# IEEE 802.11 specifies two authentication algorithms. hostapd can be
# configured to allow both of these or only one. Open system authentication
# should be used with IEEE 802.1X.
# Bit fields of allowed authentication algorithms:
# bit 0 = Open System Authentication
# bit 1 = Shared Key Authentication (requires WEP)
# 3 = both are allowed
auth_algs=1

# Send empty SSID in beacons and ignore probe request frames that do not
# specify full SSID, i.e., require stations to know SSID.
# default: disabled (0)
# 1 = send empty (length=0) SSID in beacon and ignore probe request for
#     broadcast SSID
# 2 = clear SSID (ASCII 0), but keep the original length (this may be required
#     with some clients that do not support empty SSID) and ignore probe
#     requests for broadcast SSID
ignore_broadcast_ssid=0

# Do not reply to broadcast Probe Request frames from unassociated STA if there
# is no room for additional stations (max_num_sta). This can be used to
# discourage a STA from trying to associate with this AP if the association
# would be rejected due to maximum STA limit.
# Default: 0 (disabled)
#no_probe_resp_if_max_sta=0

# Additional vendor specific elements for Beacon and Probe Response frames
# This parameter can be used to add additional vendor specific element(s) into
# the end of the Beacon and Probe Response frames. The format for these
# element(s) is a hexdump of the raw information elements (id+len+payload for
# one or more elements)
#vendor_elements=dd0411223301

# Additional vendor specific elements for (Re)Association Response frames
# This parameter can be used to add additional vendor specific element(s) into
# the end of the (Re)Association Response frames. The format for these
# element(s) is a hexdump of the raw information elements (id+len+payload for
# one or more elements)
#assocresp_elements=dd0411223301

# TX queue parameters (EDCF / bursting)
# tx_queue_<queue name>_<param>
# queues: data0, data1, data2, data3
#		(data0 is the highest priority queue)
# parameters:
#   aifs: AIFS (default 2)
#   cwmin: cwMin (1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023, 2047, 4095, 8191,
#	   16383, 32767)
#   cwmax: cwMax (same values as cwMin, cwMax >= cwMin)
#   burst: maximum length (in milliseconds with precision of up to 0.1 ms) for
#          bursting
#
# Default WMM parameters (IEEE 802.11 draft; 11-03-0504-03-000e):
# These parameters are used by the access point when transmitting frames
# to the clients.
#
# Low priority / AC_BK = background
#tx_queue_data3_aifs=7
#tx_queue_data3_cwmin=15
#tx_queue_data3_cwmax=1023
#tx_queue_data3_burst=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=31 cWmax=1023 burst=0
#
# Normal priority / AC_BE = best effort
#tx_queue_data2_aifs=3
#tx_queue_data2_cwmin=15
#tx_queue_data2_cwmax=63
tx_queue_data2_burst=2.0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=31 cWmax=127 burst=0
#
# High priority / AC_VI = video
#tx_queue_data1_aifs=1
#tx_queue_data1_cwmin=7
#tx_queue_data1_cwmax=15
#tx_queue_data1_burst=3.0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=15 cWmax=31 burst=6.0
#
# Highest priority / AC_VO = voice
#tx_queue_data0_aifs=1
#tx_queue_data0_cwmin=3
#tx_queue_data0_cwmax=7
#tx_queue_data0_burst=1.5
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=7 cWmax=15 burst=3.3

# 802.1D Tag (= UP) to AC mappings
# WMM specifies following mapping of data frames to different ACs. This mapping
# can be configured using Linux QoS/tc and sch_pktpri.o module.
# 802.1D Tag	802.1D Designation	Access Category	WMM Designation
# 1		BK			AC_BK		Background
# 2		-			AC_BK		Background
# 0		BE			AC_BE		Best Effort
# 3		EE			AC_BE		Best Effort
# 4		CL			AC_VI		Video
# 5		VI			AC_VI		Video
# 6		VO			AC_VO		Voice
# 7		NC			AC_VO		Voice
# Data frames with no priority information: AC_BE
# Management frames: AC_VO
# PS-Poll frames: AC_BE

# Wireless Multimedia Extensions (WME)
wme_enabled=1

# Default WMM parameters (IEEE 802.11 draft; 11-03-0504-03-000e):
# for 802.11a or 802.11g networks
# These parameters are sent to WMM clients when they associate.
# The parameters will be used by WMM clients for frames transmitted to the
# access point.
#
# note - txop_limit is in units of 32microseconds
# note - acm is admission control mandatory flag. 0 = admission control not
# required, 1 = mandatory
# note - Here cwMin and cmMax are in exponent form. The actual cw value used
# will be (2^n)-1 where n is the value given here. The allowed range for these
# wmm_ac_??_{cwmin,cwmax} is 0..15 with cwmax >= cwmin.
#
wmm_enabled=1
#
# WMM-PS Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery [U-APSD]
# Enable this flag if U-APSD supported outside hostapd (eg., Firmware/driver)
uapsd_advertisement_enabled=1
#
# Low priority / AC_BK = background
wmm_ac_bk_cwmin=4
wmm_ac_bk_cwmax=10
wmm_ac_bk_aifs=7
wmm_ac_bk_txop_limit=0
wmm_ac_bk_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=5 cWmax=10
#
# Normal priority / AC_BE = best effort
wmm_ac_be_aifs=3
wmm_ac_be_cwmin=4
wmm_ac_be_cwmax=10
wmm_ac_be_txop_limit=0
wmm_ac_be_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=5 cWmax=7
#
# High priority / AC_VI = video
wmm_ac_vi_aifs=2
wmm_ac_vi_cwmin=3
wmm_ac_vi_cwmax=4
wmm_ac_vi_txop_limit=94
wmm_ac_vi_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=4 cWmax=5 txop_limit=188
#
# Highest priority / AC_VO = voice
wmm_ac_vo_aifs=2
wmm_ac_vo_cwmin=2
wmm_ac_vo_cwmax=3
wmm_ac_vo_txop_limit=47
wmm_ac_vo_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=3 cWmax=4 burst=102

# Enable Multi-AP functionality
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = AP support backhaul BSS
# 2 = AP support fronthaul BSS
# 3 = AP supports both backhaul BSS and fronthaul BSS
multi_ap=0

# Static WEP key configuration
#
# The key number to use when transmitting.
# It must be between 0 and 3, and the corresponding key must be set.
# default: not set
#wep_default_key=0
# The WEP keys to use.
# A key may be a quoted string or unquoted hexadecimal digits.
# The key length should be 5, 13, or 16 characters, or 10, 26, or 32
# digits, depending on whether 40-bit (64-bit), 104-bit (128-bit), or
# 128-bit (152-bit) WEP is used.
# Only the default key must be supplied; the others are optional.
# default: not set
#wep_key0=123456789a
#wep_key1="vwxyz"
#wep_key2=0102030405060708090a0b0c0d
#wep_key3=".2.4.6.8.0.23"

# Station inactivity limit
#
# If a station does not send anything in ap_max_inactivity seconds, an
# empty data frame is sent to it in order to verify whether it is
# still in range. If this frame is not ACKed, the station will be
# disassociated and then deauthenticated. This feature is used to
# clear station table of old entries when the STAs move out of the
# range.
#
# The station can associate again with the AP if it is still in range;
# this inactivity poll is just used as a nicer way of verifying
# inactivity; i.e., client will not report broken connection because
# disassociation frame is not sent immediately without first polling
# the STA with a data frame.
# default: 300 (i.e., 5 minutes)
#ap_max_inactivity=300
#
# The inactivity polling can be disabled to disconnect stations based on
# inactivity timeout so that idle stations are more likely to be disconnected
# even if they are still in range of the AP. This can be done by setting
# skip_inactivity_poll to 1 (default 0).
skip_inactivity_poll=0
#
# BSS max idle period management
# 0 = disabled (do not advertise and manage BSS max idle period)
# 1 = enabled (advertise and manage BSS max idle period; default)
# 2 = enabled requiring protected frames (advertise and manage BSS max idle
#     period and require STAs to use protected keep-alive frames)
#bss_max_idle=1
#
# Maximum acceptable BSS maximum idle period
# If this is set to a nonzero value, the AP allows STAs to request different
# maximum idle period values. This is in the units to 1000 TUs (1.024 s)
#max_acceptable_idle_period=600
#
# Allow STA to skip group key handshake without getting disconnection when
# BSS max idle period management is enabled.
# 0 = disconnect STA if it does not reply to group key handshake (default)
# 1 = do not disconnect STA if it does not reply to group key handshake and
#     if BSS max idle period management is enabled
#no_disconnect_on_group_keyerror=0

# Disassociate stations based on excessive transmission failures or other
# indications of connection loss. This depends on the driver capabilities and
# may not be available with all drivers.
disassoc_low_ack=0

# Maximum allowed Listen Interval (how many Beacon periods STAs are allowed to
# remain asleep). Default: 65535 (no limit apart from field size)
#max_listen_interval=100

# WDS (4-address frame) mode with per-station virtual interfaces
# (only supported with driver=nl80211)
# This mode allows associated stations to use 4-address frames to allow layer 2
# bridging to be used.
wds_sta=1

# If bridge parameter is set, the WDS STA interface will be added to the same
# bridge by default. This can be overridden with the wds_bridge parameter to
# use a separate bridge.
#wds_bridge=wds-br0

# Start the AP with beaconing disabled by default.
#start_disabled=0

# Client isolation can be used to prevent low-level bridging of frames between
# associated stations in the BSS. By default, this bridging is allowed.
#ap_isolate=1

# BSS Load update period (in BUs)
# This field is used to enable and configure adding a BSS Load element into
# Beacon and Probe Response frames.
bss_load_update_period=60

# Channel utilization averaging period (in BUs)
# This field is used to enable and configure channel utilization average
# calculation with bss_load_update_period. This should be in multiples of
# bss_load_update_period for more accurate calculation.
chan_util_avg_period=600

# Fixed BSS Load value for testing purposes
# This field can be used to configure hostapd to add a fixed BSS Load element
# into Beacon and Probe Response frames for testing purposes. The format is
# <station count>:<channel utilization>:<available admission capacity>
#bss_load_test=12:80:20000

# Multicast to unicast conversion
# Request that the AP will do multicast-to-unicast conversion for ARP, IPv4, and
# IPv6 frames (possibly within 802.1Q). If enabled, such frames are to be sent
# to each station separately, with the DA replaced by their own MAC address
# rather than the group address.
#
# Note that this may break certain expectations of the receiver, such as the
# ability to drop unicast IP packets received within multicast L2 frames, or the
# ability to not send ICMP destination unreachable messages for packets received
# in L2 multicast (which is required, but the receiver can't tell the difference
# if this new option is enabled).
#
# This also doesn't implement the 802.11 DMS (directed multicast service).
#
#multicast_to_unicast=0

# Send broadcast Deauthentication frame on AP start/stop
# Default: 1 (enabled)
#broadcast_deauth=1

# Get notifications for received Management frames on control interface
# Default: 0 (disabled)
#notify_mgmt_frames=0

##### IEEE 802.11n related configuration ######################################

# ieee80211n: Whether IEEE 802.11n (HT) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
# Note: You will also need to enable WMM for full HT functionality.
# Note: hw_mode=g (2.4 GHz) and hw_mode=a (5 GHz) is used to specify the band.
ieee80211n=1

# disable_11n: Boolean (0/1) to disable HT for a specific BSS
#disable_11n=0

# ht_capab: HT capabilities (list of flags)
# LDPC coding capability: [LDPC] = supported
# Supported channel width set: [HT40-] = both 20 MHz and 40 MHz with secondary
#	channel below the primary channel; [HT40+] = both 20 MHz and 40 MHz
#	with secondary channel above the primary channel
#	(20 MHz only if neither is set)
#	Note: There are limits on which channels can be used with HT40- and
#	HT40+. Following table shows the channels that may be available for
#	HT40- and HT40+ use per IEEE 802.11n Annex J:
#	freq		HT40-		HT40+
#	2.4 GHz		5-13		1-7 (1-9 in Europe/Japan)
#	5 GHz		40,48,56,64	36,44,52,60
#	(depending on the location, not all of these channels may be available
#	for use)
#	Please note that 40 MHz channels may switch their primary and secondary
#	channels if needed or creation of 40 MHz channel maybe rejected based
#	on overlapping BSSes. These changes are done automatically when hostapd
#	is setting up the 40 MHz channel.
# HT-greenfield: [GF] (disabled if not set)
# Short GI for 20 MHz: [SHORT-GI-20] (disabled if not set)
# Short GI for 40 MHz: [SHORT-GI-40] (disabled if not set)
# Tx STBC: [TX-STBC] (disabled if not set)
# Rx STBC: [RX-STBC1] (one spatial stream), [RX-STBC12] (one or two spatial
#	streams), or [RX-STBC123] (one, two, or three spatial streams); Rx STBC
#	disabled if none of these set
# HT-delayed Block Ack: [DELAYED-BA] (disabled if not set)
# Maximum A-MSDU length: [MAX-AMSDU-7935] for 7935 octets (3839 octets if not
#	set)
# DSSS/CCK Mode in 40 MHz: [DSSS_CCK-40] = allowed (not allowed if not set)
# 40 MHz intolerant [40-INTOLERANT] (not advertised if not set)
# L-SIG TXOP protection support: [LSIG-TXOP-PROT] (disabled if not set)
ht_capab=[HT20][HT40+][SHORTGI20][SHORTGI40][DSSS_CCK_40][TXSTBC][RXSTBC1]


# Require stations to support HT PHY (reject association if they do not)
#require_ht=1

# If set non-zero, require stations to perform scans of overlapping
# channels to test for stations which would be affected by 40 MHz traffic.
# This parameter sets the interval in seconds between these scans. Setting this
# to non-zero allows 2.4 GHz band AP to move dynamically to a 40 MHz channel if
# no co-existence issues with neighboring devices are found.
#obss_interval=0

# ht_vht_twt_responder: Whether TWT responder is enabled in HT and VHT modes
# 0 = disable; Disable TWT responder support in  HT and VHT modes (default).
# 1 = enable; Enable TWT responder support in HT and VHT modes if supported by
# the driver.
#ht_vht_twt_responder=0

##### IEEE 802.11ac related configuration #####################################

# ieee80211ac: Whether IEEE 802.11ac (VHT) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
# Note: You will also need to enable WMM for full VHT functionality.
# Note: hw_mode=a is used to specify that 5 GHz band is used with VHT.
ieee80211ac=1

# disable_11ac: Boolean (0/1) to disable VHT for a specific BSS
#disable_11ac=0

# vht_capab: VHT capabilities (list of flags)
#
# vht_max_mpdu_len: [MAX-MPDU-7991] [MAX-MPDU-11454]
# Indicates maximum MPDU length
# 0 = 3895 octets (default)
# 1 = 7991 octets
# 2 = 11454 octets
# 3 = reserved
#
# supported_chan_width: [VHT160] [VHT160-80PLUS80]
# Indicates supported Channel widths
# 0 = 160 MHz & 80+80 channel widths are not supported (default)
# 1 = 160 MHz channel width is supported
# 2 = 160 MHz & 80+80 channel widths are supported
# 3 = reserved
#
# Rx LDPC coding capability: [RXLDPC]
# Indicates support for receiving LDPC coded pkts
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Short GI for 80 MHz: [SHORT-GI-80]
# Indicates short GI support for reception of packets transmitted with TXVECTOR
# params format equal to VHT and CBW = 80Mhz
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Short GI for 160 MHz: [SHORT-GI-160]
# Indicates short GI support for reception of packets transmitted with TXVECTOR
# params format equal to VHT and CBW = 160Mhz
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Tx STBC: [TX-STBC-2BY1]
# Indicates support for the transmission of at least 2x1 STBC
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Rx STBC: [RX-STBC-1] [RX-STBC-12] [RX-STBC-123] [RX-STBC-1234]
# Indicates support for the reception of PPDUs using STBC
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = support of one spatial stream
# 2 = support of one and two spatial streams
# 3 = support of one, two and three spatial streams
# 4 = support of one, two, three and four spatial streams
# 5,6,7 = reserved
#
# SU Beamformer Capable: [SU-BEAMFORMER]
# Indicates support for operation as a single user beamformer
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# SU Beamformee Capable: [SU-BEAMFORMEE]
# Indicates support for operation as a single user beamformee
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Compressed Steering Number of Beamformer Antennas Supported:
# [BF-ANTENNA-2] [BF-ANTENNA-3] [BF-ANTENNA-4]
#   Beamformee's capability indicating the maximum number of beamformer
#   antennas the beamformee can support when sending compressed beamforming
#   feedback
# If SU beamformer capable, set to maximum value minus 1
# else reserved (default)
#
# Number of Sounding Dimensions:
# [SOUNDING-DIMENSION-2] [SOUNDING-DIMENSION-3] [SOUNDING-DIMENSION-4]
# Beamformer's capability indicating the maximum value of the NUM_STS parameter
# in the TXVECTOR of a VHT NDP
# If SU beamformer capable, set to maximum value minus 1
# else reserved (default)
#
# MU Beamformer Capable: [MU-BEAMFORMER]
# Indicates support for operation as an MU beamformer
# 0 = Not supported or sent by Non-AP STA (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# VHT TXOP PS: [VHT-TXOP-PS]
# Indicates whether or not the AP supports VHT TXOP Power Save Mode
#  or whether or not the STA is in VHT TXOP Power Save mode
# 0 = VHT AP doesn't support VHT TXOP PS mode (OR) VHT STA not in VHT TXOP PS
#  mode
# 1 = VHT AP supports VHT TXOP PS mode (OR) VHT STA is in VHT TXOP power save
#  mode
#
# +HTC-VHT Capable: [HTC-VHT]
# Indicates whether or not the STA supports receiving a VHT variant HT Control
# field.
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#
# Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent: [MAX-A-MPDU-LEN-EXP0]..[MAX-A-MPDU-LEN-EXP7]
# Indicates the maximum length of A-MPDU pre-EOF padding that the STA can recv
# This field is an integer in the range of 0 to 7.
# The length defined by this field is equal to
# 2 pow(13 + Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent) -1 octets
#
# VHT Link Adaptation Capable: [VHT-LINK-ADAPT2] [VHT-LINK-ADAPT3]
# Indicates whether or not the STA supports link adaptation using VHT variant
# HT Control field
# If +HTC-VHTcapable is 1
#  0 = (no feedback) if the STA does not provide VHT MFB (default)
#  1 = reserved
#  2 = (Unsolicited) if the STA provides only unsolicited VHT MFB
#  3 = (Both) if the STA can provide VHT MFB in response to VHT MRQ and if the
#      STA provides unsolicited VHT MFB
# Reserved if +HTC-VHTcapable is 0
#
# Rx Antenna Pattern Consistency: [RX-ANTENNA-PATTERN]
# Indicates the possibility of Rx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Rx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Rx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
#
# Tx Antenna Pattern Consistency: [TX-ANTENNA-PATTERN]
# Indicates the possibility of Tx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Tx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Tx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
#vht_capab=[VHT160][TXSTBC][RXSTBC1][SHORTGI-80][SHORTGI-160][1024-QAM][MU-BEAMFORMEE][MU-BEAMFORMER][SU-BEAMFORMEE][SU-BEAMFORMER]
#
# Require stations to support VHT PHY (reject association if they do not)
#require_vht=1

# 0 = 20 or 40 MHz operating Channel width
# 1 = 80 MHz channel width
# 2 = 160 MHz channel width
# 3 = 80+80 MHz channel width
vht_oper_chwidth=2
#
# center freq = 5 GHz + (5 * index)
# So index 42 gives center freq 5.210 GHz
# which is channel 42 in 5G band
#
#vht_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx=42
#
# center freq = 5 GHz + (5 * index)
# So index 159 gives center freq 5.795 GHz
# which is channel 159 in 5G band
#
#vht_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx=159

# Workaround to use station's nsts capability in (Re)Association Response frame
# This may be needed with some deployed devices as an interoperability
# workaround for beamforming if the AP's capability is greater than the
# station's capability. This is disabled by default and can be enabled by
# setting use_sta_nsts=1.
#use_sta_nsts=0

##### IEEE 802.11ax related configuration #####################################

#ieee80211ax: Whether IEEE 802.11ax (HE) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
ieee80211ax=1

# Require stations to support HE PHY (reject association if they do not)
#require_he=1

# disable_11ax: Boolean (0/1) to disable HE for a specific BSS
#disable_11ax=0

#he_su_beamformer: HE single user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
he_su_beamformer=1

#he_su_beamformee: HE single user beamformee support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
he_su_beamformee=1

#he_mu_beamformer: HE multiple user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
he_mu_beamformer=1

# he_bss_color: BSS color (1-63)
# used by clients to discern the source of interference
# each AP in your area needs to use a different number
he_bss_color=47

# he_bss_color_partial: BSS color AID equation
#he_bss_color_partial=0

#he_default_pe_duration: The duration of PE field in an HE PPDU in us
# Possible values are 0 us (default), 4 us, 8 us, 12 us, and 16 us
#he_default_pe_duration=0

#he_twt_required: Whether TWT is required
# 0 = not required (default)
# 1 = required
#he_twt_required=0

#he_twt_responder: Whether TWT (HE) responder is enabled
# 0 = disabled
# 1 = enabled if supported by the driver (default)
#he_twt_responder=1

#he_rts_threshold: Duration of STA transmission
# 0 = not set (default)
# unsigned integer = duration in units of 16 us
#he_rts_threshold=0

#he_er_su_disable: Disable 242-tone HE ER SU PPDU reception by the AP
# 0 = enable reception (default)
# 1 = disable reception
#he_er_su_disable=0

# HE operating channel information; see matching vht_* parameters for details.
# he_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx field is used to indicate center frequency of 80
# and 160 MHz bandwidth operation. In 80+80 MHz operation, it is the center
# frequency of the lower frequency segment. he_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx field
# is used only with 80+80 MHz bandwidth operation and it is used to transmit
# the center frequency of the second segment.
# On the 6 GHz band the center freq calculation starts from 5.950 GHz offset.
# For example idx=3 would result in 5965 MHz center frequency. In addition,
# he_oper_chwidth is ignored, and the channel width is derived from the
# configured operating class or center frequency indexes (see
# IEEE P802.11ax/D6.1 Annex E, Table E-4).
# Channel width (0 = 40 MHz. 1 = 80 Mhz)
#he_oper_chwidth=0
#he_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx=11     # Not relevant for 2.4ghz
#he_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx

#he_basic_mcs_nss_set: Basic NSS/MCS set
# 16-bit combination of 2-bit values of Max HE-MCS For 1..8 SS; each 2-bit
# value having following meaning:
# 0 = HE-MCS 0-7, 1 = HE-MCS 0-9, 2 = HE-MCS 0-11, 3 = not supported
he_basic_mcs_nss_set=0x2222

#he_mu_edca_qos_info_param_count
#he_mu_edca_qos_info_q_ack
#he_mu_edca_qos_info_queue_request=1
#he_mu_edca_qos_info_txop_request
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_timer=255
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_aci=1
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_timer=255
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_aci=2
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_timer=255
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_aci=3
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_timer=255

# Spatial Reuse Parameter Set
#
# SR Control field value
# B0 = PSR Disallowed
# B1 = Non-SRG OBSS PD SR Disallowed
# B2 = Non-SRG Offset Present
# B3 = SRG Information Present
# B4 = HESIGA_Spatial_reuse_value15_allowed
#he_spr_sr_control
#
# Non-SRG OBSS PD Max Offset (included if he_spr_sr_control B2=1)
#he_spr_non_srg_obss_pd_max_offset

# SRG OBSS PD Min Offset (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
#he_spr_srg_obss_pd_min_offset
#
# SRG OBSS PD Max Offset (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
#he_spr_srg_obss_pd_max_offset
#
# SPR SRG BSS Color (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
# This config represents SRG BSS Color Bitmap field of Spatial Reuse Parameter
# Set element that indicates the BSS color values used by members of the
# SRG of which the transmitting STA is a member. The value is in range of 0-63.
#he_spr_srg_bss_colors=1 2 10 63
#
# SPR SRG Partial BSSID (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
# This config represents SRG Partial BSSID Bitmap field of Spatial Reuse
# Parameter Set element that indicates the Partial BSSID values used by members
# of the SRG of which the transmitting STA is a member. The value range
# corresponds to one of the 64 possible values of BSSID[39:44], where the lowest
# numbered bit corresponds to Partial BSSID value 0 and the highest numbered bit
# corresponds to Partial BSSID value 63.
#he_spr_srg_partial_bssid=0 1 3 63
#
#he_6ghz_max_mpdu: Maximum MPDU Length of HE 6 GHz band capabilities.
# Indicates maximum MPDU length
# 0 = 3895 octets
# 1 = 7991 octets
# 2 = 11454 octets (default)
#he_6ghz_max_mpdu=2
#
#he_6ghz_max_ampdu_len_exp: Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent of HE 6 GHz band
# capabilities. Indicates the maximum length of A-MPDU pre-EOF padding that
# the STA can receive. This field is an integer in the range of 0 to 7.
# The length defined by this field is equal to
# 2 pow(13 + Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent) -1 octets
# 0 = AMPDU length of 8k
# 1 = AMPDU length of 16k
# 2 = AMPDU length of 32k
# 3 = AMPDU length of 65k
# 4 = AMPDU length of 131k
# 5 = AMPDU length of 262k
# 6 = AMPDU length of 524k
# 7 = AMPDU length of 1048k (default)
#he_6ghz_max_ampdu_len_exp=7
#
#he_6ghz_rx_ant_pat: Rx Antenna Pattern Consistency of HE 6 GHz capability.
# Indicates the possibility of Rx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Rx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Rx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
#     (default)
he_6ghz_rx_ant_pat=1
#
#he_6ghz_tx_ant_pat: Tx Antenna Pattern Consistency of HE 6 GHz capability.
# Indicates the possibility of Tx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Tx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Tx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
#     (default)
he_6ghz_tx_ant_pat=1

# 6 GHz Access Point type
# This config is to set the 6 GHz Access Point type. Possible options are:
# 0 = Indoor AP
# 1 = Standard power AP
# 2 = Very low power AP (default)
# 3 = Indoor enabled AP
# 4 = Indoor standard power AP
# This has no impact for operation on other bands.
# See IEEE P802.11-REVme/D4.0, Table E-12 (Regulatory Info subfield encoding)
# for more details.
he_6ghz_reg_pwr_type=0
#
# 6 GHz Maximum Tx Power used in Transmit Power Envelope elements, where the
# "Transmit Power Interpretation" is set to "Regulatory client EIRP PSD".
# For Maximum Transmit Power Category subfield encoding set to default (0):
#reg_def_cli_eirp_psd=-1
# For Maximum Transmit Power Category subfield encoding set to subordinate (1):
#reg_sub_cli_eirp_psd=-1

# Unsolicited broadcast Probe Response transmission settings
# This is for the 6 GHz band only. If the interval is set to a non-zero value,
# the AP schedules unsolicited broadcast Probe Response frames to be
# transmitted for in-band discovery. Refer to
# IEEE P802.11ax/D8.0 26.17.2.3.2, AP behavior for fast passive scanning.
# Valid range: 0..20 TUs; default is 0 (disabled)
#unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval=0

#channel_usage: Whether Channel Usage procedures is supported by AP.
# 0 = Channel Usage support is disabled (default)
# 1 = Channel Usage support is enabled
#channel_usage=0

#peer_to_peer_twt: Indicates an HE AP supports negotiating a peer-to-peer
# TWT schedule that is requested by a non-AP STA to establish a
# channel-usage-aidable BSS or an off-channel TDLS direct link.
# 0 = Does not support Peer-to-peer TWT (default)
# 1 = Supports Peer-to-peer TWT
#peer_to_peer_twt=0

##### IEEE 802.11be related configuration #####################################

#ieee80211be: Whether IEEE 802.11be (EHT) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#ieee80211be=1

#disable_11be: Boolean (0/1) to disable EHT for a specific BSS
#disable_11be=0

#eht_su_beamformer: EHT single user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#eht_su_beamformer=1

#eht_su_beamformee: EHT single user beamformee support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#eht_su_beamformee=1

#eht_mu_beamformer: EHT multiple user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#eht_mu_beamformer=1

# EHT operating channel information; see matching he_* parameters for details.
# The field eht_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx field is used to indicate center
# frequency of 40, 80, and 160 MHz bandwidth operation.
# In the 6 GHz band, eht_oper_chwidth is ignored and the channel width is
# derived from the configured operating class (IEEE P802.11be/D1.5,
# Annex E.1 - Country information and operating classes).
#eht_oper_chwidth (see vht_oper_chwidth)
#eht_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx

#eht_default_pe_duration: The duration of PE field in EHT TB PPDU
# 0 = PE field duration is the same as he_default_pe_duration (default)
# 1 = PE field duration is 20 us
#eht_default_pe_duration=0

#eht_bw320_offset: For automatic channel selection (ACS) to indicate a preferred
# 320 MHz channelization in EHT mode.
# If the channel is decided or the bandwidth is not 320 MHz, this option is
# meaningless.
# 0 = auto-detect by hostapd
# 1 = 320 MHz-1 (channel center frequency 31, 95, 159)
# 2 = 320 MHz-2 (channel center frequency 63, 127, 191)
#eht_bw320_offset=0

# Disabled subchannel bitmap (16 bits) as per IEEE P802.11be/3.0,
# Figure 9-1002c (EHT Operation Information field format). Each bit corresponds
# to a 20 MHz channel, the lowest bit corresponds to the lowest frequency. A
# bit set to 1 indicates that the channel is punctured (disabled). The default
# value is 0 indicating that all channels are active.
#punct_bitmap=0

# Preamble puncturing threshold in automatic channel selection (ACS).
# The value indicates the percentage of ideal channel average interference
# factor above which a channel should be punctured.
# Default is 0, indicates that ACS algorithm should not puncture any channel.
#punct_acs_threshold=75

# AP MLD - Whether this AP is a part of an AP MLD
# 0 = no (no MLO)
# 1 = yes (MLO)
#mld_ap=0

# AP MLD MAC address
# The configured address will be set as the interface hardware address and used
# as the AP MLD MAC address. If not set, the current interface hardware address
# will be used as the AP MLD MAC address.
#mld_addr=02:03:04:05:06:07

##### IEEE 802.1X-2004 related configuration ##################################

# Require IEEE 802.1X authorization
#ieee8021x=1

# IEEE 802.1X/EAPOL version
# hostapd is implemented based on IEEE Std 802.1X-2004 which defines EAPOL
# version 2. However, there are many client implementations that do not handle
# the new version number correctly (they seem to drop the frames completely).
# In order to make hostapd interoperate with these clients, the version number
# can be set to the older version (1) with this configuration value.
# Note: When using MACsec, eapol_version shall be set to 3, which is
# defined in IEEE Std 802.1X-2010.
#eapol_version=2

# Optional displayable message sent with EAP Request-Identity. The first \0
# in this string will be converted to ASCII-0 (nul). This can be used to
# separate network info (comma separated list of attribute=value pairs); see,
# e.g., RFC 4284.
#eap_message=hello
#eap_message=hello\0networkid=netw,nasid=foo,portid=0,NAIRealms=example.com

# WEP rekeying (disabled if key lengths are not set or are set to 0)
# Key lengths for default/broadcast and individual/unicast keys:
# 5 = 40-bit WEP (also known as 64-bit WEP with 40 secret bits)
# 13 = 104-bit WEP (also known as 128-bit WEP with 104 secret bits)
#wep_key_len_broadcast=5
#wep_key_len_unicast=5
# Rekeying period in seconds. 0 = do not rekey (i.e., set keys only once)
#wep_rekey_period=300

# EAPOL-Key index workaround (set bit7) for WinXP Supplicant (needed only if
# only broadcast keys are used)
eapol_key_index_workaround=0

# EAP reauthentication period in seconds (default: 3600 seconds; 0 = disable
# reauthentication).
# Note: Reauthentications may enforce a disconnection, check the related
# parameter wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey for details.
#eap_reauth_period=3600

# Use PAE group address (01:80:c2:00:00:03) instead of individual target
# address when sending EAPOL frames with driver=wired. This is the most common
# mechanism used in wired authentication, but it also requires that the port
# is only used by one station.
#use_pae_group_addr=1

# EAP Re-authentication Protocol (ERP) authenticator (RFC 6696)
#
# Whether to initiate EAP authentication with EAP-Initiate/Re-auth-Start before
# EAP-Identity/Request
#erp_send_reauth_start=1
#
# Domain name for EAP-Initiate/Re-auth-Start. Omitted from the message if not
# set (no local ER server). This is also used by the integrated EAP server if
# ERP is enabled (eap_server_erp=1).
#erp_domain=example.com

##### MACsec ##################################################################

# macsec_policy: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec options
# This determines how sessions are secured with MACsec (only for MACsec
# drivers).
# 0: MACsec not in use (default)
# 1: MACsec enabled - Should secure, accept key server's advice to
#    determine whether to use a secure session or not.
#
# macsec_integ_only: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec transmit mode
# This setting applies only when MACsec is in use, i.e.,
#  - macsec_policy is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0: Encrypt traffic (default)
# 1: Integrity only
#
# macsec_replay_protect: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec replay protection
# This setting applies only when MACsec is in use, i.e.,
#  - macsec_policy is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0: Replay protection disabled (default)
# 1: Replay protection enabled
#
# macsec_replay_window: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec replay protection window
# This determines a window in which replay is tolerated, to allow receipt
# of frames that have been misordered by the network.
# This setting applies only when MACsec replay protection active, i.e.,
#  - macsec_replay_protect is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0: No replay window, strict check (default)
# 1..2^32-1: number of packets that could be misordered
#
# macsec_offload: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec hardware offload
# This setting applies only when MACsec is in use, i.e.,
#  - macsec_policy is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0 = MACSEC_OFFLOAD_OFF (default)
# 1 = MACSEC_OFFLOAD_PHY
# 2 = MACSEC_OFFLOAD_MAC
#
# macsec_port: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec port
# Port component of the SCI
# Range: 1-65534 (default: 1)
#
# mka_priority (Priority of MKA Actor)
# Range: 0..255 (default: 255)
#
# macsec_csindex: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec cipher suite
# 0 = GCM-AES-128 (default)
# 1 = GCM-AES-256 (default)
#
# mka_cak, mka_ckn, and mka_priority: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec pre-shared key mode
# This allows to configure MACsec with a pre-shared key using a (CAK,CKN) pair.
# In this mode, instances of hostapd can act as MACsec peers. The peer
# with lower priority will become the key server and start distributing SAKs.
# mka_cak (CAK = Secure Connectivity Association Key) takes a 16-byte (128-bit)
# hex-string (32 hex-digits) or a 32-byte (256-bit) hex-string (64 hex-digits)
# mka_ckn (CKN = CAK Name) takes a 1..32-bytes (8..256 bit) hex-string
# (2..64 hex-digits)

##### Integrated EAP server ###################################################

# Optionally, hostapd can be configured to use an integrated EAP server
# to process EAP authentication locally without need for an external RADIUS
# server. This functionality can be used both as a local authentication server
# for IEEE 802.1X/EAPOL and as a RADIUS server for other devices.

# Use integrated EAP server instead of external RADIUS authentication
# server. This is also needed if hostapd is configured to act as a RADIUS
# authentication server.
eap_server=0

# Path for EAP server user database
# If SQLite support is included, this can be set to "sqlite:/path/to/sqlite.db"
# to use SQLite database instead of a text file.
#eap_user_file=/etc/hostapd.eap_user

# CA certificate (PEM or DER file) for EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS
#ca_cert=/etc/hostapd.ca.pem

# Server certificate (PEM or DER file) for EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS
#server_cert=/etc/hostapd.server.pem

# Private key matching with the server certificate for EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS
# This may point to the same file as server_cert if both certificate and key
# are included in a single file. PKCS#12 (PFX) file (.p12/.pfx) can also be
# used by commenting out server_cert and specifying the PFX file as the
# private_key.
#private_key=/etc/hostapd.server.prv

# Passphrase for private key
#private_key_passwd=secret passphrase

# An alternative server certificate and private key can be configured with the
# following parameters (with values just like the parameters above without the
# '2' suffix). The ca_cert file (in PEM encoding) is used to add the trust roots
# for both server certificates and/or client certificates).
#
# The main use case for this alternative server certificate configuration is to
# enable both RSA and ECC public keys. The server will pick which one to use
# based on the client preferences for the cipher suite (in the TLS ClientHello
# message). It should be noted that number of deployed EAP peer implementations
# do not filter out the cipher suite list based on their local configuration and
# as such, configuration of alternative types of certificates on the server may
# result in interoperability issues.
#server_cert2=/etc/hostapd.server-ecc.pem
#private_key2=/etc/hostapd.server-ecc.prv
#private_key_passwd2=secret passphrase


# Server identity
# EAP methods that provide mechanism for authenticated server identity delivery
# use this value. If not set, "hostapd" is used as a default.
#server_id=server.example.com

# Enable CRL verification.
# Note: hostapd does not yet support CRL downloading based on CDP. Thus, a
# valid CRL signed by the CA is required to be included in the ca_cert file.
# This can be done by using PEM format for CA certificate and CRL and
# concatenating these into one file. Whenever CRL changes, hostapd needs to be
# restarted to take the new CRL into use. Alternatively, crl_reload_interval can
# be used to configure periodic updating of the loaded CRL information.
# 0 = do not verify CRLs (default)
# 1 = check the CRL of the user certificate
# 2 = check all CRLs in the certificate path
#check_crl=1

# Specify whether to ignore certificate CRL validity time mismatches with
# errors X509_V_ERR_CRL_HAS_EXPIRED and X509_V_ERR_CRL_NOT_YET_VALID.
#
# 0 = ignore errors
# 1 = do not ignore errors (default)
#check_crl_strict=1

# CRL reload interval in seconds
# This can be used to reload ca_cert file and the included CRL on every new TLS
# session if difference between last reload and the current reload time in
# seconds is greater than crl_reload_interval.
# Note: If interval time is very short, CPU overhead may be negatively affected
# and it is advised to not go below 300 seconds.
# This is applicable only with check_crl values 1 and 2.
# 0 = do not reload CRLs (default)
# crl_reload_interval = 300

# If check_cert_subject is set, the value of every field will be checked
# against the DN of the subject in the client certificate. If the values do
# not match, the certificate verification will fail, rejecting the user.
# This option allows hostapd to match every individual field in the right order
# against the DN of the subject in the client certificate.
#
# For example, check_cert_subject=C=US/O=XX/OU=ABC/OU=XYZ/CN=1234 will check
# every individual DN field of the subject in the client certificate. If OU=XYZ
# comes first in terms of the order in the client certificate (DN field of
# client certificate C=US/O=XX/OU=XYZ/OU=ABC/CN=1234), hostapd will reject the
# client because the order of 'OU' is not matching the specified string in
# check_cert_subject.
#
# This option also allows '*' as a wildcard. This option has some limitation.
# It can only be used as per the following example.
#
# For example, check_cert_subject=C=US/O=XX/OU=Production* and we have two
# clients and DN of the subject in the first client certificate is
# (C=US/O=XX/OU=Production Unit) and DN of the subject in the second client is
# (C=US/O=XX/OU=Production Factory). In this case, hostapd will allow both
# clients because the value of 'OU' field in both client certificates matches
# 'OU' value in 'check_cert_subject' up to 'wildcard'.
#
# * (Allow all clients, e.g., check_cert_subject=*)
#check_cert_subject=string

# TLS Session Lifetime in seconds
# This can be used to allow TLS sessions to be cached and resumed with an
# abbreviated handshake when using EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP.
# (default: 0 = session caching and resumption disabled)
#tls_session_lifetime=3600

# TLS flags
# [ALLOW-SIGN-RSA-MD5] = allow MD5-based certificate signatures (depending on
#	the TLS library, these may be disabled by default to enforce stronger
#	security)
# [DISABLE-TIME-CHECKS] = ignore certificate validity time (this requests
#	the TLS library to accept certificates even if they are not currently
#	valid, i.e., have expired or have not yet become valid; this should be
#	used only for testing purposes)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.0] = disable use of TLSv1.0
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.0] = explicitly enable use of TLSv1.0 (this allows
#	systemwide TLS policies to be overridden)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.1] = disable use of TLSv1.1
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.1] = explicitly enable use of TLSv1.1 (this allows
#	systemwide TLS policies to be overridden)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.2] = disable use of TLSv1.2
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.2] = explicitly enable use of TLSv1.2 (this allows
#	systemwide TLS policies to be overridden)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.3] = disable use of TLSv1.3
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.3] = enable TLSv1.3 (experimental - disabled by default)
#tls_flags=[flag1][flag2]...

# Maximum number of EAP message rounds with data (default: 100)
#max_auth_rounds=100

# Maximum number of short EAP message rounds (default: 50)
#max_auth_rounds_short=50

# Cached OCSP stapling response (DER encoded)
# If set, this file is sent as a certificate status response by the EAP server
# if the EAP peer requests certificate status in the ClientHello message.
# This cache file can be updated, e.g., by running following command
# periodically to get an update from the OCSP responder:
# openssl ocsp \
#	-no_nonce \
#	-CAfile /etc/hostapd.ca.pem \
#	-issuer /etc/hostapd.ca.pem \
#	-cert /etc/hostapd.server.pem \
#	-url http://ocsp.example.com:8888/ \
#	-respout /tmp/ocsp-cache.der
#ocsp_stapling_response=/tmp/ocsp-cache.der

# Cached OCSP stapling response list (DER encoded OCSPResponseList)
# This is similar to ocsp_stapling_response, but the extended version defined in
# RFC 6961 to allow multiple OCSP responses to be provided.
#ocsp_stapling_response_multi=/tmp/ocsp-multi-cache.der

# dh_file: File path to DH/DSA parameters file (in PEM format)
# This is an optional configuration file for setting parameters for an
# ephemeral DH key exchange. If the file is in DSA parameters format, it will
# be automatically converted into DH params. If the used TLS library supports
# automatic DH parameter selection, that functionality will be used if this
# parameter is not set. DH parameters are required if anonymous EAP-FAST is
# used.
# You can generate DH parameters file with OpenSSL, e.g.,
# "openssl dhparam -out /etc/hostapd.dh.pem 2048"
#dh_file=/etc/hostapd.dh.pem

# OpenSSL cipher string
#
# This is an OpenSSL specific configuration option for configuring the default
# ciphers. If not set, the value configured at build time ("DEFAULT:!EXP:!LOW"
# by default) is used.
# See https://www.openssl.org/docs/apps/ciphers.html for OpenSSL documentation
# on cipher suite configuration. This is applicable only if hostapd is built to
# use OpenSSL.
#openssl_ciphers=DEFAULT:!EXP:!LOW

# OpenSSL ECDH curves
#
# This is an OpenSSL specific configuration option for configuring the ECDH
# curves for EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP/FAST server. If not set, automatic curve
# selection is enabled. If set to an empty string, ECDH curve configuration is
# not done (the exact library behavior depends on the library version).
# Otherwise, this is a colon separated list of the supported curves (e.g.,
# P-521:P-384:P-256). This is applicable only if hostapd is built to use
# OpenSSL. This must not be used for Suite B cases since the same OpenSSL
# parameter is set differently in those cases and this might conflict with that
# design.
#openssl_ecdh_curves=P-521:P-384:P-256

# Fragment size for EAP methods
#fragment_size=1400

# Finite cyclic group for EAP-pwd. Number maps to group of domain parameters
# using the IANA repository for IKE (RFC 2409).
#pwd_group=19

# Configuration data for EAP-SIM database/authentication gateway interface.
# This is a text string in implementation specific format. The example
# implementation in eap_sim_db.c uses this as the UNIX domain socket name for
# the HLR/AuC gateway (e.g., hlr_auc_gw). In this case, the path uses "unix:"
# prefix. If hostapd is built with SQLite support (CONFIG_SQLITE=y in .config),
# database file can be described with an optional db=<path> parameter.
#eap_sim_db=unix:/tmp/hlr_auc_gw.sock
#eap_sim_db=unix:/tmp/hlr_auc_gw.sock db=/tmp/hostapd.db

# EAP-SIM DB request timeout
# This parameter sets the maximum time to wait for a database request response.
# The parameter value is in seconds.
#eap_sim_db_timeout=1

# Encryption key for EAP-FAST PAC-Opaque values. This key must be a secret,
# random value. It is configured as a 16-octet value in hex format. It can be
# generated, e.g., with the following command:
# od -tx1 -v -N16 /dev/random | colrm 1 8 | tr -d ' '
#pac_opaque_encr_key=000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f

# EAP-FAST authority identity (A-ID)
# A-ID indicates the identity of the authority that issues PACs. The A-ID
# should be unique across all issuing servers. In theory, this is a variable
# length field, but due to some existing implementations requiring A-ID to be
# 16 octets in length, it is strongly recommended to use that length for the
# field to provide interoperability with deployed peer implementations. This
# field is configured in hex format.
#eap_fast_a_id=101112131415161718191a1b1c1d1e1f

# EAP-FAST authority identifier information (A-ID-Info)
# This is a user-friendly name for the A-ID. For example, the enterprise name
# and server name in a human-readable format. This field is encoded as UTF-8.
#eap_fast_a_id_info=test server

# Enable/disable different EAP-FAST provisioning modes:
#0 = provisioning disabled
#1 = only anonymous provisioning allowed
#2 = only authenticated provisioning allowed
#3 = both provisioning modes allowed (default)
#eap_fast_prov=3

# EAP-FAST PAC-Key lifetime in seconds (hard limit)
#pac_key_lifetime=604800

# EAP-FAST PAC-Key refresh time in seconds (soft limit on remaining hard
# limit). The server will generate a new PAC-Key when this number of seconds
# (or fewer) of the lifetime remains.
#pac_key_refresh_time=86400

# EAP-TEAP authentication type
# 0 = inner EAP (default)
# 1 = Basic-Password-Auth
# 2 = Do not require Phase 2 authentication if client can be authenticated
#     during Phase 1
#eap_teap_auth=0

# EAP-TEAP authentication behavior when using PAC
# 0 = perform inner authentication (default)
# 1 = skip inner authentication (inner EAP/Basic-Password-Auth)
#eap_teap_pac_no_inner=0

# EAP-TEAP behavior with Result TLV
# 0 = include with Intermediate-Result TLV (default)
# 1 = send in a separate message (for testing purposes)
#eap_teap_separate_result=0

# EAP-TEAP identities
# 0 = allow any identity type (default)
# 1 = require user identity
# 2 = require machine identity
# 3 = request user identity; accept either user or machine identity
# 4 = request machine identity; accept either user or machine identity
# 5 = require both user and machine identity
#eap_teap_id=0

# EAP-TEAP tunneled EAP method behavior
# 0 = minimize roundtrips by merging start of the next EAP method with the
#     crypto-binding of the previous one.
# 1 = complete crypto-binding before starting the next EAP method
#eap_teap_method_sequence=0

# EAP-SIM and EAP-AKA protected success/failure indication using AT_RESULT_IND
# (default: 0 = disabled).
#eap_sim_aka_result_ind=1

# EAP-SIM and EAP-AKA identity options
# 0 = do not use pseudonyms or fast reauthentication
# 1 = use pseudonyms, but not fast reauthentication
# 2 = do not use pseudonyms, but use fast reauthentication
# 3 = use pseudonyms and use fast reauthentication (default)
# 4 = do not use pseudonyms or fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
# 5 = use pseudonyms, but not fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
# 6 = do not use pseudonyms, but use fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
# 7 = use pseudonyms and use fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
#eap_sim_id=3

# IMSI privacy key (PEM encoded RSA 2048-bit private key) for decrypting
# permanent identity when using EAP-SIM/AKA/AKA'.
#imsi_privacy_key=imsi-privacy-key.pem

# EAP-SIM and EAP-AKA fast re-authentication limit
# Maximum number of fast re-authentications allowed after each full
# authentication.
#eap_sim_aka_fast_reauth_limit=1000

# Trusted Network Connect (TNC)
# If enabled, TNC validation will be required before the peer is allowed to
# connect. Note: This is only used with EAP-TTLS and EAP-FAST. If any other
# EAP method is enabled, the peer will be allowed to connect without TNC.
#tnc=1

# EAP Re-authentication Protocol (ERP) - RFC 6696
#
# Whether to enable ERP on the EAP server.
#eap_server_erp=1


##### RADIUS client configuration #############################################
# for IEEE 802.1X with external Authentication Server, IEEE 802.11
# authentication with external ACL for MAC addresses, and accounting

# The own IP address of the access point (used as NAS-IP-Address)
#own_ip_addr=127.0.0.1

# NAS-Identifier string for RADIUS messages. When used, this should be unique
# to the NAS within the scope of the RADIUS server. Please note that hostapd
# uses a separate RADIUS client for each BSS and as such, a unique
# nas_identifier value should be configured separately for each BSS. This is
# particularly important for cases where RADIUS accounting is used
# (Accounting-On/Off messages are interpreted as clearing all ongoing sessions
# and that may get interpreted as applying to all BSSes if the same
# NAS-Identifier value is used.) For example, a fully qualified domain name
# prefixed with a unique identifier of the BSS (e.g., BSSID) can be used here.
#
# When using IEEE 802.11r, nas_identifier must be set and must be between 1 and
# 48 octets long.
#
# It is mandatory to configure either own_ip_addr or nas_identifier to be
# compliant with the RADIUS protocol. When using RADIUS accounting, it is
# strongly recommended that nas_identifier is set to a unique value for each
# BSS.
#nas_identifier=ap.example.com

# RADIUS client forced local IP address for the access point
# Normally the local IP address is determined automatically based on configured
# IP addresses, but this field can be used to force a specific address to be
# used, e.g., when the device has multiple IP addresses.
#radius_client_addr=127.0.0.1

# RADIUS client forced local interface. Helps run properly with VRF
# Default is none set which allows the network stack to pick the appropriate
# interface automatically.
# Example below binds to eth0
#radius_client_dev=eth0

# RADIUS authentication server
#auth_server_addr=127.0.0.1
#auth_server_port=1812
#auth_server_shared_secret=secret

# RADIUS accounting server
#acct_server_addr=127.0.0.1
#acct_server_port=1813
#acct_server_shared_secret=secret

# Secondary RADIUS servers; to be used if primary one does not reply to
# RADIUS packets. These are optional and there can be more than one secondary
# server listed.
#auth_server_addr=127.0.0.2
#auth_server_port=1812
#auth_server_shared_secret=secret2
#
#acct_server_addr=127.0.0.2
#acct_server_port=1813
#acct_server_shared_secret=secret2

# RADIUS/TLS instead of RADIUS/UDP
#auth_server_addr=127.0.0.1
#auth_server_port=2083
#auth_server_type=TLS
#auth_server_shared_secret=radsec
#auth_server_ca_cert=<path to trusted CA certificate(s)>
#auth_server_client_cert=<path to client certificate>
#auth_server_private_key=<path to private key>
#auth_server_private_key_passwd=<password for decrypting private key>

# Retry interval for trying to return to the primary RADIUS server (in
# seconds). RADIUS client code will automatically try to use the next server
# when the current server is not replying to requests. If this interval is set,
# primary server will be retried after configured amount of time even if the
# currently used secondary server is still working.
#radius_retry_primary_interval=600

# Message-Authenticator attribute requirement for non-EAP cases
# hostapd requires Message-Authenticator attribute to be included in all cases
# where RADIUS is used for EAP authentication. This is also required for cases
# where RADIUS is used for MAC ACL (macaddr_acl=2) by default, but that case
# can be configured to not require this for compatibility with RADIUS servers
# that do not include the attribute. This is not recommended due to potential
# security concerns, but can be used as a temporary workaround in networks where
# the connection to the RADIUS server is secure.
# 0 = Do not require Message-Authenticator in MAC ACL response
# 1 = Require Message-Authenticator in all authentication cases (default)
#radius_require_message_authenticator=1

# Interim accounting update interval
# If this is set (larger than 0) and acct_server is configured, hostapd will
# send interim accounting updates every N seconds. Note: if set, this overrides
# possible Acct-Interim-Interval attribute in Access-Accept message. Thus, this
# value should not be configured in hostapd.conf, if RADIUS server is used to
# control the interim interval.
# This value should not be less 600 (10 minutes) and must not be less than
# 60 (1 minute).
#radius_acct_interim_interval=600

# Request Chargeable-User-Identity (RFC 4372)
# This parameter can be used to configure hostapd to request CUI from the
# RADIUS server by including Chargeable-User-Identity attribute into
# Access-Request packets.
#radius_request_cui=1

# Dynamic VLAN mode; allow RADIUS authentication server to decide which VLAN
# is used for the stations. This information is parsed from following RADIUS
# attributes based on RFC 3580 and RFC 2868: Tunnel-Type (value 13 = VLAN),
# Tunnel-Medium-Type (value 6 = IEEE 802), Tunnel-Private-Group-ID (value
# VLANID as a string). Optionally, the local MAC ACL list (accept_mac_file) can
# be used to set static client MAC address to VLAN ID mapping.
# Dynamic VLAN mode is also used with VLAN ID assignment based on WPA/WPA2
# passphrase from wpa_psk_file or vlan_id parameter from sae_password.
# 0 = disabled (default); only VLAN IDs from accept_mac_file will be used
# 1 = optional; use default interface if RADIUS server does not include VLAN ID
# 2 = required; reject authentication if RADIUS server does not include VLAN ID
#dynamic_vlan=0

# Per-Station AP_VLAN interface mode
# If enabled, each station is assigned its own AP_VLAN interface.
# This implies per-station group keying and ebtables filtering of inter-STA
# traffic (when passed through the AP).
# If the sta is not assigned to any VLAN, then its AP_VLAN interface will be
# added to the bridge given by the "bridge" configuration option (see above).
# Otherwise, it will be added to the per-VLAN bridge.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#per_sta_vif=0

# VLAN interface list for dynamic VLAN mode is read from a separate text file.
# This list is used to map VLAN ID from the RADIUS server to a network
# interface. Each station is bound to one interface in the same way as with
# multiple BSSIDs or SSIDs. Each line in this text file is defining a new
# interface and the line must include VLAN ID and interface name separated by
# white space (space or tab).
# If no entries are provided by this file, the station is statically mapped
# to <bss-iface>.<vlan-id> interfaces.
# Each line can optionally also contain the name of a bridge to add the VLAN to
#vlan_file=/etc/hostapd.vlan

# Interface where 802.1q tagged packets should appear when a RADIUS server is
# used to determine which VLAN a station is on.  hostapd creates a bridge for
# each VLAN.  Then hostapd adds a VLAN interface (associated with the interface
# indicated by 'vlan_tagged_interface') and the appropriate wireless interface
# to the bridge.
#vlan_tagged_interface=eth0

# Bridge (prefix) to add the wifi and the tagged interface to. This gets the
# VLAN ID appended. It defaults to brvlan%d if no tagged interface is given
# and br%s.%d if a tagged interface is given, provided %s = tagged interface
# and %d = VLAN ID.
#vlan_bridge=brvlan

# When hostapd creates a VLAN interface on vlan_tagged_interfaces, it needs
# to know how to name it.
# 0 = vlan<XXX>, e.g., vlan1
# 1 = <vlan_tagged_interface>.<XXX>, e.g. eth0.1
#vlan_naming=0

# Arbitrary RADIUS attributes can be added into Access-Request and
# Accounting-Request packets by specifying the contents of the attributes with
# the following configuration parameters. There can be multiple of these to
# add multiple attributes. These parameters can also be used to override some
# of the attributes added automatically by hostapd.
# Format: <attr_id>[:<syntax:value>]
# attr_id: RADIUS attribute type (e.g., 26 = Vendor-Specific)
# syntax: s = string (UTF-8), d = integer, x = octet string
# value: attribute value in format indicated by the syntax
# If syntax and value parts are omitted, a null value (single 0x00 octet) is
# used.
#
# Additional Access-Request attributes
# radius_auth_req_attr=<attr_id>[:<syntax:value>]
# Examples:
# Operator-Name = "Operator"
#radius_auth_req_attr=126:s:Operator
# Service-Type = Framed (2)
#radius_auth_req_attr=6:d:2
# Connect-Info = "testing" (this overrides the automatically generated value)
#radius_auth_req_attr=77:s:testing
# Same Connect-Info value set as a hexdump
#radius_auth_req_attr=77:x:74657374696e67

#
# Additional Accounting-Request attributes
# radius_acct_req_attr=<attr_id>[:<syntax:value>]
# Examples:
# Operator-Name = "Operator"
#radius_acct_req_attr=126:s:Operator

# If SQLite support is included, path to a database from which additional
# RADIUS request attributes are extracted based on the station MAC address.
#
# The schema for the radius_attributes table is:
# id | sta | reqtype | attr   :   multi-key (sta, reqtype)
# id   = autonumber
# sta  = station MAC address in `11:22:33:44:55:66` format.
# type = `auth` | `acct` | NULL (match any)
# attr = existing config file format, e.g. `126:s:Test Operator`
#radius_req_attr_sqlite=radius_attr.sqlite

# Dynamic Authorization Extensions (RFC 5176)
# This mechanism can be used to allow dynamic changes to user session based on
# commands from a RADIUS server (or some other disconnect client that has the
# needed session information). For example, Disconnect message can be used to
# request an associated station to be disconnected.
#
# This is disabled by default. Set radius_das_port to non-zero UDP port
# number to enable.
#radius_das_port=3799
#
# DAS client (the host that can send Disconnect/CoA requests) and shared secret
# Format: <IP address> <shared secret>
# IP address 0.0.0.0 can be used to allow requests from any address.
#radius_das_client=192.168.1.123 shared secret here
#
# DAS Event-Timestamp time window in seconds
#radius_das_time_window=300
#
# DAS require Event-Timestamp
#radius_das_require_event_timestamp=1
#
# DAS require Message-Authenticator
#radius_das_require_message_authenticator=1

##### RADIUS authentication server configuration ##############################

# hostapd can be used as a RADIUS authentication server for other hosts. This
# requires that the integrated EAP server is also enabled and both
# authentication services are sharing the same configuration.

# File name of the RADIUS clients configuration for the RADIUS server. If this
# commented out, RADIUS server is disabled.
#radius_server_clients=/etc/hostapd.radius_clients

# The UDP port number for the RADIUS authentication server
#radius_server_auth_port=1812

# The UDP port number for the RADIUS accounting server
# Commenting this out or setting this to 0 can be used to disable RADIUS
# accounting while still enabling RADIUS authentication.
#radius_server_acct_port=1813

# Use IPv6 with RADIUS server (IPv4 will also be supported using IPv6 API)
#radius_server_ipv6=1


##### WPA/IEEE 802.11i configuration ##########################################

# Enable WPA. Setting this variable configures the AP to require WPA (either
# WPA-PSK or WPA-RADIUS/EAP based on other configuration). For WPA-PSK, either
# wpa_psk or wpa_passphrase must be set and wpa_key_mgmt must include WPA-PSK.
# Instead of wpa_psk / wpa_passphrase, wpa_psk_radius might suffice.
# For WPA-RADIUS/EAP, ieee8021x must be set (but without dynamic WEP keys),
# RADIUS authentication server must be configured, and WPA-EAP must be included
# in wpa_key_mgmt.
# This field is a bit field that can be used to enable WPA (IEEE 802.11i/D3.0)
# and/or WPA2 (full IEEE 802.11i/RSN):
# bit0 = WPA
# bit1 = IEEE 802.11i/RSN (WPA2) (dot11RSNAEnabled)
# Note that WPA3 is also configured with bit1 since it uses RSN just like WPA2.
# In other words, for WPA3, wpa=2 is used the configuration (and
# wpa_key_mgmt=SAE for WPA3-Personal instead of wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-PSK).
wpa=2

# Extended Key ID support for Individually Addressed frames
#
# Extended Key ID allows to rekey PTK keys without the impacts the "normal"
# PTK rekeying with only a single Key ID 0 has. It can only be used when the
# driver supports it and RSN/WPA2 is used with a CCMP/GCMP pairwise cipher.
#
# 0 = force off, i.e., use only Key ID 0 (default)
# 1 = enable and use Extended Key ID support when possible
# 2 = identical to 1 but start with Key ID 1 when possible
extended_key_id=1

# WPA pre-shared keys for WPA-PSK. This can be either entered as a 256-bit
# secret in hex format (64 hex digits), wpa_psk, or as an ASCII passphrase
# (8..63 characters) that will be converted to PSK. This conversion uses SSID
# so the PSK changes when ASCII passphrase is used and the SSID is changed.
# wpa_psk (dot11RSNAConfigPSKValue)
# wpa_passphrase (dot11RSNAConfigPSKPassPhrase)
#wpa_psk=0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef
wpa_passphrase=myPW1234

# Optionally, WPA PSKs can be read from a separate text file (containing list
# of (PSK,MAC address) pairs. This allows more than one PSK to be configured.
# Use absolute path name to make sure that the files can be read on SIGHUP
# configuration reloads.
#wpa_psk_file=/etc/hostapd.wpa_psk

# Optionally, WPA passphrase can be received from RADIUS authentication server
# This requires macaddr_acl to be set to 2 (RADIUS) for wpa_psk_radius values
# 1 and 2.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = optional; use default passphrase/psk if RADIUS server does not include
#	Tunnel-Password
# 2 = required; reject authentication if RADIUS server does not include
#	Tunnel-Password
# 3 = ask RADIUS server during 4-way handshake if there is no locally
#	configured PSK/passphrase for the STA
#
# The Tunnel-Password attribute in Access-Accept can contain either the
# 8..63 character ASCII passphrase or a 64 hex character encoding of the PSK.
#
#wpa_psk_radius=0

# Set of accepted key management algorithms (WPA-PSK, WPA-EAP, or both). The
# entries are separated with a space. WPA-PSK-SHA256 and WPA-EAP-SHA256 can be
# added to enable SHA256-based stronger algorithms.
# WPA-PSK = WPA-Personal / WPA2-Personal
# WPA-PSK-SHA256 = WPA2-Personal using SHA256
# WPA-EAP = WPA-Enterprise / WPA2-Enterprise
# WPA-EAP-SHA256 = WPA2-Enterprise using SHA256
# SAE = SAE (WPA3-Personal)
# WPA-EAP-SUITE-B-192 = WPA3-Enterprise with 192-bit security/CNSA suite
# FT-PSK = FT with passphrase/PSK
# FT-EAP = FT with EAP
# FT-EAP-SHA384 = FT with EAP using SHA384
# FT-SAE = FT with SAE
# FILS-SHA256 = Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA256
# FILS-SHA384 = Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA384
# FT-FILS-SHA256 = FT and Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA256
# FT-FILS-SHA384 = FT and Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA384
# OWE = Opportunistic Wireless Encryption (a.k.a. Enhanced Open)
# DPP = Device Provisioning Protocol
# OSEN = Hotspot 2.0 online signup with encryption
# (dot11RSNAConfigAuthenticationSuitesTable)
wpa_key_mgmt=SAE WPA-PSK WPA-PSK-SHA256

# Set of accepted cipher suites (encryption algorithms) for pairwise keys
# (unicast packets). This is a space separated list of algorithms:
# CCMP = AES in Counter mode with CBC-MAC (CCMP-128)
# TKIP = Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
# CCMP-256 = AES in Counter mode with CBC-MAC with 256-bit key
# GCMP = Galois/counter mode protocol (GCMP-128)
# GCMP-256 = Galois/counter mode protocol with 256-bit key
# Group cipher suite (encryption algorithm for broadcast and multicast frames)
# is automatically selected based on this configuration. If only CCMP is
# allowed as the pairwise cipher, group cipher will also be CCMP. Otherwise,
# TKIP will be used as the group cipher. The optional group_cipher parameter can
# be used to override this automatic selection.
#
# (dot11RSNAConfigPairwiseCiphersTable)
rsn_pairwise=CCMP CCMP-256 GCMP GCMP-256

# Optional override for automatic group cipher selection
# This can be used to select a specific group cipher regardless of which
# pairwise ciphers were enabled for WPA and RSN. It should be noted that
# overriding the group cipher with an unexpected value can result in
# interoperability issues and in general, this parameter is mainly used for
# testing purposes.
#group_cipher=CCMP

# Time interval for rekeying GTK (broadcast/multicast encryption keys) in
# seconds. (dot11RSNAConfigGroupRekeyTime)
# This defaults to 86400 seconds (once per day) when using CCMP/GCMP as the
# group cipher and 600 seconds (once per 10 minutes) when using TKIP as the
# group cipher.
wpa_group_rekey=86400

# Rekey GTK when any STA that possesses the current GTK is leaving the BSS.
# (dot11RSNAConfigGroupRekeyStrict)
#wpa_strict_rekey=1

# The number of times EAPOL-Key Message 1/2 in the RSN Group Key Handshake is
# retried per GTK Handshake attempt. (dot11RSNAConfigGroupUpdateCount)
# This value should only be increased when stations are constantly
# deauthenticated during GTK rekeying with the log message
# "group key handshake failed...".
# You should consider to also increase wpa_pairwise_update_count then.
# Range 1..4294967295; default: 4
wpa_group_update_count=4

# Time interval for rekeying GMK (master key used internally to generate GTKs
# (in seconds).
wpa_gmk_rekey=86400

# Maximum lifetime for PTK in seconds. This can be used to enforce rekeying of
# PTK to mitigate some attacks against TKIP deficiencies.
# Warning: PTK rekeying is buggy with many drivers/devices and with such
# devices, the only secure method to rekey the PTK without Extended Key ID
# support requires a disconnection. Check the related parameter
# wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey for details.
#wpa_ptk_rekey=600

# Workaround for PTK rekey issues
#
# PTK0 rekeys (rekeying the PTK without "Extended Key ID for Individually
# Addressed Frames") can degrade the security and stability with some cards.
# To avoid such issues hostapd can replace those PTK rekeys (including EAP
# reauthentications) with disconnects.
#
# Available options:
# 0 = always rekey when configured/instructed (default)
# 1 = only rekey when the local driver is explicitly indicating it can perform
#	this operation without issues
# 2 = never allow PTK0 rekeys
#wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey=0

# The number of times EAPOL-Key Message 1/4 and Message 3/4 in the RSN 4-Way
# Handshake are retried per 4-Way Handshake attempt.
# (dot11RSNAConfigPairwiseUpdateCount)
# Range 1..4294967295; default: 4
#wpa_pairwise_update_count=4

# Workaround for key reinstallation attacks
#
# This parameter can be used to disable retransmission of EAPOL-Key frames that
# are used to install keys (EAPOL-Key message 3/4 and group message 1/2). This
# is similar to setting wpa_group_update_count=1 and
# wpa_pairwise_update_count=1, but with no impact to message 1/4 and with
# extended timeout on the response to avoid causing issues with stations that
# may use aggressive power saving have very long time in replying to the
# EAPOL-Key messages.
#
# This option can be used to work around key reinstallation attacks on the
# station (supplicant) side in cases those station devices cannot be updated
# for some reason. By removing the retransmissions the attacker cannot cause
# key reinstallation with a delayed frame transmission. This is related to the
# station side vulnerabilities CVE-2017-13077, CVE-2017-13078, CVE-2017-13079,
# CVE-2017-13080, and CVE-2017-13081.
#
# This workaround might cause interoperability issues and reduced robustness of
# key negotiation especially in environments with heavy traffic load due to the
# number of attempts to perform the key exchange is reduced significantly. As
# such, this workaround is disabled by default (unless overridden in build
# configuration). To enable this, set the parameter to 1.
#wpa_disable_eapol_key_retries=1

# Enable IEEE 802.11i/RSN/WPA2 pre-authentication. This is used to speed up
# roaming be pre-authenticating IEEE 802.1X/EAP part of the full RSN
# authentication and key handshake before actually associating with a new AP.
# (dot11RSNAPreauthenticationEnabled)
#rsn_preauth=1
#
# Space separated list of interfaces from which pre-authentication frames are
# accepted (e.g., 'eth0' or 'eth0 wlan0wds0'. This list should include all
# interface that are used for connections to other APs. This could include
# wired interfaces and WDS links. The normal wireless data interface towards
# associated stations (e.g., wlan0) should not be added, since
# pre-authentication is only used with APs other than the currently associated
# one.
#rsn_preauth_interfaces=eth0

# ieee80211w: Whether management frame protection (MFP) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = optional
# 2 = required
ieee80211w=2
# The most common configuration options for this based on the PMF (protected
# management frames) certification program are:
# PMF enabled: ieee80211w=1 and wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-EAP WPA-EAP-SHA256
# PMF required: ieee80211w=2 and wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-EAP-SHA256
# (and similarly for WPA-PSK and WPA-PSK-SHA256 if WPA2-Personal is used)
# WPA3-Personal-only mode: ieee80211w=2 and wpa_key_mgmt=SAE

# Group management cipher suite
# Default: AES-128-CMAC (BIP)
# Other options (depending on driver support):
# BIP-GMAC-128
# BIP-GMAC-256
# BIP-CMAC-256
# Note: All the stations connecting to the BSS will also need to support the
# selected cipher. The default AES-128-CMAC is the only option that is commonly
# available in deployed devices.
group_mgmt_cipher=AES-128-CMAC

# Beacon Protection (management frame protection for Beacon frames)
# This depends on management frame protection being enabled (ieee80211w != 0)
# and beacon protection support indication from the driver.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
beacon_prot=1

# SPP (Signaling and Payload Protected) A-MSDU.
# This depends on driver support and CCMP/GCMP cipher suite being used.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled if driver indicates support for this
#spp_amsdu=1

# Association SA Query maximum timeout (in TU = 1.024 ms; for MFP)
# (maximum time to wait for a SA Query response)
# dot11AssociationSAQueryMaximumTimeout, 1...4294967295
#assoc_sa_query_max_timeout=1000

# Association SA Query retry timeout (in TU = 1.024 ms; for MFP)
# (time between two subsequent SA Query requests)
# dot11AssociationSAQueryRetryTimeout, 1...4294967295
#assoc_sa_query_retry_timeout=201

# ocv: Operating Channel Validation
# This is a countermeasure against multi-channel on-path attacks.
# Enabling this depends on the driver's support for OCV when the driver SME is
# used. If hostapd SME is used, this will be enabled just based on this
# configuration.
# Enabling this automatically also enables ieee80211w, if not yet enabled.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
# 2 = enabled in workaround mode - Allow STA that claims OCV capability to
#     connect even if the STA doesn't send OCI or negotiate PMF. This
#     workaround is to improve interoperability with legacy STAs which are
#     wrongly copying reserved bits of RSN capabilities from the AP's
#     RSNE into (Re)Association Request frames. When this configuration is
#     enabled, the AP considers STA is OCV capable only when the STA indicates
#     MFP capability in (Re)Association Request frames and sends OCI in
#     EAPOL-Key msg 2/4/FT Reassociation Request frame/FILS (Re)Association
#     Request frame; otherwise, the AP disables OCV for the current connection
#     with the STA. Enabling this workaround mode reduced OCV protection to
#     some extend since it allows misbehavior to go through. As such, this
#     should be enabled only if interoperability with misbehaving STAs is
#     needed.
#ocv=1

# disable_pmksa_caching: Disable PMKSA caching
# This parameter can be used to disable caching of PMKSA created through EAP
# authentication. RSN preauthentication may still end up using PMKSA caching if
# it is enabled (rsn_preauth=1).
# 0 = PMKSA caching enabled (default)
# 1 = PMKSA caching disabled
#disable_pmksa_caching=0

# okc: Opportunistic Key Caching (aka Proactive Key Caching)
# Allow PMK cache to be shared opportunistically among configured interfaces
# and BSSes (i.e., all configurations within a single hostapd process).
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
okc=1

# SAE password
# This parameter can be used to set passwords for SAE. By default, the
# wpa_passphrase value is used if this separate parameter is not used, but
# wpa_passphrase follows the WPA-PSK constraints (8..63 characters) even though
# SAE passwords do not have such constraints. If the BSS enabled both SAE and
# WPA-PSK and both values are set, SAE uses the sae_password values and WPA-PSK
# uses the wpa_passphrase value.
#
# Each sae_password entry is added to a list of available passwords. This
# corresponds to the dot11RSNAConfigPasswordValueEntry. sae_password value
# starts with the password (dot11RSNAConfigPasswordCredential). That value can
# be followed by optional peer MAC address (dot11RSNAConfigPasswordPeerMac) and
# by optional password identifier (dot11RSNAConfigPasswordIdentifier). In
# addition, an optional VLAN ID specification can be used to bind the station
# to the specified VLAN whenever the specific SAE password entry is used.
#
# If the peer MAC address is not included or is set to the wildcard address
# (ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff), the entry is available for any station to use. If a
# specific peer MAC address is included, only a station with that MAC address
# is allowed to use the entry.
#
# If the password identifier (with non-zero length) is included, the entry is
# limited to be used only with that specified identifier.

# The last matching (based on peer MAC address and identifier) entry is used to
# select which password to use. Setting sae_password to an empty string has a
# special meaning of removing all previously added entries.
#
# sae_password uses the following encoding:
#<password/credential>[|mac=<peer mac>][|vlanid=<VLAN ID>]
#[|pk=<m:ECPrivateKey-base64>][|id=<identifier>]
# Examples:
#sae_password=secret
#sae_password=really secret|mac=ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
#sae_password=example secret|mac=02:03:04:05:06:07|id=pw identifier
#sae_password=example secret|vlanid=3|id=pw identifier
#
# SAE passwords can also be read from a separate file in which each line
# contains and entry in the same format as sae_password uses.
#sae_password_file=/tc/hostapd.sae_passwords

# SAE threshold for anti-clogging mechanism (dot11RSNASAEAntiCloggingThreshold)
# This parameter defines how many open SAE instances can be in progress at the
# same time before the anti-clogging mechanism is taken into use.
#sae_anti_clogging_threshold=5 (deprecated)
#anti_clogging_threshold=5

# Maximum number of SAE synchronization errors (dot11RSNASAESync)
# The offending SAE peer will be disconnected if more than this many
# synchronization errors happen.
#sae_sync=3

# Enabled SAE finite cyclic groups
# SAE implementation are required to support group 19 (ECC group defined over a
# 256-bit prime order field). This configuration parameter can be used to
# specify a set of allowed groups. If not included, only the mandatory group 19
# is enabled.
# The group values are listed in the IANA registry:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/ipsec-registry/ipsec-registry.xml#ipsec-registry-9
# Note that groups 1, 2, 5, 22, 23, and 24 should not be used in production
# purposes due limited security (see RFC 8247). Groups that are not as strong as
# group 19 (ECC, NIST P-256) are unlikely to be useful for production use cases
# since all implementations are required to support group 19.
#sae_groups=19 20 21

# Require MFP for all associations using SAE
# This parameter can be used to enforce negotiation of MFP for all associations
# that negotiate use of SAE. This is used in cases where SAE-capable devices are
# known to be MFP-capable and the BSS is configured with optional MFP
# (ieee80211w=1) for legacy support. The non-SAE stations can connect without
# MFP while SAE stations are required to negotiate MFP if sae_require_mfp=1.
#sae_require_mfp=0

# SAE Confirm behavior
# By default, AP will send out only SAE Commit message in response to a received
# SAE Commit message. This parameter can be set to 1 to override that behavior
# to send both SAE Commit and SAE Confirm messages without waiting for the STA
# to send its SAE Confirm message first.
#sae_confirm_immediate=0

# SAE mechanism for PWE derivation
# 0 = hunting-and-pecking loop only (default without password identifier)
# 1 = hash-to-element only (default with password identifier)
# 2 = both hunting-and-pecking loop and hash-to-element enabled
# Note: The default value is likely to change from 0 to 2 once the new
# hash-to-element mechanism has received more interoperability testing.
# When using SAE password identifier, the hash-to-element mechanism is used
# regardless of the sae_pwe parameter value.
#sae_pwe=0

# FILS Cache Identifier (16-bit value in hexdump format)
#fils_cache_id=0011

# FILS Realm Information
# One or more FILS realms need to be configured when FILS is enabled. This list
# of realms is used to define which realms (used in keyName-NAI by the client)
# can be used with FILS shared key authentication for ERP.
#fils_realm=example.com
#fils_realm=example.org

# FILS DH Group for PFS
# 0 = PFS disabled with FILS shared key authentication (default)
# 1-65535 DH Group to use for FILS PFS
#fils_dh_group=0

# OWE DH groups
# OWE implementations are required to support group 19 (NIST P-256). All groups
# that are supported by the implementation (e.g., groups 19, 20, and 21 when
# using OpenSSL) are enabled by default. This configuration parameter can be
# used to specify a limited set of allowed groups. The group values are listed
# in the IANA registry:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/ipsec-registry/ipsec-registry.xml#ipsec-registry-10
#owe_groups=19 20 21

# OWE PTK derivation workaround
# Initial OWE implementation used SHA256 when deriving the PTK for all OWE
# groups. This was supposed to change to SHA384 for group 20 and SHA512 for
# group 21. This parameter can be used to enable workaround for interoperability
# with stations that use SHA256 with groups 20 and 21. By default (0) only the
# appropriate hash function is accepted. When workaround is enabled (1), the
# appropriate hash function is tried first and if that fails, SHA256-based PTK
# derivation is attempted. This workaround can result in reduced security for
# groups 20 and 21, but is required for interoperability with older
# implementations. There is no impact to group 19 behavior. The workaround is
# disabled by default and can be enabled by uncommenting the following line.
#owe_ptk_workaround=1

# OWE transition mode configuration
# Pointer to the matching open/OWE BSS
#owe_transition_bssid=<bssid>
# SSID in same format as ssid2 described above.
#owe_transition_ssid=<SSID>
# Alternatively, OWE transition mode BSSID/SSID can be configured with a
# reference to a BSS operated by this hostapd process.
#owe_transition_ifname=<ifname>

# DHCP server for FILS HLP
# If configured, hostapd will act as a DHCP relay for all FILS HLP requests
# that include a DHCPDISCOVER message and send them to the specific DHCP
# server for processing. hostapd will then wait for a response from that server
# before replying with (Re)Association Response frame that encapsulates this
# DHCP response. own_ip_addr is used as the local address for the communication
# with the DHCP server.
#dhcp_server=127.0.0.1

# DHCP server UDP port
# Default: 67
#dhcp_server_port=67

# DHCP relay UDP port on the local device
# Default: 67; 0 means not to bind any specific port
#dhcp_relay_port=67

# DHCP rapid commit proxy
# If set to 1, this enables hostapd to act as a DHCP rapid commit proxy to
# allow the rapid commit options (two message DHCP exchange) to be used with a
# server that supports only the four message DHCP exchange. This is disabled by
# default (= 0) and can be enabled by setting this to 1.
#dhcp_rapid_commit_proxy=0

# Wait time for FILS HLP (dot11HLPWaitTime) in TUs
# default: 30 TUs (= 30.72 milliseconds)
#fils_hlp_wait_time=30

# FILS Discovery frame transmission minimum and maximum interval settings.
# If fils_discovery_max_interval is non-zero, the AP enables FILS Discovery
# frame transmission. These values use TUs as the unit and have allowed range
# of 0-10000. fils_discovery_min_interval defaults to 20.
# This feature is currently supported only when ieee80211ax is enabled for
# the radio and disable_11ax is not set for the BSS.
#fils_discovery_min_interval=20
#fils_discovery_max_interval=0

# Transition Disable indication
# The AP can notify authenticated stations to disable transition mode in their
# network profiles when the network has completed transition steps, i.e., once
# sufficiently large number of APs in the ESS have been updated to support the
# more secure alternative. When this indication is used, the stations are
# expected to automatically disable transition mode and less secure security
# options. This includes use of WEP, TKIP (including use of TKIP as the group
# cipher), and connections without PMF.
# Bitmap bits:
# bit 0 (0x01): WPA3-Personal (i.e., disable WPA2-Personal = WPA-PSK and only
#	allow SAE to be used)
# bit 1 (0x02): SAE-PK (disable SAE without use of SAE-PK)
# bit 2 (0x04): WPA3-Enterprise (move to requiring PMF)
# bit 3 (0x08): Enhanced Open (disable use of open network; require OWE)
# (default: 0 = do not include Transition Disable KDE)
#transition_disable=0x01

# PASN ECDH groups
# PASN implementations are required to support group 19 (NIST P-256). If this
# parameter is not set, only group 19 is supported by default. This
# configuration parameter can be used to specify a limited set of allowed
# groups. The group values are listed in the IANA registry:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/ipsec-registry/ipsec-registry.xml#ipsec-registry-10
#pasn_groups=19 20 21

# PASN comeback after time in TUs
# In case the AP is temporarily unable to handle a PASN authentication exchange
# due to a too large number of parallel operations, this value indicates to the
# peer after how many TUs it can try the PASN exchange again.
# (default: 10 TUs)
#pasn_comeback_after=10

# Unauthenticated PASN activated (dot11NoAuthPASNActivated)
# This indicates whether PASN without mutual authentication is allowed.
# (default: 1 = activated)
#pasn_noauth=1

# SSID protection in 4-way handshake
# The IEEE 802.11i-2004 RSN design did not provide means for protecting the
# SSID in the general case. IEEE P802.11REVme/D6.0 added support for this in
# 4-way handshake. This capability allows a STA to confirm that the AP has the
# same understanding on which SSID is being used for an association in a
# protected manner in cases where both the AP and the STA has this capability.
# This can be used to mitigate CVE-2023-52424 (a.k.a. the SSID Confusion
# Attack).
#
# Ideally, this capability would be enabled by default on the AP, but since this
# is new functionality with limited testing, the default is to disable this for
# now and require explicitly configuration to enable. The default behavior is
# like to change once this capability has received more testing.
#
# 0 = SSID protection in 4-way handshake disabled (default)
# 1 = SSID protection in 4-way handshake enabled
#
#ssid_protection=0

# Known STA Identification
# IEEE Std 802.11-2024 adds a mechanism that allows the SA Query procedure on
# (re)association to the previously used AP to be skipped when that AP still
# has a valid security association. This can speed up cases where a STA needs to
# reassociate back to the same AP to update some association parameters.
#
# 0 = Do not process Known STA Identification (default)
# 1 = Allow Known STA Identification to be used to skip SA Query procedure
#known_sta_identification=0

# RSNE/RSNXE override
#
# These parameters can be used to configure RSN parameters for STAs that support
# the override elements. The RSN parameters for STAs that do not support these
# mechanisms are configured in the referenced configuration parameters. The AP
# allows STAs to use either of the configured sets for negotiating RSN
# parameters.
#
# The main purpose of this mechanism is to make the AP look like it is using an
# older security mechanism (e.g., WPA2-Personal) to older STAs while allowing
# new stations use newer security mechanisms (e.g., WPA3-Personal) based on the
# override values. This might be needed to work around issues with deployed
# STAs that do not implement RSNE extensibility correctly and may fail to
# connect when the AP is using a transition mode like WPA3-Personal transition
# mode.
#
# Key management; see wpa_key_mgmt for RSNE configuration
#rsn_override_key_mgmt=<accepted key management algorithms>
#
# Pairwise cipher suites; see rsn_pairwise for RSNE configuration
#rsn_override_pairwise=<accepted cipher suites)
#
# Management frame protection (MFP/PMF); see ieee80211w for RSNE configuration
# 0 = disabled
# 1 = optional
# 2 = required
#rsn_override_mfp=<0/1/2>
#
# Second set of similar parameters. These are required to be used for
# Wi-Fi 7 (EHT/MLO) associations with RSN overriding and can optionally be used
# in cases that do not use Wi-Fi 7.
#rsn_override_key_mgmt_2
#rsn_override_pairwise_2
#rsn_override_mfp_2
#
# The RSNXE is normally included if any of the extended RSN capabilities is
# enabled/supported. When using RSN overriding, a separate RSNXOE is included
# and it may be more interoperable to omit the RSNXE completely. This
# configuration parameter can be used to do that.
# 0 = Include the RSNXE if any extended RSN capability is enabled/supported
#     (default).
# 1 = Do not include the RSNXE.
#rsn_override_omit_rsnxe=0
#
# Example configuration for WPA2-Personal/PMF-optional in RSNE and
# WPA3-Personal/PMF-required/MLO in override elements
#wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-PSK
#rsn_pairwise=CCMP
#ieee80211w=1
#rsn_override_key_mgmt=SAE
#rsn_override_pairwise=GCMP-256
#rsn_override_mfp=2
#rsn_override_key_mgmt_2=SAE-EXT-KEY
#rsn_override_pairwise_2=GCMP-256
#rsn_override_mfp_2=2
#beacon_prot=1
#sae_groups=19 20
#sae_require_mfp=1
#sae_pwe=2


##### IEEE 802.11r configuration ##############################################

# Mobility Domain identifier (dot11FTMobilityDomainID, MDID)
# MDID is used to indicate a group of APs (within an ESS, i.e., sharing the
# same SSID) between which a STA can use Fast BSS Transition.
# 2-octet identifier as a hex string.
#mobility_domain=a1b2

# PMK-R0 Key Holder identifier (dot11FTR0KeyHolderID)
# 1 to 48 octet identifier.
# This is configured with nas_identifier (see RADIUS client section above).

# Default lifetime of the PMK-R0 in seconds; range 60..4294967295
# (default: 14 days / 1209600 seconds; 0 = disable timeout)
# (dot11FTR0KeyLifetime)
#ft_r0_key_lifetime=1209600

# Maximum lifetime for PMK-R1; applied only if not zero
# PMK-R1 is removed at latest after this limit.
# Removing any PMK-R1 for expiry can be disabled by setting this to -1.
# (default: 0)
#r1_max_key_lifetime=0

# PMK-R1 Key Holder identifier (dot11FTR1KeyHolderID)
# 6-octet identifier as a hex string.
# Defaults to BSSID.
#r1_key_holder=000102030405

# Reassociation deadline in time units (TUs / 1.024 ms; range 1000..65535)
# (dot11FTReassociationDeadline)
#reassociation_deadline=1000

# List of R0KHs in the same Mobility Domain
# format: <MAC address> <NAS Identifier> <256-bit key as hex string>
# This list is used to map R0KH-ID (NAS Identifier) to a destination MAC
# address when requesting PMK-R1 key from the R0KH that the STA used during the
# Initial Mobility Domain Association.
#r0kh=02:01:02:03:04:05 r0kh-1.example.com 000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f
#r0kh=02:01:02:03:04:06 r0kh-2.example.com 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff
# And so on.. One line per R0KH.
# Wildcard entry:
# Upon receiving a response from R0KH, it will be added to this list, so
# subsequent requests won't be broadcast. If R0KH does not reply, it will be
# temporarily blocked (see rkh_neg_timeout).
#r0kh=ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff * 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff

# List of R1KHs in the same Mobility Domain
# format: <MAC address> <R1KH-ID> <256-bit key as hex string>
# This list is used to map R1KH-ID to a destination MAC address when sending
# PMK-R1 key from the R0KH. This is also the list of authorized R1KHs in the MD
# that can request PMK-R1 keys.
#r1kh=02:01:02:03:04:05 02:11:22:33:44:55 000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f
#r1kh=02:01:02:03:04:06 02:11:22:33:44:66 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff
# And so on.. One line per R1KH.
# Wildcard entry:
# Upon receiving a request from an R1KH not yet known, it will be added to this
# list and thus will receive push notifications.
#r1kh=00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff

# Optionally, the list of RxKHs can be read from a text file. Format is the same
# as specified above. File shall contain both r0kh and r1kh. Once this variable
# is set, RxKHs can be reloaded at runtime without bringing down an interface
# using the RELOAD_RXKHS command.
#rxkh_file=<path>

# Timeout (seconds) for newly discovered R0KH/R1KH (see wildcard entries above)
# Special values: 0 -> do not expire
# Warning: do not cache implies no sequence number validation with wildcards
#rkh_pos_timeout=86400 (default = 1 day)

# Timeout (milliseconds) for requesting PMK-R1 from R0KH using PULL request
# and number of retries.
#rkh_pull_timeout=1000 (default = 1 second)
#rkh_pull_retries=4 (default)

# Timeout (seconds) for non replying R0KH (see wildcard entries above)
# Special values: 0 -> do not cache
# default: 60 seconds
#rkh_neg_timeout=60

# Note: The R0KH/R1KH keys used to be 128-bit in length before the message
# format was changed. That shorter key length is still supported for backwards
# compatibility of the configuration files. If such a shorter key is used, a
# 256-bit key is derived from it. For new deployments, configuring the 256-bit
# key is recommended.

# Whether PMK-R1 push is enabled at R0KH
# 0 = do not push PMK-R1 to all configured R1KHs (default)
# 1 = push PMK-R1 to all configured R1KHs whenever a new PMK-R0 is derived
#pmk_r1_push=1

# Whether to enable FT-over-DS
# 0 = FT-over-DS disabled
# 1 = FT-over-DS enabled (default)
#ft_over_ds=1

# Whether to generate FT response locally for PSK networks
# This avoids use of PMK-R1 push/pull from other APs with FT-PSK networks as
# the required information (PSK and other session data) is already locally
# available.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#ft_psk_generate_local=0

##### Neighbor table ##########################################################
# Maximum number of entries kept in AP table (either for neighbor table or for
# detecting Overlapping Legacy BSS Condition). The oldest entry will be
# removed when adding a new entry that would make the list grow over this
# limit. Note! WFA certification for IEEE 802.11g requires that OLBC is
# enabled, so this field should not be set to 0 when using IEEE 802.11g.
# default: 255
#ap_table_max_size=255

# Number of seconds of no frames received after which entries may be deleted
# from the AP table. Since passive scanning is not usually performed frequently
# this should not be set to very small value. In addition, there is no
# guarantee that every scan cycle will receive beacon frames from the
# neighboring APs.
# default: 60
#ap_table_expiration_time=3600

# Maximum number of stations to track on the operating channel
# This can be used to detect dualband capable stations before they have
# associated, e.g., to provide guidance on which colocated BSS to use.
# Default: 0 (disabled)
#track_sta_max_num=100

# Maximum age of a station tracking entry in seconds
# Default: 180
#track_sta_max_age=180

# Do not reply to group-addressed Probe Request from a station that was seen on
# another radio.
# Default: Disabled
#
# This can be used with enabled track_sta_max_num configuration on another
# interface controlled by the same hostapd process to restrict Probe Request
# frame handling from replying to group-addressed Probe Request frames from a
# station that has been detected to be capable of operating on another band,
# e.g., to try to reduce likelihood of the station selecting a 2.4 GHz BSS when
# the AP operates both a 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz BSS concurrently.
#
# Note: Enabling this can cause connectivity issues and increase latency for
# discovering the AP.
#no_probe_resp_if_seen_on=wlan1

# Reject authentication from a station that was seen on another radio.
# Default: Disabled
#
# This can be used with enabled track_sta_max_num configuration on another
# interface controlled by the same hostapd process to reject authentication
# attempts from a station that has been detected to be capable of operating on
# another band, e.g., to try to reduce likelihood of the station selecting a
# 2.4 GHz BSS when the AP operates both a 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz BSS concurrently.
#
# Note: Enabling this can cause connectivity issues and increase latency for
# connecting with the AP.
#no_auth_if_seen_on=wlan1

##### Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) #############################################

# WPS state
# 0 = WPS disabled (default)
# 1 = WPS enabled, not configured
# 2 = WPS enabled, configured
#wps_state=2

# Whether to manage this interface independently from other WPS interfaces
# By default, a single hostapd process applies WPS operations to all configured
# interfaces. This parameter can be used to disable that behavior for a subset
# of interfaces. If this is set to non-zero for an interface, WPS commands
# issued on that interface do not apply to other interfaces and WPS operations
# performed on other interfaces do not affect this interface.
#wps_independent=0

# AP can be configured into a locked state where new WPS Registrar are not
# accepted, but previously authorized Registrars (including the internal one)
# can continue to add new Enrollees.
#ap_setup_locked=1

# Universally Unique IDentifier (UUID; see RFC 4122) of the device
# This value is used as the UUID for the internal WPS Registrar. If the AP
# is also using UPnP, this value should be set to the device's UPnP UUID.
# If not configured, UUID will be generated based on the local MAC address.
#uuid=12345678-9abc-def0-1234-56789abcdef0

# Note: If wpa_psk_file is set, WPS is used to generate random, per-device PSKs
# that will be appended to the wpa_psk_file. If wpa_psk_file is not set, the
# default PSK (wpa_psk/wpa_passphrase) will be delivered to Enrollees. Use of
# per-device PSKs is recommended as the more secure option (i.e., make sure to
# set wpa_psk_file when using WPS with WPA-PSK).

# When an Enrollee requests access to the network with PIN method, the Enrollee
# PIN will need to be entered for the Registrar. PIN request notifications are
# sent to hostapd ctrl_iface monitor. In addition, they can be written to a
# text file that could be used, e.g., to populate the AP administration UI with
# pending PIN requests. If the following variable is set, the PIN requests will
# be written to the configured file.
#wps_pin_requests=/var/run/hostapd_wps_pin_requests

# Device Name
# User-friendly description of device; up to 32 octets encoded in UTF-8
#device_name=Wireless AP

# Manufacturer
# The manufacturer of the device (up to 64 ASCII characters)
#manufacturer=Company

# Model Name
# Model of the device (up to 32 ASCII characters)
#model_name=WAP

# Model Number
# Additional device description (up to 32 ASCII characters)
#model_number=123

# Serial Number
# Serial number of the device (up to 32 characters)
#serial_number=12345

# Primary Device Type
# Used format: <categ>-<OUI>-<subcateg>
# categ = Category as an integer value
# OUI = OUI and type octet as a 4-octet hex-encoded value; 0050F204 for
#       default WPS OUI
# subcateg = OUI-specific Sub Category as an integer value
# Examples:
#   1-0050F204-1 (Computer / PC)
#   1-0050F204-2 (Computer / Server)
#   5-0050F204-1 (Storage / NAS)
#   6-0050F204-1 (Network Infrastructure / AP)
#device_type=6-0050F204-1

# OS Version
# 4-octet operating system version number (hex string)
#os_version=01020300

# Config Methods
# List of the supported configuration methods
# Available methods: usba ethernet label display ext_nfc_token int_nfc_token
#	nfc_interface push_button keypad virtual_display physical_display
#	virtual_push_button physical_push_button
#config_methods=label virtual_display virtual_push_button keypad

# WPS capability discovery workaround for PBC with Windows 7
# Windows 7 uses incorrect way of figuring out AP's WPS capabilities by acting
# as a Registrar and using M1 from the AP. The config methods attribute in that
# message is supposed to indicate only the configuration method supported by
# the AP in Enrollee role, i.e., to add an external Registrar. For that case,
# PBC shall not be used and as such, the PushButton config method is removed
# from M1 by default. If pbc_in_m1=1 is included in the configuration file,
# the PushButton config method is left in M1 (if included in config_methods
# parameter) to allow Windows 7 to use PBC instead of PIN (e.g., from a label
# in the AP).
#pbc_in_m1=1

# Static access point PIN for initial configuration and adding Registrars
# If not set, hostapd will not allow external WPS Registrars to control the
# access point. The AP PIN can also be set at runtime with hostapd_cli
# wps_ap_pin command. Use of temporary (enabled by user action) and random
# AP PIN is much more secure than configuring a static AP PIN here. As such,
# use of the ap_pin parameter is not recommended if the AP device has means for
# displaying a random PIN.
#ap_pin=12345670

# Skip building of automatic WPS credential
# This can be used to allow the automatically generated Credential attribute to
# be replaced with pre-configured Credential(s).
#skip_cred_build=1

# Additional Credential attribute(s)
# This option can be used to add pre-configured Credential attributes into M8
# message when acting as a Registrar. If skip_cred_build=1, this data will also
# be able to override the Credential attribute that would have otherwise been
# automatically generated based on network configuration. This configuration
# option points to an external file that much contain the WPS Credential
# attribute(s) as binary data.
#extra_cred=hostapd.cred

# Credential processing
#   0 = process received credentials internally (default)
#   1 = do not process received credentials; just pass them over ctrl_iface to
#	external program(s)
#   2 = process received credentials internally and pass them over ctrl_iface
#	to external program(s)
# Note: With wps_cred_processing=1, skip_cred_build should be set to 1 and
# extra_cred be used to provide the Credential data for Enrollees.
#
# wps_cred_processing=1 will disabled automatic updates of hostapd.conf file
# both for Credential processing and for marking AP Setup Locked based on
# validation failures of AP PIN. An external program is responsible on updating
# the configuration appropriately in this case.
#wps_cred_processing=0

# Whether to enable SAE (WPA3-Personal transition mode) automatically for
# WPA2-PSK credentials received using WPS.
# 0 = only add the explicitly listed WPA2-PSK configuration (default)
# 1 = add both the WPA2-PSK and SAE configuration and enable PMF so that the
#     AP gets configured in WPA3-Personal transition mode (supports both
#     WPA2-Personal (PSK) and WPA3-Personal (SAE) clients).
#wps_cred_add_sae=0

# AP Settings Attributes for M7
# By default, hostapd generates the AP Settings Attributes for M7 based on the
# current configuration. It is possible to override this by providing a file
# with pre-configured attributes. This is similar to extra_cred file format,
# but the AP Settings attributes are not encapsulated in a Credential
# attribute.
#ap_settings=hostapd.ap_settings

# Multi-AP backhaul BSS config
# Used in WPS when multi_ap=2 or 3. Defines "backhaul BSS" credentials.
# These are passed in WPS M8 instead of the normal (fronthaul) credentials
# if the Enrollee has the Multi-AP subelement set. Backhaul SSID is formatted
# like ssid2. The key is set like wpa_psk or wpa_passphrase.
#multi_ap_backhaul_ssid="backhaul"
#multi_ap_backhaul_wpa_psk=0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef
#multi_ap_backhaul_wpa_passphrase=secret passphrase

# Multi-AP Profile
# Indicate the supported Multi-AP profile (default: 2)
# 1 = Supports Multi-AP profile 1 as defined in Wi-Fi EasyMesh specification
# 2 = Supports Multi-AP profile 2 as defined in Wi-Fi EasyMesh specification
#multi_ap_profile=2

# Multi-AP client disallow
# Used to disallow profile specific backhaul STA association
# Bitmap of the disallowed Profile-X profiles
# 1 = Profile-1 Backhaul STA association disallowed
# 2 = Profile-2 Backhaul STA association disallowed
#multi_ap_client_disallow=0

# Multi-AP VLAN ID
# A valid non-zero VLAN ID will be used to update Default IEEE 802.1Q Setting
#multi_ap_vlanid=0

# WPS UPnP interface
# If set, support for external Registrars is enabled.
#upnp_iface=br0

# Friendly Name (required for UPnP)
# Short description for end use. Should be less than 64 characters.
#friendly_name=WPS Access Point

# Manufacturer URL (optional for UPnP)
#manufacturer_url=http://www.example.com/

# Model Description (recommended for UPnP)
# Long description for end user. Should be less than 128 characters.
#model_description=Wireless Access Point

# Model URL (optional for UPnP)
#model_url=http://www.example.com/model/

# Universal Product Code (optional for UPnP)
# 12-digit, all-numeric code that identifies the consumer package.
#upc=123456789012

# WPS RF Bands (a = 5G, b = 2.4G, g = 2.4G, ag = dual band, ad = 60 GHz)
# This value should be set according to RF band(s) supported by the AP if
# hw_mode is not set. For dual band dual concurrent devices, this needs to be
# set to ag to allow both RF bands to be advertized.
#wps_rf_bands=ag

# NFC password token for WPS
# These parameters can be used to configure a fixed NFC password token for the
# AP. This can be generated, e.g., with nfc_pw_token from wpa_supplicant. When
# these parameters are used, the AP is assumed to be deployed with a NFC tag
# that includes the matching NFC password token (e.g., written based on the
# NDEF record from nfc_pw_token).
#
#wps_nfc_dev_pw_id: Device Password ID (16..65535)
#wps_nfc_dh_pubkey: Hexdump of DH Public Key
#wps_nfc_dh_privkey: Hexdump of DH Private Key
#wps_nfc_dev_pw: Hexdump of Device Password

# Application Extension attribute for Beacon and Probe Response frames
# This parameter can be used to add application extension into WPS IE. The
# contents of this parameter starts with 16-octet (32 hexdump characters) of
# UUID to identify the specific application and that is followed by the actual
# application specific data.
#wps_application_ext=<hexdump>

##### Wi-Fi Direct (P2P) ######################################################

# Enable P2P Device management
#manage_p2p=1

# Allow cross connection
#allow_cross_connection=1

##### Device Provisioning Protocol (DPP) ######################################

# Name for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request
#dpp_name=Test

# MUD URL for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request (optional)
#dpp_mud_url=https://example.com/mud

# JSON node name of additional data for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request
#dpp_extra_conf_req_name=org.example

# JSON node data of additional data for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request
#dpp_extra_conf_req_value="abc":123

#dpp_connector
#dpp_netaccesskey
#dpp_netaccesskey_expiry
#dpp_csign
#dpp_controller

# DPP Relay port number
# TCP port to listen to for incoming connections from a Controller. This can be
# used to allow Controller initiated exchanges in addition to the
# Controller-as-responder cases covered by the dpp_controller parameter.
#dpp_relay_port=12345

# Configurator Connectivity indication
# 0: no Configurator is currently connected (default)
# 1: advertise that a Configurator is available
#dpp_configurator_connectivity=0

# DPP PFS
# 0: allow PFS to be used or not used (default)
# 1: require PFS to be used (note: not compatible with DPP R1)
# 2: do not allow PFS to be used
#dpp_pfs=0

#### TDLS (IEEE 802.11z-2010) #################################################

# Prohibit use of TDLS in this BSS
#tdls_prohibit=1

# Prohibit use of TDLS Channel Switching in this BSS
#tdls_prohibit_chan_switch=1

##### IEEE 802.11v-2011 #######################################################

# Time advertisement
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 2 = UTC time at which the TSF timer is 0
#time_advertisement=2

# Local time zone as specified in 8.3 of IEEE Std 1003.1-2004:
# stdoffset[dst[offset][,start[/time],end[/time]]]
#time_zone=EST5

# WNM-Sleep Mode (extended sleep mode for stations)
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled (allow stations to use WNM-Sleep Mode)
#wnm_sleep_mode=1

# WNM-Sleep Mode GTK/IGTK workaround
# Normally, WNM-Sleep Mode exit with management frame protection negotiated
# would result in the current GTK/IGTK getting added into the WNM-Sleep Mode
# Response frame. Some station implementations may have a vulnerability that
# results in GTK/IGTK reinstallation based on this frame being replayed. This
# configuration parameter can be used to disable that behavior and use EAPOL-Key
# frames for GTK/IGTK update instead. This would likely be only used with
# wpa_disable_eapol_key_retries=1 that enables a workaround for similar issues
# with EAPOL-Key. This is related to station side vulnerabilities CVE-2017-13087
# and CVE-2017-13088. To enable this AP-side workaround, set the parameter to 1.
#wnm_sleep_mode_no_keys=0

# BSS Transition Management
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#bss_transition=1

# Proxy ARP
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#proxy_arp=1

# IPv6 Neighbor Advertisement multicast-to-unicast conversion
# This can be used with Proxy ARP to allow multicast NAs to be forwarded to
# associated STAs using link layer unicast delivery.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#na_mcast_to_ucast=0

##### IEEE 802.11u-2011 #######################################################

# Enable Interworking service
#interworking=0

# Access Network Type
# 0 = Private network
# 1 = Private network with guest access
# 2 = Chargeable public network
# 3 = Free public network
# 4 = Personal device network
# 5 = Emergency services only network
# 14 = Test or experimental
# 15 = Wildcard
#access_network_type=0

# Whether the network provides connectivity to the Internet
# 0 = Unspecified
# 1 = Network provides connectivity to the Internet
#internet=1

# Additional Step Required for Access
# Note: This is only used with open network, i.e., ASRA shall ne set to 0 if
# RSN is used.
#asra=0

# Emergency services reachable
#esr=0

# Unauthenticated emergency service accessible
#uesa=0

# Venue Info (optional)
# The available values are defined in IEEE Std 802.11u-2011, 7.3.1.34.
# Example values (group,type):
# 0,0 = Unspecified
# 1,7 = Convention Center
# 1,13 = Coffee Shop
# 2,0 = Unspecified Business
# 7,1  Private Residence
#venue_group=7
#venue_type=1

# Homogeneous ESS identifier (optional; dot11HESSID)
# If set, this shall be identifical to one of the BSSIDs in the homogeneous
# ESS and this shall be set to the same value across all BSSs in homogeneous
# ESS.
#hessid=02:03:04:05:06:07

# Roaming Consortium List
# Arbitrary number of Roaming Consortium OIs can be configured with each line
# adding a new OI to the list. The first three entries are available through
# Beacon and Probe Response frames. Any additional entry will be available only
# through ANQP queries. Each OI is between 3 and 15 octets and is configured as
# a hexstring.
#roaming_consortium=021122
#roaming_consortium=2233445566

# Venue Name information
# This parameter can be used to configure one or more Venue Name Duples for
# Venue Name ANQP information. Each entry has a two or three character language
# code (ISO-639) separated by colon from the venue name string.
# Note that venue_group and venue_type have to be set for Venue Name
# information to be complete.
#venue_name=eng:Example venue
#venue_name=fin:Esimerkkipaikka
# Alternative format for language:value strings:
# (double quoted string, printf-escaped string)
#venue_name=P"eng:Example\nvenue"

# Venue URL information
# This parameter can be used to configure one or more Venue URL Duples to
# provide additional information corresponding to Venue Name information.
# Each entry has a Venue Number value separated by colon from the Venue URL
# string. Venue Number indicates the corresponding venue_name entry (1 = 1st
# venue_name, 2 = 2nd venue_name, and so on; 0 = no matching venue_name)
#venue_url=1:http://www.example.com/info-eng
#venue_url=2:http://www.example.com/info-fin

# Network Authentication Type
# This parameter indicates what type of network authentication is used in the
# network.
# format: <network auth type indicator (1-octet hex str)> [redirect URL]
# Network Authentication Type Indicator values:
# 00 = Acceptance of terms and conditions
# 01 = On-line enrollment supported
# 02 = http/https redirection
# 03 = DNS redirection
#network_auth_type=00
#network_auth_type=02http://www.example.com/redirect/me/here/

# IP Address Type Availability
# format: <1-octet encoded value as hex str>
# (ipv4_type & 0x3f) << 2 | (ipv6_type & 0x3)
# ipv4_type:
# 0 = Address type not available
# 1 = Public IPv4 address available
# 2 = Port-restricted IPv4 address available
# 3 = Single NATed private IPv4 address available
# 4 = Double NATed private IPv4 address available
# 5 = Port-restricted IPv4 address and single NATed IPv4 address available
# 6 = Port-restricted IPv4 address and double NATed IPv4 address available
# 7 = Availability of the address type is not known
# ipv6_type:
# 0 = Address type not available
# 1 = Address type available
# 2 = Availability of the address type not known
#ipaddr_type_availability=14

# Domain Name
# format: <variable-octet str>[,<variable-octet str>]
#domain_name=example.com,another.example.com,yet-another.example.com

# 3GPP Cellular Network information
# format: <MCC1,MNC1>[;<MCC2,MNC2>][;...]
#anqp_3gpp_cell_net=244,91;310,026;234,56

# NAI Realm information
# One or more realm can be advertised. Each nai_realm line adds a new realm to
# the set. These parameters provide information for stations using Interworking
# network selection to allow automatic connection to a network based on
# credentials.
# format: <encoding>,<NAI Realm(s)>[,<EAP Method 1>][,<EAP Method 2>][,...]
# encoding:
#	0 = Realm formatted in accordance with IETF RFC 4282
#	1 = UTF-8 formatted character string that is not formatted in
#	    accordance with IETF RFC 4282
# NAI Realm(s): Semi-colon delimited NAI Realm(s)
# EAP Method: <EAP Method>[:<[AuthParam1:Val1]>][<[AuthParam2:Val2]>][...]
# EAP Method types, see:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/eap-numbers/eap-numbers.xhtml#eap-numbers-4
# AuthParam (Table 8-188 in IEEE Std 802.11-2012):
# ID 2 = Non-EAP Inner Authentication Type
#	1 = PAP, 2 = CHAP, 3 = MSCHAP, 4 = MSCHAPV2
# ID 3 = Inner authentication EAP Method Type
# ID 5 = Credential Type
#	1 = SIM, 2 = USIM, 3 = NFC Secure Element, 4 = Hardware Token,
#	5 = Softoken, 6 = Certificate, 7 = username/password, 9 = Anonymous,
#	10 = Vendor Specific
#nai_realm=0,example.com;example.net
# EAP methods EAP-TLS with certificate and EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 with
# username/password
#nai_realm=0,example.org,13[5:6],21[2:4][5:7]

# Arbitrary ANQP-element configuration
# Additional ANQP-elements with arbitrary values can be defined by specifying
# their contents in raw format as a hexdump of the payload. Note that these
# values will override ANQP-element contents that may have been specified in the
# more higher layer configuration parameters listed above.
# format: anqp_elem=<InfoID>:<hexdump of payload>
# For example, AP Geospatial Location ANQP-element with unknown location:
#anqp_elem=265:0000
# For example, AP Civic Location ANQP-element with unknown location:
#anqp_elem=266:000000

# GAS Address 3 behavior
# 0 = P2P specification (Address3 = AP BSSID) workaround enabled by default
#     based on GAS request Address3
# 1 = IEEE 802.11 standard compliant regardless of GAS request Address3
# 2 = Force non-compliant behavior (Address3 = AP BSSID for all cases)
#gas_address3=0

# QoS Map Set configuration
#
# Comma delimited QoS Map Set in decimal values
# (see IEEE Std 802.11-2012, 8.4.2.97)
#
# format:
# [<DSCP Exceptions[DSCP,UP]>,]<UP 0 range[low,high]>,...<UP 7 range[low,high]>
#
# There can be up to 21 optional DSCP Exceptions which are pairs of DSCP Value
# (0..63 or 255) and User Priority (0..7). This is followed by eight DSCP Range
# descriptions with DSCP Low Value and DSCP High Value pairs (0..63 or 255) for
# each UP starting from 0. If both low and high value are set to 255, the
# corresponding UP is not used.
#
# default: not set
#qos_map_set=53,2,22,6,8,15,0,7,255,255,16,31,32,39,255,255,40,47,255,255

##### Hotspot 2.0 #############################################################

# Enable Hotspot 2.0 support
#hs20=1

# Disable Downstream Group-Addressed Forwarding (DGAF)
# This can be used to configure a network where no group-addressed frames are
# allowed. The AP will not forward any group-address frames to the stations and
# random GTKs are issued for each station to prevent associated stations from
# forging such frames to other stations in the BSS.
#disable_dgaf=1

# OSU Server-Only Authenticated L2 Encryption Network
#osen=1

# ANQP Domain ID (0..65535)
# An identifier for a set of APs in an ESS that share the same common ANQP
# information. 0 = Some of the ANQP information is unique to this AP (default).
#anqp_domain_id=1234

# Deauthentication request timeout
# If the RADIUS server indicates that the station is not allowed to connect to
# the BSS/ESS, the AP can allow the station some time to download a
# notification page (URL included in the message). This parameter sets that
# timeout in seconds. If the RADIUS server provides no URL, this value is
# reduced to two seconds with an additional trigger for immediate
# deauthentication when the STA acknowledges reception of the deauthentication
# imminent indication. Note that setting this value to 0 will prevent delivery
# of the notification to the STA, so a value of at least 1 should be used here
# for normal use cases.
#hs20_deauth_req_timeout=60

# Operator Friendly Name
# This parameter can be used to configure one or more Operator Friendly Name
# Duples. Each entry has a two or three character language code (ISO-639)
# separated by colon from the operator friendly name string.
#hs20_oper_friendly_name=eng:Example operator
#hs20_oper_friendly_name=fin:Esimerkkioperaattori

# Connection Capability
# This can be used to advertise what type of IP traffic can be sent through the
# hotspot (e.g., due to firewall allowing/blocking protocols/ports).
# format: <IP Protocol>:<Port Number>:<Status>
# IP Protocol: 1 = ICMP, 6 = TCP, 17 = UDP
# Port Number: 0..65535
# Status: 0 = Closed, 1 = Open, 2 = Unknown
# Each hs20_conn_capab line is added to the list of advertised tuples.
#hs20_conn_capab=1:0:2
#hs20_conn_capab=6:22:1
#hs20_conn_capab=17:5060:0

# WAN Metrics
# format: <WAN Info>:<DL Speed>:<UL Speed>:<DL Load>:<UL Load>:<LMD>
# WAN Info: B0-B1: Link Status, B2: Symmetric Link, B3: At Capabity
#    (encoded as two hex digits)
#    Link Status: 1 = Link up, 2 = Link down, 3 = Link in test state
# Downlink Speed: Estimate of WAN backhaul link current downlink speed in kbps;
#	1..4294967295; 0 = unknown
# Uplink Speed: Estimate of WAN backhaul link current uplink speed in kbps
#	1..4294967295; 0 = unknown
# Downlink Load: Current load of downlink WAN connection (scaled to 255 = 100%)
# Uplink Load: Current load of uplink WAN connection (scaled to 255 = 100%)
# Load Measurement Duration: Duration for measuring downlink/uplink load in
# tenths of a second (1..65535); 0 if load cannot be determined
#hs20_wan_metrics=01:8000:1000:80:240:3000

# Operating Class Indication
# List of operating classes the BSSes in this ESS use. The Global operating
# classes in Table E-4 of IEEE Std 802.11-2012 Annex E define the values that
# can be used in this.
# format: hexdump of operating class octets
# for example, operating classes 81 (2.4 GHz channels 1-13) and 115 (5 GHz
# channels 36-48):
#hs20_operating_class=5173

# Terms and Conditions information
#
# hs20_t_c_filename contains the Terms and Conditions filename that the AP
# indicates in RADIUS Access-Request messages.
#hs20_t_c_filename=terms-and-conditions
#
# hs20_t_c_timestamp contains the Terms and Conditions timestamp that the AP
# indicates in RADIUS Access-Request messages. Usually, this contains the number
# of seconds since January 1, 1970 00:00 UTC showing the time when the file was
# last modified.
#hs20_t_c_timestamp=1234567
#
# hs20_t_c_server_url contains a template for the Terms and Conditions server
# URL. This template is used to generate the URL for a STA that needs to
# acknowledge Terms and Conditions. Unlike the other hs20_t_c_* parameters, this
# parameter is used on the authentication server, not the AP.
# Macros:
# @1@ = MAC address of the STA (colon separated hex octets)
#hs20_t_c_server_url=https://example.com/t_and_c?addr=@1@&ap=123

# OSU and Operator icons
# <Icon Width>:<Icon Height>:<Language code>:<Icon Type>:<Name>:<file path>
#hs20_icon=32:32:eng:image/png:icon32:/tmp/icon32.png
#hs20_icon=64:64:eng:image/png:icon64:/tmp/icon64.png

# OSU SSID (see ssid2 for format description)
# This is the SSID used for all OSU connections to all the listed OSU Providers.
#osu_ssid="example"

# OSU Providers
# One or more sets of following parameter. Each OSU provider is started by the
# mandatory osu_server_uri item. The other parameters add information for the
# last added OSU provider. osu_nai specifies the OSU_NAI value for OSEN
# authentication when using a standalone OSU BSS. osu_nai2 specifies the OSU_NAI
# value for OSEN authentication when using a shared BSS (Single SSID) for OSU.
#
#osu_server_uri=https://example.com/osu/
#osu_friendly_name=eng:Example operator
#osu_friendly_name=fin:Esimerkkipalveluntarjoaja
#[email protected]
#[email protected]
#osu_method_list=1 0
#osu_icon=icon32
#osu_icon=icon64
#osu_service_desc=eng:Example services
#osu_service_desc=fin:Esimerkkipalveluja
#
#osu_server_uri=...

# Operator Icons
# Operator icons are specified using references to the hs20_icon entries
# (Name subfield). This information, if present, is advertsised in the
# Operator Icon Metadata ANQO-element.
#operator_icon=icon32
#operator_icon=icon64

##### Multiband Operation (MBO) ###############################################
#
# MBO enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#mbo=1
#
# Cellular data connection preference
# 0 = Excluded - AP does not want STA to use the cellular data connection
# 1 = AP prefers the STA not to use cellular data connection
# 255 = AP prefers the STA to use cellular data connection
#mbo_cell_data_conn_pref=1

##### Optimized Connectivity Experience (OCE) #################################
#
# Enable OCE specific features (bitmap)
# BIT(0) - Reserved
# Set BIT(1) (= 2) to enable OCE in STA-CFON mode
# Set BIT(2) (= 4) to enable OCE in AP mode
# Default is 0 = OCE disabled
#oce=0

# RSSI-based association rejection
#
# Reject STA association if RSSI is below given threshold (in dBm)
# Allowed range: -60 to -90 dBm; default = 0 (rejection disabled)
# Note: This rejection happens based on a signal strength detected while
# receiving a single frame and as such, there is significant risk of the value
# not being accurate and this resulting in valid stations being rejected. As
# such, this functionality is not recommended to be used for purposes other than
# testing.
#rssi_reject_assoc_rssi=-75
#
# Association retry delay in seconds allowed by the STA if RSSI has not met the
# threshold (range: 0..255, default=30).
#rssi_reject_assoc_timeout=30

# Ignore Probe Request frames if RSSI is below given threshold (in dBm)
# Allowed range: -60 to -90 dBm; default = 0 (rejection disabled)
#rssi_ignore_probe_request=-75

##### Fast Session Transfer (FST) support #####################################
#
# The options in this section are only available when the build configuration
# option CONFIG_FST is set while compiling hostapd. They allow this interface
# to be a part of FST setup.
#
# FST is the transfer of a session from a channel to another channel, in the
# same or different frequency bands.
#
# For detals, see IEEE Std 802.11ad-2012.

# Identifier of an FST Group the interface belongs to.
#fst_group_id=bond0

# Interface priority within the FST Group.
# Announcing a higher priority for an interface means declaring it more
# preferable for FST switch.
# fst_priority is in 1..255 range with 1 being the lowest priority.
#fst_priority=100

# Default LLT value for this interface in milliseconds. The value used in case
# no value provided during session setup. Default is 50 ms.
# fst_llt is in 1..4294967 range (due to spec limitation, see 10.32.2.2
# Transitioning between states).
#fst_llt=100

##### Radio measurements / location ###########################################

# The content of a LCI measurement subelement
#lci=<Hexdump of binary data of the LCI report>

# The content of a location civic measurement subelement
#civic=<Hexdump of binary data of the location civic report>

# Enable neighbor report via radio measurements
#rrm_neighbor_report=1

# Enable link measurement report via radio measurements
#rrm_link_measurement_report=1

# Enable beacon report via radio measurements
#rrm_beacon_report=1

# Publish fine timing measurement (FTM) responder functionality
# This parameter only controls publishing via Extended Capabilities element.
# Actual functionality is managed outside hostapd.
#ftm_responder=0

# Publish fine timing measurement (FTM) initiator functionality
# This parameter only controls publishing via Extended Capabilities element.
# Actual functionality is managed outside hostapd.
#ftm_initiator=0
#
# Stationary AP config indicates that the AP doesn't move hence location data
# can be considered as always up to date. If configured, LCI data will be sent
# as a radio measurement even if the request doesn't contain a max age element
# that allows sending of such data. Default: 0.
stationary_ap=1

# Enable reduced neighbor reporting (RNR)
#rnr=0

##### Airtime policy configuration ###########################################

# Set the airtime policy operating mode:
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = static config
# 2 = per-BSS dynamic config
# 3 = per-BSS limit mode
#airtime_mode=0

# Interval (in milliseconds) to poll the kernel for updated station activity in
# dynamic and limit modes
#airtime_update_interval=200

# Static configuration of station weights (when airtime_mode=1). Kernel default
# weight is 256; set higher for larger airtime share, lower for smaller share.
# Each entry is a MAC address followed by a weight.
#airtime_sta_weight=02:01:02:03:04:05 256
#airtime_sta_weight=02:01:02:03:04:06 512

# Per-BSS airtime weight. In multi-BSS mode, set for each BSS and hostapd will
# configure station weights to enforce the correct ratio between BSS weights
# depending on the number of active stations. The *ratios* between different
# BSSes is what's important, not the absolute numbers.
# Must be set for all BSSes if airtime_mode=2 or 3, has no effect otherwise.
#airtime_bss_weight=1

# Whether the current BSS should be limited (when airtime_mode=3).
#
# If set, the BSS weight ratio will be applied in the case where the current BSS
# would exceed the share defined by the BSS weight ratio. E.g., if two BSSes are
# set to the same weights, and one is set to limited, the limited BSS will get
# no more than half the available airtime, but if the non-limited BSS has more
# stations active, that *will* be allowed to exceed its half of the available
# airtime.
#airtime_bss_limit=1

##### EDMG support ############################################################
#
# Enable EDMG capability for AP mode in the 60 GHz band. Default value is false.
# To configure channel bonding for an EDMG AP use edmg_channel below.
# If enable_edmg is set and edmg_channel is not set, EDMG CB1 will be
# configured.
#enable_edmg=1
#
# Configure channel bonding for AP mode in the 60 GHz band.
# This parameter is relevant only if enable_edmg is set.
# Default value is 0 (no channel bonding).
#edmg_channel=9

##### TESTING OPTIONS #########################################################
#
# The options in this section are only available when the build configuration
# option CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS is set while compiling hostapd. They allow
# testing some scenarios that are otherwise difficult to reproduce.
#
# Ignore probe requests sent to hostapd with the given probability, must be a
# floating point number in the range [0, 1).
#ignore_probe_probability=0.0
#
# Ignore authentication frames with the given probability
#ignore_auth_probability=0.0
#
# Ignore association requests with the given probability
#ignore_assoc_probability=0.0
#
# Ignore reassociation requests with the given probability
#ignore_reassoc_probability=0.0
#
# Corrupt Key MIC in GTK rekey EAPOL-Key frames with the given probability
#corrupt_gtk_rekey_mic_probability=0.0
#
# Include only ECSA IE without CSA IE where possible
# (channel switch operating class is needed)
#ecsa_ie_only=0
#
# Include only CSA IE without ECSA IE
# (the operating class is not mentioned)
#csa_ie_only=0

# Delay EAPOL-Key messages 1/4 and 3/4 by not sending the frame until the last
# attempt (wpa_pairwise_update_count). This will trigger a timeout on all
# previous attempts and thus delays the frame. (testing only)
#delay_eapol_tx=0
#
# Additional elements for Probe Response frames.
# This parameter can be used to add additional element(s) to the end of the
# Probe Response frames. The format for these element(s) is a hexdump of the
# raw information elements (id+len+payload for one or more elements).
# These elements are added after the 'vendor_elements'.
#presp_elements=

##### Multiple BSSID support ##################################################
#
# Above configuration is using the default interface (wlan#, or multi-SSID VLAN
# interfaces). Other BSSIDs can be added by using separator 'bss' with
# default interface name to be allocated for the data packets of the new BSS.
#
# hostapd will generate BSSID mask based on the BSSIDs that are
# configured. hostapd will verify that dev_addr & MASK == dev_addr. If this is
# not the case, the MAC address of the radio must be changed before starting
# hostapd (ifconfig wlan0 hw ether <MAC addr>). If a BSSID is configured for
# every secondary BSS, this limitation is not applied at hostapd and other
# masks may be used if the driver supports them (e.g., swap the locally
# administered bit)
#
# BSSIDs are assigned in order to each BSS, unless an explicit BSSID is
# specified using the 'bssid' parameter.
# If an explicit BSSID is specified, it must be chosen such that it:
# - results in a valid MASK that covers it and the dev_addr
# - is not the same as the MAC address of the radio
# - is not the same as any other explicitly specified BSSID
#
# Alternatively, the 'use_driver_iface_addr' parameter can be used to request
# hostapd to use the driver auto-generated interface address (e.g., to use the
# exact MAC addresses allocated to the device).
#
# Not all drivers support multiple BSSes. The exact mechanism for determining
# the driver capabilities is driver specific. With the current (i.e., a recent
# kernel) drivers using nl80211, this information can be checked with "iw list"
# (search for "valid interface combinations").
#
# Please note that hostapd uses some of the values configured for the first BSS
# as the defaults for the following BSSes. However, it is recommended that all
# BSSes include explicit configuration of all relevant configuration items.
#
#bss=wlan0_0
#ssid=test2
# most of the above items can be used here (apart from radio interface specific
# items, like channel)

#bss=wlan0_1
#bssid=00:13:10:95:fe:0b
# ...
#
# Multiple BSSID Advertisement in IEEE 802.11ax
# IEEE Std 802.11ax-2021 added a feature where instead of multiple interfaces
# on a common radio transmitting individual Beacon frames, those interfaces can
# form a set with a common Beacon frame transmitted for all. The interface
# which is brought up first is called the transmitting profile of the MBSSID
# set which transmits the Beacon frames. The remaining interfaces are called
# the non-transmitting profiles and these are advertised inside the Multiple
# BSSID element in the Beacon and Probe Response frames from the first
# interface.
#
# The transmitting interface is visible to all stations in the vicinity, however
# the stations that do not support parsing of the Multiple BSSID element will
# not be able to connect to the non-transmitting interfaces.
#
# Enhanced Multiple BSSID Advertisements (EMA)
# When enabled, the non-transmitting interfaces are split into multiple
# Beacon frames. The number of Beacon frames required to cover all the
# non-transmitting profiles is called the profile periodicity.
#
# Refer to IEEE Std 802.11-2020 for details regarding the procedure and
# required MAC address assignment.
#
# Following configuration is per radio.
# 0 = Disabled (default)
# 1 = Multiple BSSID advertisement enabled.
# 2 = Enhanced multiple BSSID advertisement enabled.
#mbssid=0
#
# Maximum number of BSSs that can be added into a Multiple BSSID set
# This is a radio level parameter. If not set (or 0), the maximum is determined
# automatically based on the configured BSSs which may limit dynamic addition
# of new BSSs.
#mbssid_max=0
#
# Multiple BSSID Index override
# This is a BSS level parameter. If not set (or 0), the BSSID index is
# determined automatically based on the configured BSSs which may limit dynamic
# addition of new BSSs.
#mbssid_index=0
#
# The transmitting interface should be added with the 'interface' option while
# the non-transmitting interfaces should be added using the 'bss' option.
# Security configuration should be added separately per interface, if required.
#
# Example:
#mbssid=2
#interface=wlan2
#ctrl_interface=/var/run/hostapd
#wpa_passphrase=0123456789
#ieee80211w=2
#sae_pwe=1
#auth_algs=1
#wpa=2
#wpa_pairwise=CCMP
#ssid=<SSID-0>
#bridge=br-lan
#wpa_key_mgmt=SAE
#bssid=00:03:7f:12:84:84
#
#bss=wlan2-1
#ctrl_interface=/var/run/hostapd
#wpa_passphrase=0123456789
#ieee80211w=2
#sae_pwe=1
#auth_algs=1
#wpa=2
#wpa_pairwise=CCMP
#ssid=<SSID-1>
#bridge=br-lan
#wpa_key_mgmt=SAE
#bssid=00:03:7f:12:84:85

wifi6e_5ghz.conf

##### hostapd configuration file ##############################################
# Empty lines and lines starting with # are ignored

# AP netdevice name (without 'ap' postfix, i.e., wlan0 uses wlan0ap for
# management frames with the Host AP driver); wlan0 with many nl80211 drivers
# Note: This attribute can be overridden by the values supplied with the '-i'
# command line parameter.
interface=wlan1

# For nl80211, this parameter can be used to request the AP interface to be
# added to the bridge automatically (brctl may refuse to do this before hostapd
# has been started to change the interface mode). If needed, the bridge
# interface is also created.
bridge=br0

# Driver interface type (hostap/wired/none/nl80211/bsd);
# default: hostap). nl80211 is used with all Linux mac80211 drivers.
# Use driver=none if building hostapd as a standalone RADIUS server that does
# not control any wireless/wired driver.
driver=nl80211

# Driver interface parameters (mainly for development testing use)
# driver_params=<params>

# hostapd event logger configuration
#
# Two output method: syslog and stdout (only usable if not forking to
# background).
#
# Module bitfield (ORed bitfield of modules that will be logged; -1 = all
# modules):
# bit 0 (1) = IEEE 802.11
# bit 1 (2) = IEEE 802.1X
# bit 2 (4) = RADIUS
# bit 3 (8) = WPA
# bit 4 (16) = driver interface
# bit 6 (64) = MLME
#
# Levels (minimum value for logged events):
#  0 = verbose debugging
#  1 = debugging
#  2 = informational messages
#  3 = notification
#  4 = warning
#
logger_syslog=-1
logger_syslog_level=2
logger_stdout=-1
logger_stdout_level=2

# Interface for separate control program. If this is specified, hostapd
# will create this directory and a UNIX domain socket for listening to requests
# from external programs (CLI/GUI, etc.) for status information and
# configuration. The socket file will be named based on the interface name, so
# multiple hostapd processes/interfaces can be run at the same time if more
# than one interface is used.
# /var/run/hostapd is the recommended directory for sockets and by default,
# hostapd_cli will use it when trying to connect with hostapd.
ctrl_interface=/var/run/hostapd

# Access control for the control interface can be configured by setting the
# directory to allow only members of a group to use sockets. This way, it is
# possible to run hostapd as root (since it needs to change network
# configuration and open raw sockets) and still allow GUI/CLI components to be
# run as non-root users. However, since the control interface can be used to
# change the network configuration, this access needs to be protected in many
# cases. By default, hostapd is configured to use gid 0 (root). If you
# want to allow non-root users to use the control interface, add a new group
# and change this value to match with that group. Add users that should have
# control interface access to this group.
#
# This variable can be a group name or gid.
#ctrl_interface_group=wheel
ctrl_interface_group=0


##### IEEE 802.11 related configuration #######################################

# SSID to be used in IEEE 802.11 management frames
ssid=Maltes awesome WiFi

# UTF-8 SSID: Whether the SSID is to be interpreted using UTF-8 encoding
utf8_ssid=1

# Country code (ISO/IEC 3166-1). Used to set regulatory domain.
# Set as needed to indicate country in which device is operating.
country_code=DE

# The third octet of the Country String (dot11CountryString)
# This parameter is used to set the third octet of the country string.
#
# All environments of the current frequency band and country (default)
#country3=0x20
# Outdoor environment only
#country3=0x4f
# Indoor environment only
country3=0x49
# Noncountry entity (country_code=XX)
#country3=0x58
# IEEE 802.11 standard Annex E table indication: 0x01 .. 0x1f
# Annex E, Table E-4 (Global operating classes)
#country3=0x04

# Enable IEEE 802.11d. This advertises the country_code and the set of allowed
# channels and transmit power levels based on the regulatory limits. The
# country_code setting must be configured with the correct country for
# IEEE 802.11d functions.
# (default: 0 = disabled)
ieee80211d=1

# Enable IEEE 802.11h. This enables radar detection and DFS support if
# available. DFS support is required on outdoor 5 GHz channels in most countries
# of the world. This can be used only with ieee80211d=1.
# (default: 0 = disabled)
ieee80211h=1

# Add Power Constraint element to Beacon and Probe Response frames
# This config option adds Power Constraint element when applicable and Country
# element is added. Power Constraint element is required by Transmit Power
# Control. This can be used only with ieee80211d=1.
# Valid values are 0..255.
#local_pwr_constraint=3

# Set Spectrum Management subfield in the Capability Information field.
# This config option forces the Spectrum Management bit to be set. When this
# option is not set, the value of the Spectrum Management bit depends on whether
# DFS or TPC is required by regulatory authorities. This can be used only with
# ieee80211d=1 and local_pwr_constraint configured.
#spectrum_mgmt_required=1

# Operation mode (a = IEEE 802.11a (5 GHz), b = IEEE 802.11b (2.4 GHz),
# g = IEEE 802.11g (2.4 GHz), ad = IEEE 802.11ad (60 GHz); a/g options are used
# with IEEE 802.11n (HT), too, to specify band). For IEEE 802.11ac (VHT), this
# needs to be set to hw_mode=a. For IEEE 802.11ax (HE) on 6 GHz this needs
# to be set to hw_mode=a. When using ACS (see channel parameter), a
# special value "any" can be used to indicate that any support band can be used.
# This special case is currently supported only with drivers with which
# offloaded ACS is used.
# Default: IEEE 802.11b
hw_mode=a

# Channel number (IEEE 802.11)
# (default: 0, i.e., not set)
# Please note that some drivers do not use this value from hostapd and the
# channel will need to be configured separately with iwconfig.
#
# If CONFIG_ACS build option is enabled, the channel can be selected
# automatically at run time by setting channel=acs_survey or channel=0, both of
# which will enable the ACS survey based algorithm.
#
# See https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_WLAN_channels#6_GHz_(802.11ax_and_802.11be)
channel=40

# Global operating class (IEEE 802.11, Annex E, Table E-4)
# This option allows hostapd to specify the operating class of the channel
# configured with the channel parameter. channel and op_class together can
# uniquely identify channels across different bands, including the 6 GHz band.
# 131 signifies channel width: 20 MHz
# 132 signifies channel width: 40 MHz
# 133 signifies channel width: 80 MHz
# 134 signifies channel width: 160 MHz
#op_class=134

# ACS tuning - Automatic Channel Selection
# See: https://wireless.wiki.kernel.org/en/users/documentation/acs
#
# You can customize the ACS survey algorithm with following variables:
#
# acs_num_scans requirement is 1..100 - number of scans to be performed that
# are used to trigger survey data gathering of an underlying device driver.
# Scans are passive and typically take a little over 100ms (depending on the
# driver) on each available channel for given hw_mode. Increasing this value
# means sacrificing startup time and gathering more data wrt channel
# interference that may help choosing a better channel. This can also help fine
# tune the ACS scan time in case a driver has different scan dwell times.
#
# acs_chan_bias is a space-separated list of <channel>:<bias> pairs. It can be
# used to increase (or decrease) the likelihood of a specific channel to be
# selected by the ACS algorithm. The total interference factor for each channel
# gets multiplied by the specified bias value before finding the channel with
# the lowest value. In other words, values between 0.0 and 1.0 can be used to
# make a channel more likely to be picked while values larger than 1.0 make the
# specified channel less likely to be picked. This can be used, e.g., to prefer
# the commonly used 2.4 GHz band channels 1, 6, and 11 (which is the default
# behavior on 2.4 GHz band if no acs_chan_bias parameter is specified).
#
# Defaults:
#acs_num_scans=5
#acs_chan_bias=1:0.8 6:0.8 11:0.8

# Channel list restriction. This option allows hostapd to select one of the
# provided channels when a channel should be automatically selected.
# Channel list can be provided as range using hyphen ('-') or individual
# channels can be specified by space (' ') separated values
# Default: all channels allowed in selected hw_mode
#chanlist=100 104 108 112 116
#chanlist=1 6 11-13

# Frequency list restriction. This option allows hostapd to select one of the
# provided frequencies when a frequency should be automatically selected.
# Frequency list can be provided as range using hyphen ('-') or individual
# frequencies can be specified by comma (',') separated values
# Default: all frequencies allowed in selected hw_mode
#freqlist=2437,5955,5975
#freqlist=2437,5985-6105

# Exclude DFS channels from ACS
# This option can be used to exclude all DFS channels from the ACS channel list
# in cases where the driver supports DFS channels.
#acs_exclude_dfs=1

# Include only preferred scan channels from 6 GHz band for ACS
# This option can be used to include only preferred scan channels in the 6 GHz
# band. This can be useful in particular for devices that operate only a 6 GHz
# BSS without a collocated 2.4/5 GHz BSS.
# Default behavior is to include all PSC and non-PSC channels.
#acs_exclude_6ghz_non_psc=1

# Enable background radar feature
# This feature allows CAC to be run on dedicated radio RF chains while the
# radio(s) are otherwise running normal AP activities on other channels.
# This requires that the driver and the radio support it before feature will
# actually be enabled, i.e., this parameter value is ignored with drivers that
# do not advertise support for the capability.
# 0: Leave disabled (default)
# 1: Enable it.
#enable_background_radar=1

# Set minimum permitted max TX power (in dBm) for ACS and DFS channel selection.
# (default 0, i.e., not constraint)
min_tx_power=50

# Beacon interval in kus (1.024 ms) (default: 100; range 15..65535)
beacon_int=100

# DTIM (delivery traffic information message) period (range 1..255):
# number of beacons between DTIMs (1 = every beacon includes DTIM element)
# (default: 2)
dtim_period=2

# Maximum number of stations allowed in station table. New stations will be
# rejected after the station table is full. IEEE 802.11 has a limit of 2007
# different association IDs, so this number should not be larger than that.
# (default: 2007, docs: 255)
max_num_sta=16

# RTS/CTS threshold; -1 = disabled (default); range -1..65535
# If this field is not included in hostapd.conf, hostapd will not control
# RTS threshold and 'iwconfig wlan# rts <val>' can be used to set it.
rts_threshold=-1

# Fragmentation threshold; -1 = disabled (default); range -1, 256..2346
# If this field is not included in hostapd.conf, hostapd will not control
# fragmentation threshold and 'iwconfig wlan# frag <val>' can be used to set
# it.
fragm_threshold=-1

# Rate configuration
# Default is to enable all rates supported by the hardware. This configuration
# item allows this list be filtered so that only the listed rates will be left
# in the list. If the list is empty, all rates are used. This list can have
# entries that are not in the list of rates the hardware supports (such entries
# are ignored). The entries in this list are in 100 kbps, i.e., 11 Mbps = 110.
# If this item is present, at least one rate have to be matching with the rates
# hardware supports.
# default: use the most common supported rate setting for the selected
# hw_mode (i.e., this line can be removed from configuration file in most
# cases)
#supported_rates=10 20 55 110 60 90 120 180 240 360 480 540

# Basic rate set configuration
# List of rates (in 100 kbps) that are included in the basic rate set.
# If this item is not included, usually reasonable default set is used.
#basic_rates=10 20
#basic_rates=10 20 55 110
#basic_rates=60 120 240

# Beacon frame TX rate configuration
# This sets the TX rate that is used to transmit Beacon frames. If this item is
# not included, the driver default rate (likely lowest rate) is used.
# Legacy (CCK/OFDM rates):
#    beacon_rate=<legacy rate in 100 kbps>
# HT:
#    beacon_rate=ht:<HT MCS>
# VHT:
#    beacon_rate=vht:<VHT MCS>
# HE:
#    beacon_rate=he:<HE MCS>
#
# For example, beacon_rate=10 for 1 Mbps or beacon_rate=60 for 6 Mbps (OFDM).
#beacon_rate=10

# Short Preamble
# This parameter can be used to enable optional use of short preamble for
# frames sent at 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, and 11 Mbps to improve network performance.
# This applies only to IEEE 802.11b-compatible networks and this should only be
# enabled if the local hardware supports use of short preamble. If any of the
# associated STAs do not support short preamble, use of short preamble will be
# disabled (and enabled when such STAs disassociate) dynamically.
# 0 = do not allow use of short preamble (default)
# 1 = allow use of short preamble
preamble=1

# Station MAC address -based authentication
# Please note that this kind of access control requires a driver that uses
# hostapd to take care of management frame processing and as such, this can be
# used with driver=hostap or driver=nl80211, but not with driver=atheros.
# 0 = accept unless in deny list
# 1 = deny unless in accept list
# 2 = use external RADIUS server (accept/deny lists are searched first)
macaddr_acl=0

# Accept/deny lists are read from separate files (containing list of
# MAC addresses, one per line). Use absolute path name to make sure that the
# files can be read on SIGHUP configuration reloads.
#accept_mac_file=/etc/hostapd.accept
#deny_mac_file=/etc/hostapd.deny

# IEEE 802.11 specifies two authentication algorithms. hostapd can be
# configured to allow both of these or only one. Open system authentication
# should be used with IEEE 802.1X.
# Bit fields of allowed authentication algorithms:
# bit 0 = Open System Authentication
# bit 1 = Shared Key Authentication (requires WEP)
# 3 = both are allowed
auth_algs=1

# Send empty SSID in beacons and ignore probe request frames that do not
# specify full SSID, i.e., require stations to know SSID.
# default: disabled (0)
# 1 = send empty (length=0) SSID in beacon and ignore probe request for
#     broadcast SSID
# 2 = clear SSID (ASCII 0), but keep the original length (this may be required
#     with some clients that do not support empty SSID) and ignore probe
#     requests for broadcast SSID
ignore_broadcast_ssid=0

# Do not reply to broadcast Probe Request frames from unassociated STA if there
# is no room for additional stations (max_num_sta). This can be used to
# discourage a STA from trying to associate with this AP if the association
# would be rejected due to maximum STA limit.
# Default: 0 (disabled)
#no_probe_resp_if_max_sta=0

# Additional vendor specific elements for Beacon and Probe Response frames
# This parameter can be used to add additional vendor specific element(s) into
# the end of the Beacon and Probe Response frames. The format for these
# element(s) is a hexdump of the raw information elements (id+len+payload for
# one or more elements)
#vendor_elements=dd0411223301

# Additional vendor specific elements for (Re)Association Response frames
# This parameter can be used to add additional vendor specific element(s) into
# the end of the (Re)Association Response frames. The format for these
# element(s) is a hexdump of the raw information elements (id+len+payload for
# one or more elements)
#assocresp_elements=dd0411223301

# TX queue parameters (EDCF / bursting)
# tx_queue_<queue name>_<param>
# queues: data0, data1, data2, data3
#		(data0 is the highest priority queue)
# parameters:
#   aifs: AIFS (default 2)
#   cwmin: cwMin (1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023, 2047, 4095, 8191,
#	   16383, 32767)
#   cwmax: cwMax (same values as cwMin, cwMax >= cwMin)
#   burst: maximum length (in milliseconds with precision of up to 0.1 ms) for
#          bursting
#
# Default WMM parameters (IEEE 802.11 draft; 11-03-0504-03-000e):
# These parameters are used by the access point when transmitting frames
# to the clients.
#
# Low priority / AC_BK = background
#tx_queue_data3_aifs=7
#tx_queue_data3_cwmin=15
#tx_queue_data3_cwmax=1023
#tx_queue_data3_burst=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=31 cWmax=1023 burst=0
#
# Normal priority / AC_BE = best effort
#tx_queue_data2_aifs=3
#tx_queue_data2_cwmin=15
#tx_queue_data2_cwmax=63
tx_queue_data2_burst=2.0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=31 cWmax=127 burst=0
#
# High priority / AC_VI = video
#tx_queue_data1_aifs=1
#tx_queue_data1_cwmin=7
#tx_queue_data1_cwmax=15
#tx_queue_data1_burst=3.0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=15 cWmax=31 burst=6.0
#
# Highest priority / AC_VO = voice
#tx_queue_data0_aifs=1
#tx_queue_data0_cwmin=3
#tx_queue_data0_cwmax=7
#tx_queue_data0_burst=1.5
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=7 cWmax=15 burst=3.3

# 802.1D Tag (= UP) to AC mappings
# WMM specifies following mapping of data frames to different ACs. This mapping
# can be configured using Linux QoS/tc and sch_pktpri.o module.
# 802.1D Tag	802.1D Designation	Access Category	WMM Designation
# 1		BK			AC_BK		Background
# 2		-			AC_BK		Background
# 0		BE			AC_BE		Best Effort
# 3		EE			AC_BE		Best Effort
# 4		CL			AC_VI		Video
# 5		VI			AC_VI		Video
# 6		VO			AC_VO		Voice
# 7		NC			AC_VO		Voice
# Data frames with no priority information: AC_BE
# Management frames: AC_VO
# PS-Poll frames: AC_BE

# Wireless Multimedia Extensions (WME)
wme_enabled=1

# Default WMM parameters (IEEE 802.11 draft; 11-03-0504-03-000e):
# for 802.11a or 802.11g networks
# These parameters are sent to WMM clients when they associate.
# The parameters will be used by WMM clients for frames transmitted to the
# access point.
#
# note - txop_limit is in units of 32microseconds
# note - acm is admission control mandatory flag. 0 = admission control not
# required, 1 = mandatory
# note - Here cwMin and cmMax are in exponent form. The actual cw value used
# will be (2^n)-1 where n is the value given here. The allowed range for these
# wmm_ac_??_{cwmin,cwmax} is 0..15 with cwmax >= cwmin.
#
wmm_enabled=1
#
# WMM-PS Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery [U-APSD]
# Enable this flag if U-APSD supported outside hostapd (eg., Firmware/driver)
uapsd_advertisement_enabled=1
#
# Low priority / AC_BK = background
wmm_ac_bk_cwmin=4
wmm_ac_bk_cwmax=10
wmm_ac_bk_aifs=7
wmm_ac_bk_txop_limit=0
wmm_ac_bk_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=5 cWmax=10
#
# Normal priority / AC_BE = best effort
wmm_ac_be_aifs=3
wmm_ac_be_cwmin=4
wmm_ac_be_cwmax=10
wmm_ac_be_txop_limit=0
wmm_ac_be_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=5 cWmax=7
#
# High priority / AC_VI = video
wmm_ac_vi_aifs=2
wmm_ac_vi_cwmin=3
wmm_ac_vi_cwmax=4
wmm_ac_vi_txop_limit=94
wmm_ac_vi_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=4 cWmax=5 txop_limit=188
#
# Highest priority / AC_VO = voice
wmm_ac_vo_aifs=2
wmm_ac_vo_cwmin=2
wmm_ac_vo_cwmax=3
wmm_ac_vo_txop_limit=47
wmm_ac_vo_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=3 cWmax=4 burst=102

# Enable Multi-AP functionality
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = AP support backhaul BSS
# 2 = AP support fronthaul BSS
# 3 = AP supports both backhaul BSS and fronthaul BSS
multi_ap=0

# Static WEP key configuration
#
# The key number to use when transmitting.
# It must be between 0 and 3, and the corresponding key must be set.
# default: not set
#wep_default_key=0
# The WEP keys to use.
# A key may be a quoted string or unquoted hexadecimal digits.
# The key length should be 5, 13, or 16 characters, or 10, 26, or 32
# digits, depending on whether 40-bit (64-bit), 104-bit (128-bit), or
# 128-bit (152-bit) WEP is used.
# Only the default key must be supplied; the others are optional.
# default: not set
#wep_key0=123456789a
#wep_key1="vwxyz"
#wep_key2=0102030405060708090a0b0c0d
#wep_key3=".2.4.6.8.0.23"

# Station inactivity limit
#
# If a station does not send anything in ap_max_inactivity seconds, an
# empty data frame is sent to it in order to verify whether it is
# still in range. If this frame is not ACKed, the station will be
# disassociated and then deauthenticated. This feature is used to
# clear station table of old entries when the STAs move out of the
# range.
#
# The station can associate again with the AP if it is still in range;
# this inactivity poll is just used as a nicer way of verifying
# inactivity; i.e., client will not report broken connection because
# disassociation frame is not sent immediately without first polling
# the STA with a data frame.
# default: 300 (i.e., 5 minutes)
#ap_max_inactivity=300
#
# The inactivity polling can be disabled to disconnect stations based on
# inactivity timeout so that idle stations are more likely to be disconnected
# even if they are still in range of the AP. This can be done by setting
# skip_inactivity_poll to 1 (default 0).
skip_inactivity_poll=0
#
# BSS max idle period management
# 0 = disabled (do not advertise and manage BSS max idle period)
# 1 = enabled (advertise and manage BSS max idle period; default)
# 2 = enabled requiring protected frames (advertise and manage BSS max idle
#     period and require STAs to use protected keep-alive frames)
#bss_max_idle=1
#
# Maximum acceptable BSS maximum idle period
# If this is set to a nonzero value, the AP allows STAs to request different
# maximum idle period values. This is in the units to 1000 TUs (1.024 s)
#max_acceptable_idle_period=600
#
# Allow STA to skip group key handshake without getting disconnection when
# BSS max idle period management is enabled.
# 0 = disconnect STA if it does not reply to group key handshake (default)
# 1 = do not disconnect STA if it does not reply to group key handshake and
#     if BSS max idle period management is enabled
#no_disconnect_on_group_keyerror=0

# Disassociate stations based on excessive transmission failures or other
# indications of connection loss. This depends on the driver capabilities and
# may not be available with all drivers.
disassoc_low_ack=0

# Maximum allowed Listen Interval (how many Beacon periods STAs are allowed to
# remain asleep). Default: 65535 (no limit apart from field size)
#max_listen_interval=100

# WDS (4-address frame) mode with per-station virtual interfaces
# (only supported with driver=nl80211)
# This mode allows associated stations to use 4-address frames to allow layer 2
# bridging to be used.
wds_sta=1

# If bridge parameter is set, the WDS STA interface will be added to the same
# bridge by default. This can be overridden with the wds_bridge parameter to
# use a separate bridge.
#wds_bridge=wds-br0

# Start the AP with beaconing disabled by default.
#start_disabled=0

# Client isolation can be used to prevent low-level bridging of frames between
# associated stations in the BSS. By default, this bridging is allowed.
#ap_isolate=1

# BSS Load update period (in BUs)
# This field is used to enable and configure adding a BSS Load element into
# Beacon and Probe Response frames.
bss_load_update_period=60

# Channel utilization averaging period (in BUs)
# This field is used to enable and configure channel utilization average
# calculation with bss_load_update_period. This should be in multiples of
# bss_load_update_period for more accurate calculation.
chan_util_avg_period=600

# Fixed BSS Load value for testing purposes
# This field can be used to configure hostapd to add a fixed BSS Load element
# into Beacon and Probe Response frames for testing purposes. The format is
# <station count>:<channel utilization>:<available admission capacity>
#bss_load_test=12:80:20000

# Multicast to unicast conversion
# Request that the AP will do multicast-to-unicast conversion for ARP, IPv4, and
# IPv6 frames (possibly within 802.1Q). If enabled, such frames are to be sent
# to each station separately, with the DA replaced by their own MAC address
# rather than the group address.
#
# Note that this may break certain expectations of the receiver, such as the
# ability to drop unicast IP packets received within multicast L2 frames, or the
# ability to not send ICMP destination unreachable messages for packets received
# in L2 multicast (which is required, but the receiver can't tell the difference
# if this new option is enabled).
#
# This also doesn't implement the 802.11 DMS (directed multicast service).
#
#multicast_to_unicast=0

# Send broadcast Deauthentication frame on AP start/stop
# Default: 1 (enabled)
#broadcast_deauth=1

# Get notifications for received Management frames on control interface
# Default: 0 (disabled)
#notify_mgmt_frames=0

##### IEEE 802.11n related configuration ######################################

# ieee80211n: Whether IEEE 802.11n (HT) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
# Note: You will also need to enable WMM for full HT functionality.
# Note: hw_mode=g (2.4 GHz) and hw_mode=a (5 GHz) is used to specify the band.
ieee80211n=1

# disable_11n: Boolean (0/1) to disable HT for a specific BSS
#disable_11n=0

# ht_capab: HT capabilities (list of flags)
# LDPC coding capability: [LDPC] = supported
# Supported channel width set: [HT40-] = both 20 MHz and 40 MHz with secondary
#	channel below the primary channel; [HT40+] = both 20 MHz and 40 MHz
#	with secondary channel above the primary channel
#	(20 MHz only if neither is set)
#	Note: There are limits on which channels can be used with HT40- and
#	HT40+. Following table shows the channels that may be available for
#	HT40- and HT40+ use per IEEE 802.11n Annex J:
#	freq		HT40-		HT40+
#	2.4 GHz		5-13		1-7 (1-9 in Europe/Japan)
#	5 GHz		40,48,56,64	36,44,52,60
#	(depending on the location, not all of these channels may be available
#	for use)
#	Please note that 40 MHz channels may switch their primary and secondary
#	channels if needed or creation of 40 MHz channel maybe rejected based
#	on overlapping BSSes. These changes are done automatically when hostapd
#	is setting up the 40 MHz channel.
# HT-greenfield: [GF] (disabled if not set)
# Short GI for 20 MHz: [SHORT-GI-20] (disabled if not set)
# Short GI for 40 MHz: [SHORT-GI-40] (disabled if not set)
# Tx STBC: [TX-STBC] (disabled if not set)
# Rx STBC: [RX-STBC1] (one spatial stream), [RX-STBC12] (one or two spatial
#	streams), or [RX-STBC123] (one, two, or three spatial streams); Rx STBC
#	disabled if none of these set
# HT-delayed Block Ack: [DELAYED-BA] (disabled if not set)
# Maximum A-MSDU length: [MAX-AMSDU-7935] for 7935 octets (3839 octets if not
#	set)
# DSSS/CCK Mode in 40 MHz: [DSSS_CCK-40] = allowed (not allowed if not set)
# 40 MHz intolerant [40-INTOLERANT] (not advertised if not set)
# L-SIG TXOP protection support: [LSIG-TXOP-PROT] (disabled if not set)
ht_capab=[HT40+][SHORTGI-20][SHORTGI-40][LDPC]

# Require stations to support HT PHY (reject association if they do not)
#require_ht=1

# If set non-zero, require stations to perform scans of overlapping
# channels to test for stations which would be affected by 40 MHz traffic.
# This parameter sets the interval in seconds between these scans. Setting this
# to non-zero allows 2.4 GHz band AP to move dynamically to a 40 MHz channel if
# no co-existence issues with neighboring devices are found.
#obss_interval=0

# ht_vht_twt_responder: Whether TWT responder is enabled in HT and VHT modes
# 0 = disable; Disable TWT responder support in  HT and VHT modes (default).
# 1 = enable; Enable TWT responder support in HT and VHT modes if supported by
# the driver.
#ht_vht_twt_responder=0

##### IEEE 802.11ac related configuration #####################################

# ieee80211ac: Whether IEEE 802.11ac (VHT) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
# Note: You will also need to enable WMM for full VHT functionality.
# Note: hw_mode=a is used to specify that 5 GHz band is used with VHT.
ieee80211ac=1

# disable_11ac: Boolean (0/1) to disable VHT for a specific BSS
#disable_11ac=0

# vht_capab: VHT capabilities (list of flags)
#
# vht_max_mpdu_len: [MAX-MPDU-7991] [MAX-MPDU-11454]
# Indicates maximum MPDU length
# 0 = 3895 octets (default)
# 1 = 7991 octets
# 2 = 11454 octets
# 3 = reserved
#
# supported_chan_width: [VHT160] [VHT160-80PLUS80]
# Indicates supported Channel widths
# 0 = 160 MHz & 80+80 channel widths are not supported (default)
# 1 = 160 MHz channel width is supported
# 2 = 160 MHz & 80+80 channel widths are supported
# 3 = reserved
#
# Rx LDPC coding capability: [RXLDPC]
# Indicates support for receiving LDPC coded pkts
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Short GI for 80 MHz: [SHORT-GI-80]
# Indicates short GI support for reception of packets transmitted with TXVECTOR
# params format equal to VHT and CBW = 80Mhz
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Short GI for 160 MHz: [SHORT-GI-160]
# Indicates short GI support for reception of packets transmitted with TXVECTOR
# params format equal to VHT and CBW = 160Mhz
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Tx STBC: [TX-STBC-2BY1]
# Indicates support for the transmission of at least 2x1 STBC
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Rx STBC: [RX-STBC-1] [RX-STBC-12] [RX-STBC-123] [RX-STBC-1234]
# Indicates support for the reception of PPDUs using STBC
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = support of one spatial stream
# 2 = support of one and two spatial streams
# 3 = support of one, two and three spatial streams
# 4 = support of one, two, three and four spatial streams
# 5,6,7 = reserved
#
# SU Beamformer Capable: [SU-BEAMFORMER]
# Indicates support for operation as a single user beamformer
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# SU Beamformee Capable: [SU-BEAMFORMEE]
# Indicates support for operation as a single user beamformee
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Compressed Steering Number of Beamformer Antennas Supported:
# [BF-ANTENNA-2] [BF-ANTENNA-3] [BF-ANTENNA-4]
#   Beamformee's capability indicating the maximum number of beamformer
#   antennas the beamformee can support when sending compressed beamforming
#   feedback
# If SU beamformer capable, set to maximum value minus 1
# else reserved (default)
#
# Number of Sounding Dimensions:
# [SOUNDING-DIMENSION-2] [SOUNDING-DIMENSION-3] [SOUNDING-DIMENSION-4]
# Beamformer's capability indicating the maximum value of the NUM_STS parameter
# in the TXVECTOR of a VHT NDP
# If SU beamformer capable, set to maximum value minus 1
# else reserved (default)
#
# MU Beamformer Capable: [MU-BEAMFORMER]
# Indicates support for operation as an MU beamformer
# 0 = Not supported or sent by Non-AP STA (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# VHT TXOP PS: [VHT-TXOP-PS]
# Indicates whether or not the AP supports VHT TXOP Power Save Mode
#  or whether or not the STA is in VHT TXOP Power Save mode
# 0 = VHT AP doesn't support VHT TXOP PS mode (OR) VHT STA not in VHT TXOP PS
#  mode
# 1 = VHT AP supports VHT TXOP PS mode (OR) VHT STA is in VHT TXOP power save
#  mode
#
# +HTC-VHT Capable: [HTC-VHT]
# Indicates whether or not the STA supports receiving a VHT variant HT Control
# field.
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#
# Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent: [MAX-A-MPDU-LEN-EXP0]..[MAX-A-MPDU-LEN-EXP7]
# Indicates the maximum length of A-MPDU pre-EOF padding that the STA can recv
# This field is an integer in the range of 0 to 7.
# The length defined by this field is equal to
# 2 pow(13 + Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent) -1 octets
#
# VHT Link Adaptation Capable: [VHT-LINK-ADAPT2] [VHT-LINK-ADAPT3]
# Indicates whether or not the STA supports link adaptation using VHT variant
# HT Control field
# If +HTC-VHTcapable is 1
#  0 = (no feedback) if the STA does not provide VHT MFB (default)
#  1 = reserved
#  2 = (Unsolicited) if the STA provides only unsolicited VHT MFB
#  3 = (Both) if the STA can provide VHT MFB in response to VHT MRQ and if the
#      STA provides unsolicited VHT MFB
# Reserved if +HTC-VHTcapable is 0
#
# Rx Antenna Pattern Consistency: [RX-ANTENNA-PATTERN]
# Indicates the possibility of Rx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Rx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Rx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
#
# Tx Antenna Pattern Consistency: [TX-ANTENNA-PATTERN]
# Indicates the possibility of Tx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Tx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Tx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
vht_capab=[VHT160][TXSTBC][RXSTBC1][SHORTGI-80][SHORTGI-160][1024-QAM][MU-BEAMFORMEE][MU-BEAMFORMER][SU-BEAMFORMEE][SU-BEAMFORMER]
#
# Require stations to support VHT PHY (reject association if they do not)
#require_vht=1

# 0 = 20 or 40 MHz operating Channel width
# 1 = 80 MHz channel width
# 2 = 160 MHz channel width
# 3 = 80+80 MHz channel width
vht_oper_chwidth=2
#
# center freq = 5 GHz + (5 * index)
# So index 42 gives center freq 5.210 GHz
# which is channel 42 in 5G band
#
vht_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx=50
#
# center freq = 5 GHz + (5 * index)
# So index 159 gives center freq 5.795 GHz
# which is channel 159 in 5G band
#
#vht_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx=159

# Workaround to use station's nsts capability in (Re)Association Response frame
# This may be needed with some deployed devices as an interoperability
# workaround for beamforming if the AP's capability is greater than the
# station's capability. This is disabled by default and can be enabled by
# setting use_sta_nsts=1.
#use_sta_nsts=0

##### IEEE 802.11ax related configuration #####################################

#ieee80211ax: Whether IEEE 802.11ax (HE) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
ieee80211ax=1

# Require stations to support HE PHY (reject association if they do not)
#require_he=1

# disable_11ax: Boolean (0/1) to disable HE for a specific BSS
#disable_11ax=0

#he_su_beamformer: HE single user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
he_su_beamformer=1

#he_su_beamformee: HE single user beamformee support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
he_su_beamformee=1

#he_mu_beamformer: HE multiple user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
he_mu_beamformer=1

# he_bss_color: BSS color (1-63)
# used by clients to discern the source of interference
# each AP in your area needs to use a different number
he_bss_color=47

# he_bss_color_partial: BSS color AID equation
#he_bss_color_partial=0

#he_default_pe_duration: The duration of PE field in an HE PPDU in us
# Possible values are 0 us (default), 4 us, 8 us, 12 us, and 16 us
#he_default_pe_duration=0

#he_twt_required: Whether TWT is required
# 0 = not required (default)
# 1 = required
#he_twt_required=0

#he_twt_responder: Whether TWT (HE) responder is enabled
# 0 = disabled
# 1 = enabled if supported by the driver (default)
#he_twt_responder=1

#he_rts_threshold: Duration of STA transmission
# 0 = not set (default)
# unsigned integer = duration in units of 16 us
#he_rts_threshold=0

#he_er_su_disable: Disable 242-tone HE ER SU PPDU reception by the AP
# 0 = enable reception (default)
# 1 = disable reception
#he_er_su_disable=0

# HE operating channel information; see matching vht_* parameters for details.
# he_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx field is used to indicate center frequency of 80
# and 160 MHz bandwidth operation. In 80+80 MHz operation, it is the center
# frequency of the lower frequency segment. he_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx field
# is used only with 80+80 MHz bandwidth operation and it is used to transmit
# the center frequency of the second segment.
# On the 6 GHz band the center freq calculation starts from 5.950 GHz offset.
# For example idx=3 would result in 5965 MHz center frequency. In addition,
# he_oper_chwidth is ignored, and the channel width is derived from the
# configured operating class or center frequency indexes (see
# IEEE P802.11ax/D6.1 Annex E, Table E-4).
# Channel width (0 = 40 MHz. 1 = 80 Mhz)
he_oper_chwidth=1
he_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx=42
#he_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx

#he_basic_mcs_nss_set: Basic NSS/MCS set
# 16-bit combination of 2-bit values of Max HE-MCS For 1..8 SS; each 2-bit
# value having following meaning:
# 0 = HE-MCS 0-7, 1 = HE-MCS 0-9, 2 = HE-MCS 0-11, 3 = not supported
he_basic_mcs_nss_set=0x2222

#he_mu_edca_qos_info_param_count
#he_mu_edca_qos_info_q_ack
#he_mu_edca_qos_info_queue_request=1
#he_mu_edca_qos_info_txop_request
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_timer=255
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_aci=1
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_timer=255
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_aci=2
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_timer=255
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_aci=3
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_timer=255

# Spatial Reuse Parameter Set
#
# SR Control field value
# B0 = PSR Disallowed
# B1 = Non-SRG OBSS PD SR Disallowed
# B2 = Non-SRG Offset Present
# B3 = SRG Information Present
# B4 = HESIGA_Spatial_reuse_value15_allowed
#he_spr_sr_control
#
# Non-SRG OBSS PD Max Offset (included if he_spr_sr_control B2=1)
#he_spr_non_srg_obss_pd_max_offset

# SRG OBSS PD Min Offset (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
#he_spr_srg_obss_pd_min_offset
#
# SRG OBSS PD Max Offset (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
#he_spr_srg_obss_pd_max_offset
#
# SPR SRG BSS Color (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
# This config represents SRG BSS Color Bitmap field of Spatial Reuse Parameter
# Set element that indicates the BSS color values used by members of the
# SRG of which the transmitting STA is a member. The value is in range of 0-63.
#he_spr_srg_bss_colors=1 2 10 63
#
# SPR SRG Partial BSSID (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
# This config represents SRG Partial BSSID Bitmap field of Spatial Reuse
# Parameter Set element that indicates the Partial BSSID values used by members
# of the SRG of which the transmitting STA is a member. The value range
# corresponds to one of the 64 possible values of BSSID[39:44], where the lowest
# numbered bit corresponds to Partial BSSID value 0 and the highest numbered bit
# corresponds to Partial BSSID value 63.
#he_spr_srg_partial_bssid=0 1 3 63
#
#he_6ghz_max_mpdu: Maximum MPDU Length of HE 6 GHz band capabilities.
# Indicates maximum MPDU length
# 0 = 3895 octets
# 1 = 7991 octets
# 2 = 11454 octets (default)
#he_6ghz_max_mpdu=2
#
#he_6ghz_max_ampdu_len_exp: Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent of HE 6 GHz band
# capabilities. Indicates the maximum length of A-MPDU pre-EOF padding that
# the STA can receive. This field is an integer in the range of 0 to 7.
# The length defined by this field is equal to
# 2 pow(13 + Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent) -1 octets
# 0 = AMPDU length of 8k
# 1 = AMPDU length of 16k
# 2 = AMPDU length of 32k
# 3 = AMPDU length of 65k
# 4 = AMPDU length of 131k
# 5 = AMPDU length of 262k
# 6 = AMPDU length of 524k
# 7 = AMPDU length of 1048k (default)
#he_6ghz_max_ampdu_len_exp=7
#
#he_6ghz_rx_ant_pat: Rx Antenna Pattern Consistency of HE 6 GHz capability.
# Indicates the possibility of Rx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Rx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Rx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
#     (default)
#he_6ghz_rx_ant_pat=1
#
#he_6ghz_tx_ant_pat: Tx Antenna Pattern Consistency of HE 6 GHz capability.
# Indicates the possibility of Tx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Tx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Tx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
#     (default)
#he_6ghz_tx_ant_pat=1

# 6 GHz Access Point type
# This config is to set the 6 GHz Access Point type. Possible options are:
# 0 = Indoor AP
# 1 = Standard power AP
# 2 = Very low power AP (default)
# 3 = Indoor enabled AP
# 4 = Indoor standard power AP
# This has no impact for operation on other bands.
# See IEEE P802.11-REVme/D4.0, Table E-12 (Regulatory Info subfield encoding)
# for more details.
#he_6ghz_reg_pwr_type=0
#
# 6 GHz Maximum Tx Power used in Transmit Power Envelope elements, where the
# "Transmit Power Interpretation" is set to "Regulatory client EIRP PSD".
# For Maximum Transmit Power Category subfield encoding set to default (0):
#reg_def_cli_eirp_psd=-1
# For Maximum Transmit Power Category subfield encoding set to subordinate (1):
#reg_sub_cli_eirp_psd=-1

# Unsolicited broadcast Probe Response transmission settings
# This is for the 6 GHz band only. If the interval is set to a non-zero value,
# the AP schedules unsolicited broadcast Probe Response frames to be
# transmitted for in-band discovery. Refer to
# IEEE P802.11ax/D8.0 26.17.2.3.2, AP behavior for fast passive scanning.
# Valid range: 0..20 TUs; default is 0 (disabled)
#unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval=0

#channel_usage: Whether Channel Usage procedures is supported by AP.
# 0 = Channel Usage support is disabled (default)
# 1 = Channel Usage support is enabled
#channel_usage=0

#peer_to_peer_twt: Indicates an HE AP supports negotiating a peer-to-peer
# TWT schedule that is requested by a non-AP STA to establish a
# channel-usage-aidable BSS or an off-channel TDLS direct link.
# 0 = Does not support Peer-to-peer TWT (default)
# 1 = Supports Peer-to-peer TWT
#peer_to_peer_twt=0

##### IEEE 802.11be related configuration #####################################

#ieee80211be: Whether IEEE 802.11be (EHT) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#ieee80211be=1

#disable_11be: Boolean (0/1) to disable EHT for a specific BSS
#disable_11be=0

#eht_su_beamformer: EHT single user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#eht_su_beamformer=1

#eht_su_beamformee: EHT single user beamformee support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#eht_su_beamformee=1

#eht_mu_beamformer: EHT multiple user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#eht_mu_beamformer=1

# EHT operating channel information; see matching he_* parameters for details.
# The field eht_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx field is used to indicate center
# frequency of 40, 80, and 160 MHz bandwidth operation.
# In the 6 GHz band, eht_oper_chwidth is ignored and the channel width is
# derived from the configured operating class (IEEE P802.11be/D1.5,
# Annex E.1 - Country information and operating classes).
#eht_oper_chwidth (see vht_oper_chwidth)
#eht_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx

#eht_default_pe_duration: The duration of PE field in EHT TB PPDU
# 0 = PE field duration is the same as he_default_pe_duration (default)
# 1 = PE field duration is 20 us
#eht_default_pe_duration=0

#eht_bw320_offset: For automatic channel selection (ACS) to indicate a preferred
# 320 MHz channelization in EHT mode.
# If the channel is decided or the bandwidth is not 320 MHz, this option is
# meaningless.
# 0 = auto-detect by hostapd
# 1 = 320 MHz-1 (channel center frequency 31, 95, 159)
# 2 = 320 MHz-2 (channel center frequency 63, 127, 191)
#eht_bw320_offset=0

# Disabled subchannel bitmap (16 bits) as per IEEE P802.11be/3.0,
# Figure 9-1002c (EHT Operation Information field format). Each bit corresponds
# to a 20 MHz channel, the lowest bit corresponds to the lowest frequency. A
# bit set to 1 indicates that the channel is punctured (disabled). The default
# value is 0 indicating that all channels are active.
#punct_bitmap=0

# Preamble puncturing threshold in automatic channel selection (ACS).
# The value indicates the percentage of ideal channel average interference
# factor above which a channel should be punctured.
# Default is 0, indicates that ACS algorithm should not puncture any channel.
#punct_acs_threshold=75

# AP MLD - Whether this AP is a part of an AP MLD
# 0 = no (no MLO)
# 1 = yes (MLO)
#mld_ap=0

# AP MLD MAC address
# The configured address will be set as the interface hardware address and used
# as the AP MLD MAC address. If not set, the current interface hardware address
# will be used as the AP MLD MAC address.
#mld_addr=02:03:04:05:06:07

##### IEEE 802.1X-2004 related configuration ##################################

# Require IEEE 802.1X authorization
#ieee8021x=1

# IEEE 802.1X/EAPOL version
# hostapd is implemented based on IEEE Std 802.1X-2004 which defines EAPOL
# version 2. However, there are many client implementations that do not handle
# the new version number correctly (they seem to drop the frames completely).
# In order to make hostapd interoperate with these clients, the version number
# can be set to the older version (1) with this configuration value.
# Note: When using MACsec, eapol_version shall be set to 3, which is
# defined in IEEE Std 802.1X-2010.
#eapol_version=2

# Optional displayable message sent with EAP Request-Identity. The first \0
# in this string will be converted to ASCII-0 (nul). This can be used to
# separate network info (comma separated list of attribute=value pairs); see,
# e.g., RFC 4284.
#eap_message=hello
#eap_message=hello\0networkid=netw,nasid=foo,portid=0,NAIRealms=example.com

# WEP rekeying (disabled if key lengths are not set or are set to 0)
# Key lengths for default/broadcast and individual/unicast keys:
# 5 = 40-bit WEP (also known as 64-bit WEP with 40 secret bits)
# 13 = 104-bit WEP (also known as 128-bit WEP with 104 secret bits)
#wep_key_len_broadcast=5
#wep_key_len_unicast=5
# Rekeying period in seconds. 0 = do not rekey (i.e., set keys only once)
#wep_rekey_period=300

# EAPOL-Key index workaround (set bit7) for WinXP Supplicant (needed only if
# only broadcast keys are used)
eapol_key_index_workaround=0

# EAP reauthentication period in seconds (default: 3600 seconds; 0 = disable
# reauthentication).
# Note: Reauthentications may enforce a disconnection, check the related
# parameter wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey for details.
#eap_reauth_period=3600

# Use PAE group address (01:80:c2:00:00:03) instead of individual target
# address when sending EAPOL frames with driver=wired. This is the most common
# mechanism used in wired authentication, but it also requires that the port
# is only used by one station.
#use_pae_group_addr=1

# EAP Re-authentication Protocol (ERP) authenticator (RFC 6696)
#
# Whether to initiate EAP authentication with EAP-Initiate/Re-auth-Start before
# EAP-Identity/Request
#erp_send_reauth_start=1
#
# Domain name for EAP-Initiate/Re-auth-Start. Omitted from the message if not
# set (no local ER server). This is also used by the integrated EAP server if
# ERP is enabled (eap_server_erp=1).
#erp_domain=example.com

##### MACsec ##################################################################

# macsec_policy: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec options
# This determines how sessions are secured with MACsec (only for MACsec
# drivers).
# 0: MACsec not in use (default)
# 1: MACsec enabled - Should secure, accept key server's advice to
#    determine whether to use a secure session or not.
#
# macsec_integ_only: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec transmit mode
# This setting applies only when MACsec is in use, i.e.,
#  - macsec_policy is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0: Encrypt traffic (default)
# 1: Integrity only
#
# macsec_replay_protect: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec replay protection
# This setting applies only when MACsec is in use, i.e.,
#  - macsec_policy is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0: Replay protection disabled (default)
# 1: Replay protection enabled
#
# macsec_replay_window: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec replay protection window
# This determines a window in which replay is tolerated, to allow receipt
# of frames that have been misordered by the network.
# This setting applies only when MACsec replay protection active, i.e.,
#  - macsec_replay_protect is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0: No replay window, strict check (default)
# 1..2^32-1: number of packets that could be misordered
#
# macsec_offload: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec hardware offload
# This setting applies only when MACsec is in use, i.e.,
#  - macsec_policy is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0 = MACSEC_OFFLOAD_OFF (default)
# 1 = MACSEC_OFFLOAD_PHY
# 2 = MACSEC_OFFLOAD_MAC
#
# macsec_port: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec port
# Port component of the SCI
# Range: 1-65534 (default: 1)
#
# mka_priority (Priority of MKA Actor)
# Range: 0..255 (default: 255)
#
# macsec_csindex: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec cipher suite
# 0 = GCM-AES-128 (default)
# 1 = GCM-AES-256 (default)
#
# mka_cak, mka_ckn, and mka_priority: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec pre-shared key mode
# This allows to configure MACsec with a pre-shared key using a (CAK,CKN) pair.
# In this mode, instances of hostapd can act as MACsec peers. The peer
# with lower priority will become the key server and start distributing SAKs.
# mka_cak (CAK = Secure Connectivity Association Key) takes a 16-byte (128-bit)
# hex-string (32 hex-digits) or a 32-byte (256-bit) hex-string (64 hex-digits)
# mka_ckn (CKN = CAK Name) takes a 1..32-bytes (8..256 bit) hex-string
# (2..64 hex-digits)

##### Integrated EAP server ###################################################

# Optionally, hostapd can be configured to use an integrated EAP server
# to process EAP authentication locally without need for an external RADIUS
# server. This functionality can be used both as a local authentication server
# for IEEE 802.1X/EAPOL and as a RADIUS server for other devices.

# Use integrated EAP server instead of external RADIUS authentication
# server. This is also needed if hostapd is configured to act as a RADIUS
# authentication server.
eap_server=0

# Path for EAP server user database
# If SQLite support is included, this can be set to "sqlite:/path/to/sqlite.db"
# to use SQLite database instead of a text file.
#eap_user_file=/etc/hostapd.eap_user

# CA certificate (PEM or DER file) for EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS
#ca_cert=/etc/hostapd.ca.pem

# Server certificate (PEM or DER file) for EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS
#server_cert=/etc/hostapd.server.pem

# Private key matching with the server certificate for EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS
# This may point to the same file as server_cert if both certificate and key
# are included in a single file. PKCS#12 (PFX) file (.p12/.pfx) can also be
# used by commenting out server_cert and specifying the PFX file as the
# private_key.
#private_key=/etc/hostapd.server.prv

# Passphrase for private key
#private_key_passwd=secret passphrase

# An alternative server certificate and private key can be configured with the
# following parameters (with values just like the parameters above without the
# '2' suffix). The ca_cert file (in PEM encoding) is used to add the trust roots
# for both server certificates and/or client certificates).
#
# The main use case for this alternative server certificate configuration is to
# enable both RSA and ECC public keys. The server will pick which one to use
# based on the client preferences for the cipher suite (in the TLS ClientHello
# message). It should be noted that number of deployed EAP peer implementations
# do not filter out the cipher suite list based on their local configuration and
# as such, configuration of alternative types of certificates on the server may
# result in interoperability issues.
#server_cert2=/etc/hostapd.server-ecc.pem
#private_key2=/etc/hostapd.server-ecc.prv
#private_key_passwd2=secret passphrase


# Server identity
# EAP methods that provide mechanism for authenticated server identity delivery
# use this value. If not set, "hostapd" is used as a default.
#server_id=server.example.com

# Enable CRL verification.
# Note: hostapd does not yet support CRL downloading based on CDP. Thus, a
# valid CRL signed by the CA is required to be included in the ca_cert file.
# This can be done by using PEM format for CA certificate and CRL and
# concatenating these into one file. Whenever CRL changes, hostapd needs to be
# restarted to take the new CRL into use. Alternatively, crl_reload_interval can
# be used to configure periodic updating of the loaded CRL information.
# 0 = do not verify CRLs (default)
# 1 = check the CRL of the user certificate
# 2 = check all CRLs in the certificate path
#check_crl=1

# Specify whether to ignore certificate CRL validity time mismatches with
# errors X509_V_ERR_CRL_HAS_EXPIRED and X509_V_ERR_CRL_NOT_YET_VALID.
#
# 0 = ignore errors
# 1 = do not ignore errors (default)
#check_crl_strict=1

# CRL reload interval in seconds
# This can be used to reload ca_cert file and the included CRL on every new TLS
# session if difference between last reload and the current reload time in
# seconds is greater than crl_reload_interval.
# Note: If interval time is very short, CPU overhead may be negatively affected
# and it is advised to not go below 300 seconds.
# This is applicable only with check_crl values 1 and 2.
# 0 = do not reload CRLs (default)
# crl_reload_interval = 300

# If check_cert_subject is set, the value of every field will be checked
# against the DN of the subject in the client certificate. If the values do
# not match, the certificate verification will fail, rejecting the user.
# This option allows hostapd to match every individual field in the right order
# against the DN of the subject in the client certificate.
#
# For example, check_cert_subject=C=US/O=XX/OU=ABC/OU=XYZ/CN=1234 will check
# every individual DN field of the subject in the client certificate. If OU=XYZ
# comes first in terms of the order in the client certificate (DN field of
# client certificate C=US/O=XX/OU=XYZ/OU=ABC/CN=1234), hostapd will reject the
# client because the order of 'OU' is not matching the specified string in
# check_cert_subject.
#
# This option also allows '*' as a wildcard. This option has some limitation.
# It can only be used as per the following example.
#
# For example, check_cert_subject=C=US/O=XX/OU=Production* and we have two
# clients and DN of the subject in the first client certificate is
# (C=US/O=XX/OU=Production Unit) and DN of the subject in the second client is
# (C=US/O=XX/OU=Production Factory). In this case, hostapd will allow both
# clients because the value of 'OU' field in both client certificates matches
# 'OU' value in 'check_cert_subject' up to 'wildcard'.
#
# * (Allow all clients, e.g., check_cert_subject=*)
#check_cert_subject=string

# TLS Session Lifetime in seconds
# This can be used to allow TLS sessions to be cached and resumed with an
# abbreviated handshake when using EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP.
# (default: 0 = session caching and resumption disabled)
#tls_session_lifetime=3600

# TLS flags
# [ALLOW-SIGN-RSA-MD5] = allow MD5-based certificate signatures (depending on
#	the TLS library, these may be disabled by default to enforce stronger
#	security)
# [DISABLE-TIME-CHECKS] = ignore certificate validity time (this requests
#	the TLS library to accept certificates even if they are not currently
#	valid, i.e., have expired or have not yet become valid; this should be
#	used only for testing purposes)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.0] = disable use of TLSv1.0
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.0] = explicitly enable use of TLSv1.0 (this allows
#	systemwide TLS policies to be overridden)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.1] = disable use of TLSv1.1
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.1] = explicitly enable use of TLSv1.1 (this allows
#	systemwide TLS policies to be overridden)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.2] = disable use of TLSv1.2
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.2] = explicitly enable use of TLSv1.2 (this allows
#	systemwide TLS policies to be overridden)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.3] = disable use of TLSv1.3
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.3] = enable TLSv1.3 (experimental - disabled by default)
#tls_flags=[flag1][flag2]...

# Maximum number of EAP message rounds with data (default: 100)
#max_auth_rounds=100

# Maximum number of short EAP message rounds (default: 50)
#max_auth_rounds_short=50

# Cached OCSP stapling response (DER encoded)
# If set, this file is sent as a certificate status response by the EAP server
# if the EAP peer requests certificate status in the ClientHello message.
# This cache file can be updated, e.g., by running following command
# periodically to get an update from the OCSP responder:
# openssl ocsp \
#	-no_nonce \
#	-CAfile /etc/hostapd.ca.pem \
#	-issuer /etc/hostapd.ca.pem \
#	-cert /etc/hostapd.server.pem \
#	-url http://ocsp.example.com:8888/ \
#	-respout /tmp/ocsp-cache.der
#ocsp_stapling_response=/tmp/ocsp-cache.der

# Cached OCSP stapling response list (DER encoded OCSPResponseList)
# This is similar to ocsp_stapling_response, but the extended version defined in
# RFC 6961 to allow multiple OCSP responses to be provided.
#ocsp_stapling_response_multi=/tmp/ocsp-multi-cache.der

# dh_file: File path to DH/DSA parameters file (in PEM format)
# This is an optional configuration file for setting parameters for an
# ephemeral DH key exchange. If the file is in DSA parameters format, it will
# be automatically converted into DH params. If the used TLS library supports
# automatic DH parameter selection, that functionality will be used if this
# parameter is not set. DH parameters are required if anonymous EAP-FAST is
# used.
# You can generate DH parameters file with OpenSSL, e.g.,
# "openssl dhparam -out /etc/hostapd.dh.pem 2048"
#dh_file=/etc/hostapd.dh.pem

# OpenSSL cipher string
#
# This is an OpenSSL specific configuration option for configuring the default
# ciphers. If not set, the value configured at build time ("DEFAULT:!EXP:!LOW"
# by default) is used.
# See https://www.openssl.org/docs/apps/ciphers.html for OpenSSL documentation
# on cipher suite configuration. This is applicable only if hostapd is built to
# use OpenSSL.
#openssl_ciphers=DEFAULT:!EXP:!LOW

# OpenSSL ECDH curves
#
# This is an OpenSSL specific configuration option for configuring the ECDH
# curves for EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP/FAST server. If not set, automatic curve
# selection is enabled. If set to an empty string, ECDH curve configuration is
# not done (the exact library behavior depends on the library version).
# Otherwise, this is a colon separated list of the supported curves (e.g.,
# P-521:P-384:P-256). This is applicable only if hostapd is built to use
# OpenSSL. This must not be used for Suite B cases since the same OpenSSL
# parameter is set differently in those cases and this might conflict with that
# design.
#openssl_ecdh_curves=P-521:P-384:P-256

# Fragment size for EAP methods
#fragment_size=1400

# Finite cyclic group for EAP-pwd. Number maps to group of domain parameters
# using the IANA repository for IKE (RFC 2409).
#pwd_group=19

# Configuration data for EAP-SIM database/authentication gateway interface.
# This is a text string in implementation specific format. The example
# implementation in eap_sim_db.c uses this as the UNIX domain socket name for
# the HLR/AuC gateway (e.g., hlr_auc_gw). In this case, the path uses "unix:"
# prefix. If hostapd is built with SQLite support (CONFIG_SQLITE=y in .config),
# database file can be described with an optional db=<path> parameter.
#eap_sim_db=unix:/tmp/hlr_auc_gw.sock
#eap_sim_db=unix:/tmp/hlr_auc_gw.sock db=/tmp/hostapd.db

# EAP-SIM DB request timeout
# This parameter sets the maximum time to wait for a database request response.
# The parameter value is in seconds.
#eap_sim_db_timeout=1

# Encryption key for EAP-FAST PAC-Opaque values. This key must be a secret,
# random value. It is configured as a 16-octet value in hex format. It can be
# generated, e.g., with the following command:
# od -tx1 -v -N16 /dev/random | colrm 1 8 | tr -d ' '
#pac_opaque_encr_key=000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f

# EAP-FAST authority identity (A-ID)
# A-ID indicates the identity of the authority that issues PACs. The A-ID
# should be unique across all issuing servers. In theory, this is a variable
# length field, but due to some existing implementations requiring A-ID to be
# 16 octets in length, it is strongly recommended to use that length for the
# field to provide interoperability with deployed peer implementations. This
# field is configured in hex format.
#eap_fast_a_id=101112131415161718191a1b1c1d1e1f

# EAP-FAST authority identifier information (A-ID-Info)
# This is a user-friendly name for the A-ID. For example, the enterprise name
# and server name in a human-readable format. This field is encoded as UTF-8.
#eap_fast_a_id_info=test server

# Enable/disable different EAP-FAST provisioning modes:
#0 = provisioning disabled
#1 = only anonymous provisioning allowed
#2 = only authenticated provisioning allowed
#3 = both provisioning modes allowed (default)
#eap_fast_prov=3

# EAP-FAST PAC-Key lifetime in seconds (hard limit)
#pac_key_lifetime=604800

# EAP-FAST PAC-Key refresh time in seconds (soft limit on remaining hard
# limit). The server will generate a new PAC-Key when this number of seconds
# (or fewer) of the lifetime remains.
#pac_key_refresh_time=86400

# EAP-TEAP authentication type
# 0 = inner EAP (default)
# 1 = Basic-Password-Auth
# 2 = Do not require Phase 2 authentication if client can be authenticated
#     during Phase 1
#eap_teap_auth=0

# EAP-TEAP authentication behavior when using PAC
# 0 = perform inner authentication (default)
# 1 = skip inner authentication (inner EAP/Basic-Password-Auth)
#eap_teap_pac_no_inner=0

# EAP-TEAP behavior with Result TLV
# 0 = include with Intermediate-Result TLV (default)
# 1 = send in a separate message (for testing purposes)
#eap_teap_separate_result=0

# EAP-TEAP identities
# 0 = allow any identity type (default)
# 1 = require user identity
# 2 = require machine identity
# 3 = request user identity; accept either user or machine identity
# 4 = request machine identity; accept either user or machine identity
# 5 = require both user and machine identity
#eap_teap_id=0

# EAP-TEAP tunneled EAP method behavior
# 0 = minimize roundtrips by merging start of the next EAP method with the
#     crypto-binding of the previous one.
# 1 = complete crypto-binding before starting the next EAP method
#eap_teap_method_sequence=0

# EAP-SIM and EAP-AKA protected success/failure indication using AT_RESULT_IND
# (default: 0 = disabled).
#eap_sim_aka_result_ind=1

# EAP-SIM and EAP-AKA identity options
# 0 = do not use pseudonyms or fast reauthentication
# 1 = use pseudonyms, but not fast reauthentication
# 2 = do not use pseudonyms, but use fast reauthentication
# 3 = use pseudonyms and use fast reauthentication (default)
# 4 = do not use pseudonyms or fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
# 5 = use pseudonyms, but not fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
# 6 = do not use pseudonyms, but use fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
# 7 = use pseudonyms and use fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
#eap_sim_id=3

# IMSI privacy key (PEM encoded RSA 2048-bit private key) for decrypting
# permanent identity when using EAP-SIM/AKA/AKA'.
#imsi_privacy_key=imsi-privacy-key.pem

# EAP-SIM and EAP-AKA fast re-authentication limit
# Maximum number of fast re-authentications allowed after each full
# authentication.
#eap_sim_aka_fast_reauth_limit=1000

# Trusted Network Connect (TNC)
# If enabled, TNC validation will be required before the peer is allowed to
# connect. Note: This is only used with EAP-TTLS and EAP-FAST. If any other
# EAP method is enabled, the peer will be allowed to connect without TNC.
#tnc=1

# EAP Re-authentication Protocol (ERP) - RFC 6696
#
# Whether to enable ERP on the EAP server.
#eap_server_erp=1


##### RADIUS client configuration #############################################
# for IEEE 802.1X with external Authentication Server, IEEE 802.11
# authentication with external ACL for MAC addresses, and accounting

# The own IP address of the access point (used as NAS-IP-Address)
#own_ip_addr=127.0.0.1

# NAS-Identifier string for RADIUS messages. When used, this should be unique
# to the NAS within the scope of the RADIUS server. Please note that hostapd
# uses a separate RADIUS client for each BSS and as such, a unique
# nas_identifier value should be configured separately for each BSS. This is
# particularly important for cases where RADIUS accounting is used
# (Accounting-On/Off messages are interpreted as clearing all ongoing sessions
# and that may get interpreted as applying to all BSSes if the same
# NAS-Identifier value is used.) For example, a fully qualified domain name
# prefixed with a unique identifier of the BSS (e.g., BSSID) can be used here.
#
# When using IEEE 802.11r, nas_identifier must be set and must be between 1 and
# 48 octets long.
#
# It is mandatory to configure either own_ip_addr or nas_identifier to be
# compliant with the RADIUS protocol. When using RADIUS accounting, it is
# strongly recommended that nas_identifier is set to a unique value for each
# BSS.
#nas_identifier=ap.example.com

# RADIUS client forced local IP address for the access point
# Normally the local IP address is determined automatically based on configured
# IP addresses, but this field can be used to force a specific address to be
# used, e.g., when the device has multiple IP addresses.
#radius_client_addr=127.0.0.1

# RADIUS client forced local interface. Helps run properly with VRF
# Default is none set which allows the network stack to pick the appropriate
# interface automatically.
# Example below binds to eth0
#radius_client_dev=eth0

# RADIUS authentication server
#auth_server_addr=127.0.0.1
#auth_server_port=1812
#auth_server_shared_secret=secret

# RADIUS accounting server
#acct_server_addr=127.0.0.1
#acct_server_port=1813
#acct_server_shared_secret=secret

# Secondary RADIUS servers; to be used if primary one does not reply to
# RADIUS packets. These are optional and there can be more than one secondary
# server listed.
#auth_server_addr=127.0.0.2
#auth_server_port=1812
#auth_server_shared_secret=secret2
#
#acct_server_addr=127.0.0.2
#acct_server_port=1813
#acct_server_shared_secret=secret2

# RADIUS/TLS instead of RADIUS/UDP
#auth_server_addr=127.0.0.1
#auth_server_port=2083
#auth_server_type=TLS
#auth_server_shared_secret=radsec
#auth_server_ca_cert=<path to trusted CA certificate(s)>
#auth_server_client_cert=<path to client certificate>
#auth_server_private_key=<path to private key>
#auth_server_private_key_passwd=<password for decrypting private key>

# Retry interval for trying to return to the primary RADIUS server (in
# seconds). RADIUS client code will automatically try to use the next server
# when the current server is not replying to requests. If this interval is set,
# primary server will be retried after configured amount of time even if the
# currently used secondary server is still working.
#radius_retry_primary_interval=600

# Message-Authenticator attribute requirement for non-EAP cases
# hostapd requires Message-Authenticator attribute to be included in all cases
# where RADIUS is used for EAP authentication. This is also required for cases
# where RADIUS is used for MAC ACL (macaddr_acl=2) by default, but that case
# can be configured to not require this for compatibility with RADIUS servers
# that do not include the attribute. This is not recommended due to potential
# security concerns, but can be used as a temporary workaround in networks where
# the connection to the RADIUS server is secure.
# 0 = Do not require Message-Authenticator in MAC ACL response
# 1 = Require Message-Authenticator in all authentication cases (default)
#radius_require_message_authenticator=1

# Interim accounting update interval
# If this is set (larger than 0) and acct_server is configured, hostapd will
# send interim accounting updates every N seconds. Note: if set, this overrides
# possible Acct-Interim-Interval attribute in Access-Accept message. Thus, this
# value should not be configured in hostapd.conf, if RADIUS server is used to
# control the interim interval.
# This value should not be less 600 (10 minutes) and must not be less than
# 60 (1 minute).
#radius_acct_interim_interval=600

# Request Chargeable-User-Identity (RFC 4372)
# This parameter can be used to configure hostapd to request CUI from the
# RADIUS server by including Chargeable-User-Identity attribute into
# Access-Request packets.
#radius_request_cui=1

# Dynamic VLAN mode; allow RADIUS authentication server to decide which VLAN
# is used for the stations. This information is parsed from following RADIUS
# attributes based on RFC 3580 and RFC 2868: Tunnel-Type (value 13 = VLAN),
# Tunnel-Medium-Type (value 6 = IEEE 802), Tunnel-Private-Group-ID (value
# VLANID as a string). Optionally, the local MAC ACL list (accept_mac_file) can
# be used to set static client MAC address to VLAN ID mapping.
# Dynamic VLAN mode is also used with VLAN ID assignment based on WPA/WPA2
# passphrase from wpa_psk_file or vlan_id parameter from sae_password.
# 0 = disabled (default); only VLAN IDs from accept_mac_file will be used
# 1 = optional; use default interface if RADIUS server does not include VLAN ID
# 2 = required; reject authentication if RADIUS server does not include VLAN ID
#dynamic_vlan=0

# Per-Station AP_VLAN interface mode
# If enabled, each station is assigned its own AP_VLAN interface.
# This implies per-station group keying and ebtables filtering of inter-STA
# traffic (when passed through the AP).
# If the sta is not assigned to any VLAN, then its AP_VLAN interface will be
# added to the bridge given by the "bridge" configuration option (see above).
# Otherwise, it will be added to the per-VLAN bridge.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#per_sta_vif=0

# VLAN interface list for dynamic VLAN mode is read from a separate text file.
# This list is used to map VLAN ID from the RADIUS server to a network
# interface. Each station is bound to one interface in the same way as with
# multiple BSSIDs or SSIDs. Each line in this text file is defining a new
# interface and the line must include VLAN ID and interface name separated by
# white space (space or tab).
# If no entries are provided by this file, the station is statically mapped
# to <bss-iface>.<vlan-id> interfaces.
# Each line can optionally also contain the name of a bridge to add the VLAN to
#vlan_file=/etc/hostapd.vlan

# Interface where 802.1q tagged packets should appear when a RADIUS server is
# used to determine which VLAN a station is on.  hostapd creates a bridge for
# each VLAN.  Then hostapd adds a VLAN interface (associated with the interface
# indicated by 'vlan_tagged_interface') and the appropriate wireless interface
# to the bridge.
#vlan_tagged_interface=eth0

# Bridge (prefix) to add the wifi and the tagged interface to. This gets the
# VLAN ID appended. It defaults to brvlan%d if no tagged interface is given
# and br%s.%d if a tagged interface is given, provided %s = tagged interface
# and %d = VLAN ID.
#vlan_bridge=brvlan

# When hostapd creates a VLAN interface on vlan_tagged_interfaces, it needs
# to know how to name it.
# 0 = vlan<XXX>, e.g., vlan1
# 1 = <vlan_tagged_interface>.<XXX>, e.g. eth0.1
#vlan_naming=0

# Arbitrary RADIUS attributes can be added into Access-Request and
# Accounting-Request packets by specifying the contents of the attributes with
# the following configuration parameters. There can be multiple of these to
# add multiple attributes. These parameters can also be used to override some
# of the attributes added automatically by hostapd.
# Format: <attr_id>[:<syntax:value>]
# attr_id: RADIUS attribute type (e.g., 26 = Vendor-Specific)
# syntax: s = string (UTF-8), d = integer, x = octet string
# value: attribute value in format indicated by the syntax
# If syntax and value parts are omitted, a null value (single 0x00 octet) is
# used.
#
# Additional Access-Request attributes
# radius_auth_req_attr=<attr_id>[:<syntax:value>]
# Examples:
# Operator-Name = "Operator"
#radius_auth_req_attr=126:s:Operator
# Service-Type = Framed (2)
#radius_auth_req_attr=6:d:2
# Connect-Info = "testing" (this overrides the automatically generated value)
#radius_auth_req_attr=77:s:testing
# Same Connect-Info value set as a hexdump
#radius_auth_req_attr=77:x:74657374696e67

#
# Additional Accounting-Request attributes
# radius_acct_req_attr=<attr_id>[:<syntax:value>]
# Examples:
# Operator-Name = "Operator"
#radius_acct_req_attr=126:s:Operator

# If SQLite support is included, path to a database from which additional
# RADIUS request attributes are extracted based on the station MAC address.
#
# The schema for the radius_attributes table is:
# id | sta | reqtype | attr   :   multi-key (sta, reqtype)
# id   = autonumber
# sta  = station MAC address in `11:22:33:44:55:66` format.
# type = `auth` | `acct` | NULL (match any)
# attr = existing config file format, e.g. `126:s:Test Operator`
#radius_req_attr_sqlite=radius_attr.sqlite

# Dynamic Authorization Extensions (RFC 5176)
# This mechanism can be used to allow dynamic changes to user session based on
# commands from a RADIUS server (or some other disconnect client that has the
# needed session information). For example, Disconnect message can be used to
# request an associated station to be disconnected.
#
# This is disabled by default. Set radius_das_port to non-zero UDP port
# number to enable.
#radius_das_port=3799
#
# DAS client (the host that can send Disconnect/CoA requests) and shared secret
# Format: <IP address> <shared secret>
# IP address 0.0.0.0 can be used to allow requests from any address.
#radius_das_client=192.168.1.123 shared secret here
#
# DAS Event-Timestamp time window in seconds
#radius_das_time_window=300
#
# DAS require Event-Timestamp
#radius_das_require_event_timestamp=1
#
# DAS require Message-Authenticator
#radius_das_require_message_authenticator=1

##### RADIUS authentication server configuration ##############################

# hostapd can be used as a RADIUS authentication server for other hosts. This
# requires that the integrated EAP server is also enabled and both
# authentication services are sharing the same configuration.

# File name of the RADIUS clients configuration for the RADIUS server. If this
# commented out, RADIUS server is disabled.
#radius_server_clients=/etc/hostapd.radius_clients

# The UDP port number for the RADIUS authentication server
#radius_server_auth_port=1812

# The UDP port number for the RADIUS accounting server
# Commenting this out or setting this to 0 can be used to disable RADIUS
# accounting while still enabling RADIUS authentication.
#radius_server_acct_port=1813

# Use IPv6 with RADIUS server (IPv4 will also be supported using IPv6 API)
#radius_server_ipv6=1


##### WPA/IEEE 802.11i configuration ##########################################

# Enable WPA. Setting this variable configures the AP to require WPA (either
# WPA-PSK or WPA-RADIUS/EAP based on other configuration). For WPA-PSK, either
# wpa_psk or wpa_passphrase must be set and wpa_key_mgmt must include WPA-PSK.
# Instead of wpa_psk / wpa_passphrase, wpa_psk_radius might suffice.
# For WPA-RADIUS/EAP, ieee8021x must be set (but without dynamic WEP keys),
# RADIUS authentication server must be configured, and WPA-EAP must be included
# in wpa_key_mgmt.
# This field is a bit field that can be used to enable WPA (IEEE 802.11i/D3.0)
# and/or WPA2 (full IEEE 802.11i/RSN):
# bit0 = WPA
# bit1 = IEEE 802.11i/RSN (WPA2) (dot11RSNAEnabled)
# Note that WPA3 is also configured with bit1 since it uses RSN just like WPA2.
# In other words, for WPA3, wpa=2 is used the configuration (and
# wpa_key_mgmt=SAE for WPA3-Personal instead of wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-PSK).
wpa=2

# Extended Key ID support for Individually Addressed frames
#
# Extended Key ID allows to rekey PTK keys without the impacts the "normal"
# PTK rekeying with only a single Key ID 0 has. It can only be used when the
# driver supports it and RSN/WPA2 is used with a CCMP/GCMP pairwise cipher.
#
# 0 = force off, i.e., use only Key ID 0 (default)
# 1 = enable and use Extended Key ID support when possible
# 2 = identical to 1 but start with Key ID 1 when possible
extended_key_id=1

# WPA pre-shared keys for WPA-PSK. This can be either entered as a 256-bit
# secret in hex format (64 hex digits), wpa_psk, or as an ASCII passphrase
# (8..63 characters) that will be converted to PSK. This conversion uses SSID
# so the PSK changes when ASCII passphrase is used and the SSID is changed.
# wpa_psk (dot11RSNAConfigPSKValue)
# wpa_passphrase (dot11RSNAConfigPSKPassPhrase)
#wpa_psk=0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef
wpa_passphrase=myPW1234

# Optionally, WPA PSKs can be read from a separate text file (containing list
# of (PSK,MAC address) pairs. This allows more than one PSK to be configured.
# Use absolute path name to make sure that the files can be read on SIGHUP
# configuration reloads.
#wpa_psk_file=/etc/hostapd.wpa_psk

# Optionally, WPA passphrase can be received from RADIUS authentication server
# This requires macaddr_acl to be set to 2 (RADIUS) for wpa_psk_radius values
# 1 and 2.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = optional; use default passphrase/psk if RADIUS server does not include
#	Tunnel-Password
# 2 = required; reject authentication if RADIUS server does not include
#	Tunnel-Password
# 3 = ask RADIUS server during 4-way handshake if there is no locally
#	configured PSK/passphrase for the STA
#
# The Tunnel-Password attribute in Access-Accept can contain either the
# 8..63 character ASCII passphrase or a 64 hex character encoding of the PSK.
#
#wpa_psk_radius=0

# Set of accepted key management algorithms (WPA-PSK, WPA-EAP, or both). The
# entries are separated with a space. WPA-PSK-SHA256 and WPA-EAP-SHA256 can be
# added to enable SHA256-based stronger algorithms.
# WPA-PSK = WPA-Personal / WPA2-Personal
# WPA-PSK-SHA256 = WPA2-Personal using SHA256
# WPA-EAP = WPA-Enterprise / WPA2-Enterprise
# WPA-EAP-SHA256 = WPA2-Enterprise using SHA256
# SAE = SAE (WPA3-Personal)
# WPA-EAP-SUITE-B-192 = WPA3-Enterprise with 192-bit security/CNSA suite
# FT-PSK = FT with passphrase/PSK
# FT-EAP = FT with EAP
# FT-EAP-SHA384 = FT with EAP using SHA384
# FT-SAE = FT with SAE
# FILS-SHA256 = Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA256
# FILS-SHA384 = Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA384
# FT-FILS-SHA256 = FT and Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA256
# FT-FILS-SHA384 = FT and Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA384
# OWE = Opportunistic Wireless Encryption (a.k.a. Enhanced Open)
# DPP = Device Provisioning Protocol
# OSEN = Hotspot 2.0 online signup with encryption
# (dot11RSNAConfigAuthenticationSuitesTable)
wpa_key_mgmt=SAE WPA-PSK WPA-PSK-SHA256

# Set of accepted cipher suites (encryption algorithms) for pairwise keys
# (unicast packets). This is a space separated list of algorithms:
# CCMP = AES in Counter mode with CBC-MAC (CCMP-128)
# TKIP = Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
# CCMP-256 = AES in Counter mode with CBC-MAC with 256-bit key
# GCMP = Galois/counter mode protocol (GCMP-128)
# GCMP-256 = Galois/counter mode protocol with 256-bit key
# Group cipher suite (encryption algorithm for broadcast and multicast frames)
# is automatically selected based on this configuration. If only CCMP is
# allowed as the pairwise cipher, group cipher will also be CCMP. Otherwise,
# TKIP will be used as the group cipher. The optional group_cipher parameter can
# be used to override this automatic selection.
#
# (dot11RSNAConfigPairwiseCiphersTable)
rsn_pairwise=CCMP CCMP-256 GCMP GCMP-256

# Optional override for automatic group cipher selection
# This can be used to select a specific group cipher regardless of which
# pairwise ciphers were enabled for WPA and RSN. It should be noted that
# overriding the group cipher with an unexpected value can result in
# interoperability issues and in general, this parameter is mainly used for
# testing purposes.
#group_cipher=CCMP

# Time interval for rekeying GTK (broadcast/multicast encryption keys) in
# seconds. (dot11RSNAConfigGroupRekeyTime)
# This defaults to 86400 seconds (once per day) when using CCMP/GCMP as the
# group cipher and 600 seconds (once per 10 minutes) when using TKIP as the
# group cipher.
wpa_group_rekey=86400

# Rekey GTK when any STA that possesses the current GTK is leaving the BSS.
# (dot11RSNAConfigGroupRekeyStrict)
#wpa_strict_rekey=1

# The number of times EAPOL-Key Message 1/2 in the RSN Group Key Handshake is
# retried per GTK Handshake attempt. (dot11RSNAConfigGroupUpdateCount)
# This value should only be increased when stations are constantly
# deauthenticated during GTK rekeying with the log message
# "group key handshake failed...".
# You should consider to also increase wpa_pairwise_update_count then.
# Range 1..4294967295; default: 4
wpa_group_update_count=4

# Time interval for rekeying GMK (master key used internally to generate GTKs
# (in seconds).
wpa_gmk_rekey=86400

# Maximum lifetime for PTK in seconds. This can be used to enforce rekeying of
# PTK to mitigate some attacks against TKIP deficiencies.
# Warning: PTK rekeying is buggy with many drivers/devices and with such
# devices, the only secure method to rekey the PTK without Extended Key ID
# support requires a disconnection. Check the related parameter
# wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey for details.
#wpa_ptk_rekey=600

# Workaround for PTK rekey issues
#
# PTK0 rekeys (rekeying the PTK without "Extended Key ID for Individually
# Addressed Frames") can degrade the security and stability with some cards.
# To avoid such issues hostapd can replace those PTK rekeys (including EAP
# reauthentications) with disconnects.
#
# Available options:
# 0 = always rekey when configured/instructed (default)
# 1 = only rekey when the local driver is explicitly indicating it can perform
#	this operation without issues
# 2 = never allow PTK0 rekeys
#wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey=0

# The number of times EAPOL-Key Message 1/4 and Message 3/4 in the RSN 4-Way
# Handshake are retried per 4-Way Handshake attempt.
# (dot11RSNAConfigPairwiseUpdateCount)
# Range 1..4294967295; default: 4
#wpa_pairwise_update_count=4

# Workaround for key reinstallation attacks
#
# This parameter can be used to disable retransmission of EAPOL-Key frames that
# are used to install keys (EAPOL-Key message 3/4 and group message 1/2). This
# is similar to setting wpa_group_update_count=1 and
# wpa_pairwise_update_count=1, but with no impact to message 1/4 and with
# extended timeout on the response to avoid causing issues with stations that
# may use aggressive power saving have very long time in replying to the
# EAPOL-Key messages.
#
# This option can be used to work around key reinstallation attacks on the
# station (supplicant) side in cases those station devices cannot be updated
# for some reason. By removing the retransmissions the attacker cannot cause
# key reinstallation with a delayed frame transmission. This is related to the
# station side vulnerabilities CVE-2017-13077, CVE-2017-13078, CVE-2017-13079,
# CVE-2017-13080, and CVE-2017-13081.
#
# This workaround might cause interoperability issues and reduced robustness of
# key negotiation especially in environments with heavy traffic load due to the
# number of attempts to perform the key exchange is reduced significantly. As
# such, this workaround is disabled by default (unless overridden in build
# configuration). To enable this, set the parameter to 1.
#wpa_disable_eapol_key_retries=1

# Enable IEEE 802.11i/RSN/WPA2 pre-authentication. This is used to speed up
# roaming be pre-authenticating IEEE 802.1X/EAP part of the full RSN
# authentication and key handshake before actually associating with a new AP.
# (dot11RSNAPreauthenticationEnabled)
#rsn_preauth=1
#
# Space separated list of interfaces from which pre-authentication frames are
# accepted (e.g., 'eth0' or 'eth0 wlan0wds0'. This list should include all
# interface that are used for connections to other APs. This could include
# wired interfaces and WDS links. The normal wireless data interface towards
# associated stations (e.g., wlan0) should not be added, since
# pre-authentication is only used with APs other than the currently associated
# one.
#rsn_preauth_interfaces=eth0

# ieee80211w: Whether management frame protection (MFP) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = optional
# 2 = required
ieee80211w=2
# The most common configuration options for this based on the PMF (protected
# management frames) certification program are:
# PMF enabled: ieee80211w=1 and wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-EAP WPA-EAP-SHA256
# PMF required: ieee80211w=2 and wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-EAP-SHA256
# (and similarly for WPA-PSK and WPA-PSK-SHA256 if WPA2-Personal is used)
# WPA3-Personal-only mode: ieee80211w=2 and wpa_key_mgmt=SAE

# Group management cipher suite
# Default: AES-128-CMAC (BIP)
# Other options (depending on driver support):
# BIP-GMAC-128
# BIP-GMAC-256
# BIP-CMAC-256
# Note: All the stations connecting to the BSS will also need to support the
# selected cipher. The default AES-128-CMAC is the only option that is commonly
# available in deployed devices.
group_mgmt_cipher=AES-128-CMAC

# Beacon Protection (management frame protection for Beacon frames)
# This depends on management frame protection being enabled (ieee80211w != 0)
# and beacon protection support indication from the driver.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
beacon_prot=1

# SPP (Signaling and Payload Protected) A-MSDU.
# This depends on driver support and CCMP/GCMP cipher suite being used.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled if driver indicates support for this
#spp_amsdu=1

# Association SA Query maximum timeout (in TU = 1.024 ms; for MFP)
# (maximum time to wait for a SA Query response)
# dot11AssociationSAQueryMaximumTimeout, 1...4294967295
#assoc_sa_query_max_timeout=1000

# Association SA Query retry timeout (in TU = 1.024 ms; for MFP)
# (time between two subsequent SA Query requests)
# dot11AssociationSAQueryRetryTimeout, 1...4294967295
#assoc_sa_query_retry_timeout=201

# ocv: Operating Channel Validation
# This is a countermeasure against multi-channel on-path attacks.
# Enabling this depends on the driver's support for OCV when the driver SME is
# used. If hostapd SME is used, this will be enabled just based on this
# configuration.
# Enabling this automatically also enables ieee80211w, if not yet enabled.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
# 2 = enabled in workaround mode - Allow STA that claims OCV capability to
#     connect even if the STA doesn't send OCI or negotiate PMF. This
#     workaround is to improve interoperability with legacy STAs which are
#     wrongly copying reserved bits of RSN capabilities from the AP's
#     RSNE into (Re)Association Request frames. When this configuration is
#     enabled, the AP considers STA is OCV capable only when the STA indicates
#     MFP capability in (Re)Association Request frames and sends OCI in
#     EAPOL-Key msg 2/4/FT Reassociation Request frame/FILS (Re)Association
#     Request frame; otherwise, the AP disables OCV for the current connection
#     with the STA. Enabling this workaround mode reduced OCV protection to
#     some extend since it allows misbehavior to go through. As such, this
#     should be enabled only if interoperability with misbehaving STAs is
#     needed.
#ocv=1

# disable_pmksa_caching: Disable PMKSA caching
# This parameter can be used to disable caching of PMKSA created through EAP
# authentication. RSN preauthentication may still end up using PMKSA caching if
# it is enabled (rsn_preauth=1).
# 0 = PMKSA caching enabled (default)
# 1 = PMKSA caching disabled
#disable_pmksa_caching=0

# okc: Opportunistic Key Caching (aka Proactive Key Caching)
# Allow PMK cache to be shared opportunistically among configured interfaces
# and BSSes (i.e., all configurations within a single hostapd process).
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
okc=1

# SAE password
# This parameter can be used to set passwords for SAE. By default, the
# wpa_passphrase value is used if this separate parameter is not used, but
# wpa_passphrase follows the WPA-PSK constraints (8..63 characters) even though
# SAE passwords do not have such constraints. If the BSS enabled both SAE and
# WPA-PSK and both values are set, SAE uses the sae_password values and WPA-PSK
# uses the wpa_passphrase value.
#
# Each sae_password entry is added to a list of available passwords. This
# corresponds to the dot11RSNAConfigPasswordValueEntry. sae_password value
# starts with the password (dot11RSNAConfigPasswordCredential). That value can
# be followed by optional peer MAC address (dot11RSNAConfigPasswordPeerMac) and
# by optional password identifier (dot11RSNAConfigPasswordIdentifier). In
# addition, an optional VLAN ID specification can be used to bind the station
# to the specified VLAN whenever the specific SAE password entry is used.
#
# If the peer MAC address is not included or is set to the wildcard address
# (ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff), the entry is available for any station to use. If a
# specific peer MAC address is included, only a station with that MAC address
# is allowed to use the entry.
#
# If the password identifier (with non-zero length) is included, the entry is
# limited to be used only with that specified identifier.

# The last matching (based on peer MAC address and identifier) entry is used to
# select which password to use. Setting sae_password to an empty string has a
# special meaning of removing all previously added entries.
#
# sae_password uses the following encoding:
#<password/credential>[|mac=<peer mac>][|vlanid=<VLAN ID>]
#[|pk=<m:ECPrivateKey-base64>][|id=<identifier>]
# Examples:
#sae_password=secret
#sae_password=really secret|mac=ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
#sae_password=example secret|mac=02:03:04:05:06:07|id=pw identifier
#sae_password=example secret|vlanid=3|id=pw identifier
#
# SAE passwords can also be read from a separate file in which each line
# contains and entry in the same format as sae_password uses.
#sae_password_file=/tc/hostapd.sae_passwords

# SAE threshold for anti-clogging mechanism (dot11RSNASAEAntiCloggingThreshold)
# This parameter defines how many open SAE instances can be in progress at the
# same time before the anti-clogging mechanism is taken into use.
#sae_anti_clogging_threshold=5 (deprecated)
#anti_clogging_threshold=5

# Maximum number of SAE synchronization errors (dot11RSNASAESync)
# The offending SAE peer will be disconnected if more than this many
# synchronization errors happen.
#sae_sync=3

# Enabled SAE finite cyclic groups
# SAE implementation are required to support group 19 (ECC group defined over a
# 256-bit prime order field). This configuration parameter can be used to
# specify a set of allowed groups. If not included, only the mandatory group 19
# is enabled.
# The group values are listed in the IANA registry:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/ipsec-registry/ipsec-registry.xml#ipsec-registry-9
# Note that groups 1, 2, 5, 22, 23, and 24 should not be used in production
# purposes due limited security (see RFC 8247). Groups that are not as strong as
# group 19 (ECC, NIST P-256) are unlikely to be useful for production use cases
# since all implementations are required to support group 19.
#sae_groups=19 20 21

# Require MFP for all associations using SAE
# This parameter can be used to enforce negotiation of MFP for all associations
# that negotiate use of SAE. This is used in cases where SAE-capable devices are
# known to be MFP-capable and the BSS is configured with optional MFP
# (ieee80211w=1) for legacy support. The non-SAE stations can connect without
# MFP while SAE stations are required to negotiate MFP if sae_require_mfp=1.
#sae_require_mfp=0

# SAE Confirm behavior
# By default, AP will send out only SAE Commit message in response to a received
# SAE Commit message. This parameter can be set to 1 to override that behavior
# to send both SAE Commit and SAE Confirm messages without waiting for the STA
# to send its SAE Confirm message first.
#sae_confirm_immediate=0

# SAE mechanism for PWE derivation
# 0 = hunting-and-pecking loop only (default without password identifier)
# 1 = hash-to-element only (default with password identifier)
# 2 = both hunting-and-pecking loop and hash-to-element enabled
# Note: The default value is likely to change from 0 to 2 once the new
# hash-to-element mechanism has received more interoperability testing.
# When using SAE password identifier, the hash-to-element mechanism is used
# regardless of the sae_pwe parameter value.
#sae_pwe=0

# FILS Cache Identifier (16-bit value in hexdump format)
#fils_cache_id=0011

# FILS Realm Information
# One or more FILS realms need to be configured when FILS is enabled. This list
# of realms is used to define which realms (used in keyName-NAI by the client)
# can be used with FILS shared key authentication for ERP.
#fils_realm=example.com
#fils_realm=example.org

# FILS DH Group for PFS
# 0 = PFS disabled with FILS shared key authentication (default)
# 1-65535 DH Group to use for FILS PFS
#fils_dh_group=0

# OWE DH groups
# OWE implementations are required to support group 19 (NIST P-256). All groups
# that are supported by the implementation (e.g., groups 19, 20, and 21 when
# using OpenSSL) are enabled by default. This configuration parameter can be
# used to specify a limited set of allowed groups. The group values are listed
# in the IANA registry:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/ipsec-registry/ipsec-registry.xml#ipsec-registry-10
#owe_groups=19 20 21

# OWE PTK derivation workaround
# Initial OWE implementation used SHA256 when deriving the PTK for all OWE
# groups. This was supposed to change to SHA384 for group 20 and SHA512 for
# group 21. This parameter can be used to enable workaround for interoperability
# with stations that use SHA256 with groups 20 and 21. By default (0) only the
# appropriate hash function is accepted. When workaround is enabled (1), the
# appropriate hash function is tried first and if that fails, SHA256-based PTK
# derivation is attempted. This workaround can result in reduced security for
# groups 20 and 21, but is required for interoperability with older
# implementations. There is no impact to group 19 behavior. The workaround is
# disabled by default and can be enabled by uncommenting the following line.
#owe_ptk_workaround=1

# OWE transition mode configuration
# Pointer to the matching open/OWE BSS
#owe_transition_bssid=<bssid>
# SSID in same format as ssid2 described above.
#owe_transition_ssid=<SSID>
# Alternatively, OWE transition mode BSSID/SSID can be configured with a
# reference to a BSS operated by this hostapd process.
#owe_transition_ifname=<ifname>

# DHCP server for FILS HLP
# If configured, hostapd will act as a DHCP relay for all FILS HLP requests
# that include a DHCPDISCOVER message and send them to the specific DHCP
# server for processing. hostapd will then wait for a response from that server
# before replying with (Re)Association Response frame that encapsulates this
# DHCP response. own_ip_addr is used as the local address for the communication
# with the DHCP server.
#dhcp_server=127.0.0.1

# DHCP server UDP port
# Default: 67
#dhcp_server_port=67

# DHCP relay UDP port on the local device
# Default: 67; 0 means not to bind any specific port
#dhcp_relay_port=67

# DHCP rapid commit proxy
# If set to 1, this enables hostapd to act as a DHCP rapid commit proxy to
# allow the rapid commit options (two message DHCP exchange) to be used with a
# server that supports only the four message DHCP exchange. This is disabled by
# default (= 0) and can be enabled by setting this to 1.
#dhcp_rapid_commit_proxy=0

# Wait time for FILS HLP (dot11HLPWaitTime) in TUs
# default: 30 TUs (= 30.72 milliseconds)
#fils_hlp_wait_time=30

# FILS Discovery frame transmission minimum and maximum interval settings.
# If fils_discovery_max_interval is non-zero, the AP enables FILS Discovery
# frame transmission. These values use TUs as the unit and have allowed range
# of 0-10000. fils_discovery_min_interval defaults to 20.
# This feature is currently supported only when ieee80211ax is enabled for
# the radio and disable_11ax is not set for the BSS.
#fils_discovery_min_interval=20
#fils_discovery_max_interval=0

# Transition Disable indication
# The AP can notify authenticated stations to disable transition mode in their
# network profiles when the network has completed transition steps, i.e., once
# sufficiently large number of APs in the ESS have been updated to support the
# more secure alternative. When this indication is used, the stations are
# expected to automatically disable transition mode and less secure security
# options. This includes use of WEP, TKIP (including use of TKIP as the group
# cipher), and connections without PMF.
# Bitmap bits:
# bit 0 (0x01): WPA3-Personal (i.e., disable WPA2-Personal = WPA-PSK and only
#	allow SAE to be used)
# bit 1 (0x02): SAE-PK (disable SAE without use of SAE-PK)
# bit 2 (0x04): WPA3-Enterprise (move to requiring PMF)
# bit 3 (0x08): Enhanced Open (disable use of open network; require OWE)
# (default: 0 = do not include Transition Disable KDE)
#transition_disable=0x01

# PASN ECDH groups
# PASN implementations are required to support group 19 (NIST P-256). If this
# parameter is not set, only group 19 is supported by default. This
# configuration parameter can be used to specify a limited set of allowed
# groups. The group values are listed in the IANA registry:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/ipsec-registry/ipsec-registry.xml#ipsec-registry-10
#pasn_groups=19 20 21

# PASN comeback after time in TUs
# In case the AP is temporarily unable to handle a PASN authentication exchange
# due to a too large number of parallel operations, this value indicates to the
# peer after how many TUs it can try the PASN exchange again.
# (default: 10 TUs)
#pasn_comeback_after=10

# Unauthenticated PASN activated (dot11NoAuthPASNActivated)
# This indicates whether PASN without mutual authentication is allowed.
# (default: 1 = activated)
#pasn_noauth=1

# SSID protection in 4-way handshake
# The IEEE 802.11i-2004 RSN design did not provide means for protecting the
# SSID in the general case. IEEE P802.11REVme/D6.0 added support for this in
# 4-way handshake. This capability allows a STA to confirm that the AP has the
# same understanding on which SSID is being used for an association in a
# protected manner in cases where both the AP and the STA has this capability.
# This can be used to mitigate CVE-2023-52424 (a.k.a. the SSID Confusion
# Attack).
#
# Ideally, this capability would be enabled by default on the AP, but since this
# is new functionality with limited testing, the default is to disable this for
# now and require explicitly configuration to enable. The default behavior is
# like to change once this capability has received more testing.
#
# 0 = SSID protection in 4-way handshake disabled (default)
# 1 = SSID protection in 4-way handshake enabled
#
#ssid_protection=0

# Known STA Identification
# IEEE Std 802.11-2024 adds a mechanism that allows the SA Query procedure on
# (re)association to the previously used AP to be skipped when that AP still
# has a valid security association. This can speed up cases where a STA needs to
# reassociate back to the same AP to update some association parameters.
#
# 0 = Do not process Known STA Identification (default)
# 1 = Allow Known STA Identification to be used to skip SA Query procedure
#known_sta_identification=0

# RSNE/RSNXE override
#
# These parameters can be used to configure RSN parameters for STAs that support
# the override elements. The RSN parameters for STAs that do not support these
# mechanisms are configured in the referenced configuration parameters. The AP
# allows STAs to use either of the configured sets for negotiating RSN
# parameters.
#
# The main purpose of this mechanism is to make the AP look like it is using an
# older security mechanism (e.g., WPA2-Personal) to older STAs while allowing
# new stations use newer security mechanisms (e.g., WPA3-Personal) based on the
# override values. This might be needed to work around issues with deployed
# STAs that do not implement RSNE extensibility correctly and may fail to
# connect when the AP is using a transition mode like WPA3-Personal transition
# mode.
#
# Key management; see wpa_key_mgmt for RSNE configuration
#rsn_override_key_mgmt=<accepted key management algorithms>
#
# Pairwise cipher suites; see rsn_pairwise for RSNE configuration
#rsn_override_pairwise=<accepted cipher suites)
#
# Management frame protection (MFP/PMF); see ieee80211w for RSNE configuration
# 0 = disabled
# 1 = optional
# 2 = required
#rsn_override_mfp=<0/1/2>
#
# Second set of similar parameters. These are required to be used for
# Wi-Fi 7 (EHT/MLO) associations with RSN overriding and can optionally be used
# in cases that do not use Wi-Fi 7.
#rsn_override_key_mgmt_2
#rsn_override_pairwise_2
#rsn_override_mfp_2
#
# The RSNXE is normally included if any of the extended RSN capabilities is
# enabled/supported. When using RSN overriding, a separate RSNXOE is included
# and it may be more interoperable to omit the RSNXE completely. This
# configuration parameter can be used to do that.
# 0 = Include the RSNXE if any extended RSN capability is enabled/supported
#     (default).
# 1 = Do not include the RSNXE.
#rsn_override_omit_rsnxe=0
#
# Example configuration for WPA2-Personal/PMF-optional in RSNE and
# WPA3-Personal/PMF-required/MLO in override elements
#wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-PSK
#rsn_pairwise=CCMP
#ieee80211w=1
#rsn_override_key_mgmt=SAE
#rsn_override_pairwise=GCMP-256
#rsn_override_mfp=2
#rsn_override_key_mgmt_2=SAE-EXT-KEY
#rsn_override_pairwise_2=GCMP-256
#rsn_override_mfp_2=2
#beacon_prot=1
#sae_groups=19 20
#sae_require_mfp=1
#sae_pwe=2


##### IEEE 802.11r configuration ##############################################

# Mobility Domain identifier (dot11FTMobilityDomainID, MDID)
# MDID is used to indicate a group of APs (within an ESS, i.e., sharing the
# same SSID) between which a STA can use Fast BSS Transition.
# 2-octet identifier as a hex string.
#mobility_domain=a1b2

# PMK-R0 Key Holder identifier (dot11FTR0KeyHolderID)
# 1 to 48 octet identifier.
# This is configured with nas_identifier (see RADIUS client section above).

# Default lifetime of the PMK-R0 in seconds; range 60..4294967295
# (default: 14 days / 1209600 seconds; 0 = disable timeout)
# (dot11FTR0KeyLifetime)
#ft_r0_key_lifetime=1209600

# Maximum lifetime for PMK-R1; applied only if not zero
# PMK-R1 is removed at latest after this limit.
# Removing any PMK-R1 for expiry can be disabled by setting this to -1.
# (default: 0)
#r1_max_key_lifetime=0

# PMK-R1 Key Holder identifier (dot11FTR1KeyHolderID)
# 6-octet identifier as a hex string.
# Defaults to BSSID.
#r1_key_holder=000102030405

# Reassociation deadline in time units (TUs / 1.024 ms; range 1000..65535)
# (dot11FTReassociationDeadline)
#reassociation_deadline=1000

# List of R0KHs in the same Mobility Domain
# format: <MAC address> <NAS Identifier> <256-bit key as hex string>
# This list is used to map R0KH-ID (NAS Identifier) to a destination MAC
# address when requesting PMK-R1 key from the R0KH that the STA used during the
# Initial Mobility Domain Association.
#r0kh=02:01:02:03:04:05 r0kh-1.example.com 000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f
#r0kh=02:01:02:03:04:06 r0kh-2.example.com 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff
# And so on.. One line per R0KH.
# Wildcard entry:
# Upon receiving a response from R0KH, it will be added to this list, so
# subsequent requests won't be broadcast. If R0KH does not reply, it will be
# temporarily blocked (see rkh_neg_timeout).
#r0kh=ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff * 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff

# List of R1KHs in the same Mobility Domain
# format: <MAC address> <R1KH-ID> <256-bit key as hex string>
# This list is used to map R1KH-ID to a destination MAC address when sending
# PMK-R1 key from the R0KH. This is also the list of authorized R1KHs in the MD
# that can request PMK-R1 keys.
#r1kh=02:01:02:03:04:05 02:11:22:33:44:55 000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f
#r1kh=02:01:02:03:04:06 02:11:22:33:44:66 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff
# And so on.. One line per R1KH.
# Wildcard entry:
# Upon receiving a request from an R1KH not yet known, it will be added to this
# list and thus will receive push notifications.
#r1kh=00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff

# Optionally, the list of RxKHs can be read from a text file. Format is the same
# as specified above. File shall contain both r0kh and r1kh. Once this variable
# is set, RxKHs can be reloaded at runtime without bringing down an interface
# using the RELOAD_RXKHS command.
#rxkh_file=<path>

# Timeout (seconds) for newly discovered R0KH/R1KH (see wildcard entries above)
# Special values: 0 -> do not expire
# Warning: do not cache implies no sequence number validation with wildcards
#rkh_pos_timeout=86400 (default = 1 day)

# Timeout (milliseconds) for requesting PMK-R1 from R0KH using PULL request
# and number of retries.
#rkh_pull_timeout=1000 (default = 1 second)
#rkh_pull_retries=4 (default)

# Timeout (seconds) for non replying R0KH (see wildcard entries above)
# Special values: 0 -> do not cache
# default: 60 seconds
#rkh_neg_timeout=60

# Note: The R0KH/R1KH keys used to be 128-bit in length before the message
# format was changed. That shorter key length is still supported for backwards
# compatibility of the configuration files. If such a shorter key is used, a
# 256-bit key is derived from it. For new deployments, configuring the 256-bit
# key is recommended.

# Whether PMK-R1 push is enabled at R0KH
# 0 = do not push PMK-R1 to all configured R1KHs (default)
# 1 = push PMK-R1 to all configured R1KHs whenever a new PMK-R0 is derived
#pmk_r1_push=1

# Whether to enable FT-over-DS
# 0 = FT-over-DS disabled
# 1 = FT-over-DS enabled (default)
#ft_over_ds=1

# Whether to generate FT response locally for PSK networks
# This avoids use of PMK-R1 push/pull from other APs with FT-PSK networks as
# the required information (PSK and other session data) is already locally
# available.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#ft_psk_generate_local=0

##### Neighbor table ##########################################################
# Maximum number of entries kept in AP table (either for neighbor table or for
# detecting Overlapping Legacy BSS Condition). The oldest entry will be
# removed when adding a new entry that would make the list grow over this
# limit. Note! WFA certification for IEEE 802.11g requires that OLBC is
# enabled, so this field should not be set to 0 when using IEEE 802.11g.
# default: 255
#ap_table_max_size=255

# Number of seconds of no frames received after which entries may be deleted
# from the AP table. Since passive scanning is not usually performed frequently
# this should not be set to very small value. In addition, there is no
# guarantee that every scan cycle will receive beacon frames from the
# neighboring APs.
# default: 60
#ap_table_expiration_time=3600

# Maximum number of stations to track on the operating channel
# This can be used to detect dualband capable stations before they have
# associated, e.g., to provide guidance on which colocated BSS to use.
# Default: 0 (disabled)
#track_sta_max_num=100

# Maximum age of a station tracking entry in seconds
# Default: 180
#track_sta_max_age=180

# Do not reply to group-addressed Probe Request from a station that was seen on
# another radio.
# Default: Disabled
#
# This can be used with enabled track_sta_max_num configuration on another
# interface controlled by the same hostapd process to restrict Probe Request
# frame handling from replying to group-addressed Probe Request frames from a
# station that has been detected to be capable of operating on another band,
# e.g., to try to reduce likelihood of the station selecting a 2.4 GHz BSS when
# the AP operates both a 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz BSS concurrently.
#
# Note: Enabling this can cause connectivity issues and increase latency for
# discovering the AP.
#no_probe_resp_if_seen_on=wlan1

# Reject authentication from a station that was seen on another radio.
# Default: Disabled
#
# This can be used with enabled track_sta_max_num configuration on another
# interface controlled by the same hostapd process to reject authentication
# attempts from a station that has been detected to be capable of operating on
# another band, e.g., to try to reduce likelihood of the station selecting a
# 2.4 GHz BSS when the AP operates both a 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz BSS concurrently.
#
# Note: Enabling this can cause connectivity issues and increase latency for
# connecting with the AP.
#no_auth_if_seen_on=wlan1

##### Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) #############################################

# WPS state
# 0 = WPS disabled (default)
# 1 = WPS enabled, not configured
# 2 = WPS enabled, configured
#wps_state=2

# Whether to manage this interface independently from other WPS interfaces
# By default, a single hostapd process applies WPS operations to all configured
# interfaces. This parameter can be used to disable that behavior for a subset
# of interfaces. If this is set to non-zero for an interface, WPS commands
# issued on that interface do not apply to other interfaces and WPS operations
# performed on other interfaces do not affect this interface.
#wps_independent=0

# AP can be configured into a locked state where new WPS Registrar are not
# accepted, but previously authorized Registrars (including the internal one)
# can continue to add new Enrollees.
#ap_setup_locked=1

# Universally Unique IDentifier (UUID; see RFC 4122) of the device
# This value is used as the UUID for the internal WPS Registrar. If the AP
# is also using UPnP, this value should be set to the device's UPnP UUID.
# If not configured, UUID will be generated based on the local MAC address.
#uuid=12345678-9abc-def0-1234-56789abcdef0

# Note: If wpa_psk_file is set, WPS is used to generate random, per-device PSKs
# that will be appended to the wpa_psk_file. If wpa_psk_file is not set, the
# default PSK (wpa_psk/wpa_passphrase) will be delivered to Enrollees. Use of
# per-device PSKs is recommended as the more secure option (i.e., make sure to
# set wpa_psk_file when using WPS with WPA-PSK).

# When an Enrollee requests access to the network with PIN method, the Enrollee
# PIN will need to be entered for the Registrar. PIN request notifications are
# sent to hostapd ctrl_iface monitor. In addition, they can be written to a
# text file that could be used, e.g., to populate the AP administration UI with
# pending PIN requests. If the following variable is set, the PIN requests will
# be written to the configured file.
#wps_pin_requests=/var/run/hostapd_wps_pin_requests

# Device Name
# User-friendly description of device; up to 32 octets encoded in UTF-8
#device_name=Wireless AP

# Manufacturer
# The manufacturer of the device (up to 64 ASCII characters)
#manufacturer=Company

# Model Name
# Model of the device (up to 32 ASCII characters)
#model_name=WAP

# Model Number
# Additional device description (up to 32 ASCII characters)
#model_number=123

# Serial Number
# Serial number of the device (up to 32 characters)
#serial_number=12345

# Primary Device Type
# Used format: <categ>-<OUI>-<subcateg>
# categ = Category as an integer value
# OUI = OUI and type octet as a 4-octet hex-encoded value; 0050F204 for
#       default WPS OUI
# subcateg = OUI-specific Sub Category as an integer value
# Examples:
#   1-0050F204-1 (Computer / PC)
#   1-0050F204-2 (Computer / Server)
#   5-0050F204-1 (Storage / NAS)
#   6-0050F204-1 (Network Infrastructure / AP)
#device_type=6-0050F204-1

# OS Version
# 4-octet operating system version number (hex string)
#os_version=01020300

# Config Methods
# List of the supported configuration methods
# Available methods: usba ethernet label display ext_nfc_token int_nfc_token
#	nfc_interface push_button keypad virtual_display physical_display
#	virtual_push_button physical_push_button
#config_methods=label virtual_display virtual_push_button keypad

# WPS capability discovery workaround for PBC with Windows 7
# Windows 7 uses incorrect way of figuring out AP's WPS capabilities by acting
# as a Registrar and using M1 from the AP. The config methods attribute in that
# message is supposed to indicate only the configuration method supported by
# the AP in Enrollee role, i.e., to add an external Registrar. For that case,
# PBC shall not be used and as such, the PushButton config method is removed
# from M1 by default. If pbc_in_m1=1 is included in the configuration file,
# the PushButton config method is left in M1 (if included in config_methods
# parameter) to allow Windows 7 to use PBC instead of PIN (e.g., from a label
# in the AP).
#pbc_in_m1=1

# Static access point PIN for initial configuration and adding Registrars
# If not set, hostapd will not allow external WPS Registrars to control the
# access point. The AP PIN can also be set at runtime with hostapd_cli
# wps_ap_pin command. Use of temporary (enabled by user action) and random
# AP PIN is much more secure than configuring a static AP PIN here. As such,
# use of the ap_pin parameter is not recommended if the AP device has means for
# displaying a random PIN.
#ap_pin=12345670

# Skip building of automatic WPS credential
# This can be used to allow the automatically generated Credential attribute to
# be replaced with pre-configured Credential(s).
#skip_cred_build=1

# Additional Credential attribute(s)
# This option can be used to add pre-configured Credential attributes into M8
# message when acting as a Registrar. If skip_cred_build=1, this data will also
# be able to override the Credential attribute that would have otherwise been
# automatically generated based on network configuration. This configuration
# option points to an external file that much contain the WPS Credential
# attribute(s) as binary data.
#extra_cred=hostapd.cred

# Credential processing
#   0 = process received credentials internally (default)
#   1 = do not process received credentials; just pass them over ctrl_iface to
#	external program(s)
#   2 = process received credentials internally and pass them over ctrl_iface
#	to external program(s)
# Note: With wps_cred_processing=1, skip_cred_build should be set to 1 and
# extra_cred be used to provide the Credential data for Enrollees.
#
# wps_cred_processing=1 will disabled automatic updates of hostapd.conf file
# both for Credential processing and for marking AP Setup Locked based on
# validation failures of AP PIN. An external program is responsible on updating
# the configuration appropriately in this case.
#wps_cred_processing=0

# Whether to enable SAE (WPA3-Personal transition mode) automatically for
# WPA2-PSK credentials received using WPS.
# 0 = only add the explicitly listed WPA2-PSK configuration (default)
# 1 = add both the WPA2-PSK and SAE configuration and enable PMF so that the
#     AP gets configured in WPA3-Personal transition mode (supports both
#     WPA2-Personal (PSK) and WPA3-Personal (SAE) clients).
#wps_cred_add_sae=0

# AP Settings Attributes for M7
# By default, hostapd generates the AP Settings Attributes for M7 based on the
# current configuration. It is possible to override this by providing a file
# with pre-configured attributes. This is similar to extra_cred file format,
# but the AP Settings attributes are not encapsulated in a Credential
# attribute.
#ap_settings=hostapd.ap_settings

# Multi-AP backhaul BSS config
# Used in WPS when multi_ap=2 or 3. Defines "backhaul BSS" credentials.
# These are passed in WPS M8 instead of the normal (fronthaul) credentials
# if the Enrollee has the Multi-AP subelement set. Backhaul SSID is formatted
# like ssid2. The key is set like wpa_psk or wpa_passphrase.
#multi_ap_backhaul_ssid="backhaul"
#multi_ap_backhaul_wpa_psk=0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef
#multi_ap_backhaul_wpa_passphrase=secret passphrase

# Multi-AP Profile
# Indicate the supported Multi-AP profile (default: 2)
# 1 = Supports Multi-AP profile 1 as defined in Wi-Fi EasyMesh specification
# 2 = Supports Multi-AP profile 2 as defined in Wi-Fi EasyMesh specification
#multi_ap_profile=2

# Multi-AP client disallow
# Used to disallow profile specific backhaul STA association
# Bitmap of the disallowed Profile-X profiles
# 1 = Profile-1 Backhaul STA association disallowed
# 2 = Profile-2 Backhaul STA association disallowed
#multi_ap_client_disallow=0

# Multi-AP VLAN ID
# A valid non-zero VLAN ID will be used to update Default IEEE 802.1Q Setting
#multi_ap_vlanid=0

# WPS UPnP interface
# If set, support for external Registrars is enabled.
#upnp_iface=br0

# Friendly Name (required for UPnP)
# Short description for end use. Should be less than 64 characters.
#friendly_name=WPS Access Point

# Manufacturer URL (optional for UPnP)
#manufacturer_url=http://www.example.com/

# Model Description (recommended for UPnP)
# Long description for end user. Should be less than 128 characters.
#model_description=Wireless Access Point

# Model URL (optional for UPnP)
#model_url=http://www.example.com/model/

# Universal Product Code (optional for UPnP)
# 12-digit, all-numeric code that identifies the consumer package.
#upc=123456789012

# WPS RF Bands (a = 5G, b = 2.4G, g = 2.4G, ag = dual band, ad = 60 GHz)
# This value should be set according to RF band(s) supported by the AP if
# hw_mode is not set. For dual band dual concurrent devices, this needs to be
# set to ag to allow both RF bands to be advertized.
#wps_rf_bands=ag

# NFC password token for WPS
# These parameters can be used to configure a fixed NFC password token for the
# AP. This can be generated, e.g., with nfc_pw_token from wpa_supplicant. When
# these parameters are used, the AP is assumed to be deployed with a NFC tag
# that includes the matching NFC password token (e.g., written based on the
# NDEF record from nfc_pw_token).
#
#wps_nfc_dev_pw_id: Device Password ID (16..65535)
#wps_nfc_dh_pubkey: Hexdump of DH Public Key
#wps_nfc_dh_privkey: Hexdump of DH Private Key
#wps_nfc_dev_pw: Hexdump of Device Password

# Application Extension attribute for Beacon and Probe Response frames
# This parameter can be used to add application extension into WPS IE. The
# contents of this parameter starts with 16-octet (32 hexdump characters) of
# UUID to identify the specific application and that is followed by the actual
# application specific data.
#wps_application_ext=<hexdump>

##### Wi-Fi Direct (P2P) ######################################################

# Enable P2P Device management
#manage_p2p=1

# Allow cross connection
#allow_cross_connection=1

##### Device Provisioning Protocol (DPP) ######################################

# Name for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request
#dpp_name=Test

# MUD URL for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request (optional)
#dpp_mud_url=https://example.com/mud

# JSON node name of additional data for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request
#dpp_extra_conf_req_name=org.example

# JSON node data of additional data for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request
#dpp_extra_conf_req_value="abc":123

#dpp_connector
#dpp_netaccesskey
#dpp_netaccesskey_expiry
#dpp_csign
#dpp_controller

# DPP Relay port number
# TCP port to listen to for incoming connections from a Controller. This can be
# used to allow Controller initiated exchanges in addition to the
# Controller-as-responder cases covered by the dpp_controller parameter.
#dpp_relay_port=12345

# Configurator Connectivity indication
# 0: no Configurator is currently connected (default)
# 1: advertise that a Configurator is available
#dpp_configurator_connectivity=0

# DPP PFS
# 0: allow PFS to be used or not used (default)
# 1: require PFS to be used (note: not compatible with DPP R1)
# 2: do not allow PFS to be used
#dpp_pfs=0

#### TDLS (IEEE 802.11z-2010) #################################################

# Prohibit use of TDLS in this BSS
#tdls_prohibit=1

# Prohibit use of TDLS Channel Switching in this BSS
#tdls_prohibit_chan_switch=1

##### IEEE 802.11v-2011 #######################################################

# Time advertisement
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 2 = UTC time at which the TSF timer is 0
#time_advertisement=2

# Local time zone as specified in 8.3 of IEEE Std 1003.1-2004:
# stdoffset[dst[offset][,start[/time],end[/time]]]
#time_zone=EST5

# WNM-Sleep Mode (extended sleep mode for stations)
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled (allow stations to use WNM-Sleep Mode)
#wnm_sleep_mode=1

# WNM-Sleep Mode GTK/IGTK workaround
# Normally, WNM-Sleep Mode exit with management frame protection negotiated
# would result in the current GTK/IGTK getting added into the WNM-Sleep Mode
# Response frame. Some station implementations may have a vulnerability that
# results in GTK/IGTK reinstallation based on this frame being replayed. This
# configuration parameter can be used to disable that behavior and use EAPOL-Key
# frames for GTK/IGTK update instead. This would likely be only used with
# wpa_disable_eapol_key_retries=1 that enables a workaround for similar issues
# with EAPOL-Key. This is related to station side vulnerabilities CVE-2017-13087
# and CVE-2017-13088. To enable this AP-side workaround, set the parameter to 1.
#wnm_sleep_mode_no_keys=0

# BSS Transition Management
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#bss_transition=1

# Proxy ARP
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#proxy_arp=1

# IPv6 Neighbor Advertisement multicast-to-unicast conversion
# This can be used with Proxy ARP to allow multicast NAs to be forwarded to
# associated STAs using link layer unicast delivery.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#na_mcast_to_ucast=0

##### IEEE 802.11u-2011 #######################################################

# Enable Interworking service
#interworking=0

# Access Network Type
# 0 = Private network
# 1 = Private network with guest access
# 2 = Chargeable public network
# 3 = Free public network
# 4 = Personal device network
# 5 = Emergency services only network
# 14 = Test or experimental
# 15 = Wildcard
#access_network_type=0

# Whether the network provides connectivity to the Internet
# 0 = Unspecified
# 1 = Network provides connectivity to the Internet
#internet=1

# Additional Step Required for Access
# Note: This is only used with open network, i.e., ASRA shall ne set to 0 if
# RSN is used.
#asra=0

# Emergency services reachable
#esr=0

# Unauthenticated emergency service accessible
#uesa=0

# Venue Info (optional)
# The available values are defined in IEEE Std 802.11u-2011, 7.3.1.34.
# Example values (group,type):
# 0,0 = Unspecified
# 1,7 = Convention Center
# 1,13 = Coffee Shop
# 2,0 = Unspecified Business
# 7,1  Private Residence
#venue_group=7
#venue_type=1

# Homogeneous ESS identifier (optional; dot11HESSID)
# If set, this shall be identifical to one of the BSSIDs in the homogeneous
# ESS and this shall be set to the same value across all BSSs in homogeneous
# ESS.
#hessid=02:03:04:05:06:07

# Roaming Consortium List
# Arbitrary number of Roaming Consortium OIs can be configured with each line
# adding a new OI to the list. The first three entries are available through
# Beacon and Probe Response frames. Any additional entry will be available only
# through ANQP queries. Each OI is between 3 and 15 octets and is configured as
# a hexstring.
#roaming_consortium=021122
#roaming_consortium=2233445566

# Venue Name information
# This parameter can be used to configure one or more Venue Name Duples for
# Venue Name ANQP information. Each entry has a two or three character language
# code (ISO-639) separated by colon from the venue name string.
# Note that venue_group and venue_type have to be set for Venue Name
# information to be complete.
#venue_name=eng:Example venue
#venue_name=fin:Esimerkkipaikka
# Alternative format for language:value strings:
# (double quoted string, printf-escaped string)
#venue_name=P"eng:Example\nvenue"

# Venue URL information
# This parameter can be used to configure one or more Venue URL Duples to
# provide additional information corresponding to Venue Name information.
# Each entry has a Venue Number value separated by colon from the Venue URL
# string. Venue Number indicates the corresponding venue_name entry (1 = 1st
# venue_name, 2 = 2nd venue_name, and so on; 0 = no matching venue_name)
#venue_url=1:http://www.example.com/info-eng
#venue_url=2:http://www.example.com/info-fin

# Network Authentication Type
# This parameter indicates what type of network authentication is used in the
# network.
# format: <network auth type indicator (1-octet hex str)> [redirect URL]
# Network Authentication Type Indicator values:
# 00 = Acceptance of terms and conditions
# 01 = On-line enrollment supported
# 02 = http/https redirection
# 03 = DNS redirection
#network_auth_type=00
#network_auth_type=02http://www.example.com/redirect/me/here/

# IP Address Type Availability
# format: <1-octet encoded value as hex str>
# (ipv4_type & 0x3f) << 2 | (ipv6_type & 0x3)
# ipv4_type:
# 0 = Address type not available
# 1 = Public IPv4 address available
# 2 = Port-restricted IPv4 address available
# 3 = Single NATed private IPv4 address available
# 4 = Double NATed private IPv4 address available
# 5 = Port-restricted IPv4 address and single NATed IPv4 address available
# 6 = Port-restricted IPv4 address and double NATed IPv4 address available
# 7 = Availability of the address type is not known
# ipv6_type:
# 0 = Address type not available
# 1 = Address type available
# 2 = Availability of the address type not known
#ipaddr_type_availability=14

# Domain Name
# format: <variable-octet str>[,<variable-octet str>]
#domain_name=example.com,another.example.com,yet-another.example.com

# 3GPP Cellular Network information
# format: <MCC1,MNC1>[;<MCC2,MNC2>][;...]
#anqp_3gpp_cell_net=244,91;310,026;234,56

# NAI Realm information
# One or more realm can be advertised. Each nai_realm line adds a new realm to
# the set. These parameters provide information for stations using Interworking
# network selection to allow automatic connection to a network based on
# credentials.
# format: <encoding>,<NAI Realm(s)>[,<EAP Method 1>][,<EAP Method 2>][,...]
# encoding:
#	0 = Realm formatted in accordance with IETF RFC 4282
#	1 = UTF-8 formatted character string that is not formatted in
#	    accordance with IETF RFC 4282
# NAI Realm(s): Semi-colon delimited NAI Realm(s)
# EAP Method: <EAP Method>[:<[AuthParam1:Val1]>][<[AuthParam2:Val2]>][...]
# EAP Method types, see:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/eap-numbers/eap-numbers.xhtml#eap-numbers-4
# AuthParam (Table 8-188 in IEEE Std 802.11-2012):
# ID 2 = Non-EAP Inner Authentication Type
#	1 = PAP, 2 = CHAP, 3 = MSCHAP, 4 = MSCHAPV2
# ID 3 = Inner authentication EAP Method Type
# ID 5 = Credential Type
#	1 = SIM, 2 = USIM, 3 = NFC Secure Element, 4 = Hardware Token,
#	5 = Softoken, 6 = Certificate, 7 = username/password, 9 = Anonymous,
#	10 = Vendor Specific
#nai_realm=0,example.com;example.net
# EAP methods EAP-TLS with certificate and EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 with
# username/password
#nai_realm=0,example.org,13[5:6],21[2:4][5:7]

# Arbitrary ANQP-element configuration
# Additional ANQP-elements with arbitrary values can be defined by specifying
# their contents in raw format as a hexdump of the payload. Note that these
# values will override ANQP-element contents that may have been specified in the
# more higher layer configuration parameters listed above.
# format: anqp_elem=<InfoID>:<hexdump of payload>
# For example, AP Geospatial Location ANQP-element with unknown location:
#anqp_elem=265:0000
# For example, AP Civic Location ANQP-element with unknown location:
#anqp_elem=266:000000

# GAS Address 3 behavior
# 0 = P2P specification (Address3 = AP BSSID) workaround enabled by default
#     based on GAS request Address3
# 1 = IEEE 802.11 standard compliant regardless of GAS request Address3
# 2 = Force non-compliant behavior (Address3 = AP BSSID for all cases)
#gas_address3=0

# QoS Map Set configuration
#
# Comma delimited QoS Map Set in decimal values
# (see IEEE Std 802.11-2012, 8.4.2.97)
#
# format:
# [<DSCP Exceptions[DSCP,UP]>,]<UP 0 range[low,high]>,...<UP 7 range[low,high]>
#
# There can be up to 21 optional DSCP Exceptions which are pairs of DSCP Value
# (0..63 or 255) and User Priority (0..7). This is followed by eight DSCP Range
# descriptions with DSCP Low Value and DSCP High Value pairs (0..63 or 255) for
# each UP starting from 0. If both low and high value are set to 255, the
# corresponding UP is not used.
#
# default: not set
#qos_map_set=53,2,22,6,8,15,0,7,255,255,16,31,32,39,255,255,40,47,255,255

##### Hotspot 2.0 #############################################################

# Enable Hotspot 2.0 support
#hs20=1

# Disable Downstream Group-Addressed Forwarding (DGAF)
# This can be used to configure a network where no group-addressed frames are
# allowed. The AP will not forward any group-address frames to the stations and
# random GTKs are issued for each station to prevent associated stations from
# forging such frames to other stations in the BSS.
#disable_dgaf=1

# OSU Server-Only Authenticated L2 Encryption Network
#osen=1

# ANQP Domain ID (0..65535)
# An identifier for a set of APs in an ESS that share the same common ANQP
# information. 0 = Some of the ANQP information is unique to this AP (default).
#anqp_domain_id=1234

# Deauthentication request timeout
# If the RADIUS server indicates that the station is not allowed to connect to
# the BSS/ESS, the AP can allow the station some time to download a
# notification page (URL included in the message). This parameter sets that
# timeout in seconds. If the RADIUS server provides no URL, this value is
# reduced to two seconds with an additional trigger for immediate
# deauthentication when the STA acknowledges reception of the deauthentication
# imminent indication. Note that setting this value to 0 will prevent delivery
# of the notification to the STA, so a value of at least 1 should be used here
# for normal use cases.
#hs20_deauth_req_timeout=60

# Operator Friendly Name
# This parameter can be used to configure one or more Operator Friendly Name
# Duples. Each entry has a two or three character language code (ISO-639)
# separated by colon from the operator friendly name string.
#hs20_oper_friendly_name=eng:Example operator
#hs20_oper_friendly_name=fin:Esimerkkioperaattori

# Connection Capability
# This can be used to advertise what type of IP traffic can be sent through the
# hotspot (e.g., due to firewall allowing/blocking protocols/ports).
# format: <IP Protocol>:<Port Number>:<Status>
# IP Protocol: 1 = ICMP, 6 = TCP, 17 = UDP
# Port Number: 0..65535
# Status: 0 = Closed, 1 = Open, 2 = Unknown
# Each hs20_conn_capab line is added to the list of advertised tuples.
#hs20_conn_capab=1:0:2
#hs20_conn_capab=6:22:1
#hs20_conn_capab=17:5060:0

# WAN Metrics
# format: <WAN Info>:<DL Speed>:<UL Speed>:<DL Load>:<UL Load>:<LMD>
# WAN Info: B0-B1: Link Status, B2: Symmetric Link, B3: At Capabity
#    (encoded as two hex digits)
#    Link Status: 1 = Link up, 2 = Link down, 3 = Link in test state
# Downlink Speed: Estimate of WAN backhaul link current downlink speed in kbps;
#	1..4294967295; 0 = unknown
# Uplink Speed: Estimate of WAN backhaul link current uplink speed in kbps
#	1..4294967295; 0 = unknown
# Downlink Load: Current load of downlink WAN connection (scaled to 255 = 100%)
# Uplink Load: Current load of uplink WAN connection (scaled to 255 = 100%)
# Load Measurement Duration: Duration for measuring downlink/uplink load in
# tenths of a second (1..65535); 0 if load cannot be determined
#hs20_wan_metrics=01:8000:1000:80:240:3000

# Operating Class Indication
# List of operating classes the BSSes in this ESS use. The Global operating
# classes in Table E-4 of IEEE Std 802.11-2012 Annex E define the values that
# can be used in this.
# format: hexdump of operating class octets
# for example, operating classes 81 (2.4 GHz channels 1-13) and 115 (5 GHz
# channels 36-48):
#hs20_operating_class=5173

# Terms and Conditions information
#
# hs20_t_c_filename contains the Terms and Conditions filename that the AP
# indicates in RADIUS Access-Request messages.
#hs20_t_c_filename=terms-and-conditions
#
# hs20_t_c_timestamp contains the Terms and Conditions timestamp that the AP
# indicates in RADIUS Access-Request messages. Usually, this contains the number
# of seconds since January 1, 1970 00:00 UTC showing the time when the file was
# last modified.
#hs20_t_c_timestamp=1234567
#
# hs20_t_c_server_url contains a template for the Terms and Conditions server
# URL. This template is used to generate the URL for a STA that needs to
# acknowledge Terms and Conditions. Unlike the other hs20_t_c_* parameters, this
# parameter is used on the authentication server, not the AP.
# Macros:
# @1@ = MAC address of the STA (colon separated hex octets)
#hs20_t_c_server_url=https://example.com/t_and_c?addr=@1@&ap=123

# OSU and Operator icons
# <Icon Width>:<Icon Height>:<Language code>:<Icon Type>:<Name>:<file path>
#hs20_icon=32:32:eng:image/png:icon32:/tmp/icon32.png
#hs20_icon=64:64:eng:image/png:icon64:/tmp/icon64.png

# OSU SSID (see ssid2 for format description)
# This is the SSID used for all OSU connections to all the listed OSU Providers.
#osu_ssid="example"

# OSU Providers
# One or more sets of following parameter. Each OSU provider is started by the
# mandatory osu_server_uri item. The other parameters add information for the
# last added OSU provider. osu_nai specifies the OSU_NAI value for OSEN
# authentication when using a standalone OSU BSS. osu_nai2 specifies the OSU_NAI
# value for OSEN authentication when using a shared BSS (Single SSID) for OSU.
#
#osu_server_uri=https://example.com/osu/
#osu_friendly_name=eng:Example operator
#osu_friendly_name=fin:Esimerkkipalveluntarjoaja
#[email protected]
#[email protected]
#osu_method_list=1 0
#osu_icon=icon32
#osu_icon=icon64
#osu_service_desc=eng:Example services
#osu_service_desc=fin:Esimerkkipalveluja
#
#osu_server_uri=...

# Operator Icons
# Operator icons are specified using references to the hs20_icon entries
# (Name subfield). This information, if present, is advertsised in the
# Operator Icon Metadata ANQO-element.
#operator_icon=icon32
#operator_icon=icon64

##### Multiband Operation (MBO) ###############################################
#
# MBO enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#mbo=1
#
# Cellular data connection preference
# 0 = Excluded - AP does not want STA to use the cellular data connection
# 1 = AP prefers the STA not to use cellular data connection
# 255 = AP prefers the STA to use cellular data connection
#mbo_cell_data_conn_pref=1

##### Optimized Connectivity Experience (OCE) #################################
#
# Enable OCE specific features (bitmap)
# BIT(0) - Reserved
# Set BIT(1) (= 2) to enable OCE in STA-CFON mode
# Set BIT(2) (= 4) to enable OCE in AP mode
# Default is 0 = OCE disabled
#oce=0

# RSSI-based association rejection
#
# Reject STA association if RSSI is below given threshold (in dBm)
# Allowed range: -60 to -90 dBm; default = 0 (rejection disabled)
# Note: This rejection happens based on a signal strength detected while
# receiving a single frame and as such, there is significant risk of the value
# not being accurate and this resulting in valid stations being rejected. As
# such, this functionality is not recommended to be used for purposes other than
# testing.
#rssi_reject_assoc_rssi=-75
#
# Association retry delay in seconds allowed by the STA if RSSI has not met the
# threshold (range: 0..255, default=30).
#rssi_reject_assoc_timeout=30

# Ignore Probe Request frames if RSSI is below given threshold (in dBm)
# Allowed range: -60 to -90 dBm; default = 0 (rejection disabled)
#rssi_ignore_probe_request=-75

##### Fast Session Transfer (FST) support #####################################
#
# The options in this section are only available when the build configuration
# option CONFIG_FST is set while compiling hostapd. They allow this interface
# to be a part of FST setup.
#
# FST is the transfer of a session from a channel to another channel, in the
# same or different frequency bands.
#
# For detals, see IEEE Std 802.11ad-2012.

# Identifier of an FST Group the interface belongs to.
#fst_group_id=bond0

# Interface priority within the FST Group.
# Announcing a higher priority for an interface means declaring it more
# preferable for FST switch.
# fst_priority is in 1..255 range with 1 being the lowest priority.
#fst_priority=100

# Default LLT value for this interface in milliseconds. The value used in case
# no value provided during session setup. Default is 50 ms.
# fst_llt is in 1..4294967 range (due to spec limitation, see 10.32.2.2
# Transitioning between states).
#fst_llt=100

##### Radio measurements / location ###########################################

# The content of a LCI measurement subelement
#lci=<Hexdump of binary data of the LCI report>

# The content of a location civic measurement subelement
#civic=<Hexdump of binary data of the location civic report>

# Enable neighbor report via radio measurements
#rrm_neighbor_report=1

# Enable link measurement report via radio measurements
#rrm_link_measurement_report=1

# Enable beacon report via radio measurements
#rrm_beacon_report=1

# Publish fine timing measurement (FTM) responder functionality
# This parameter only controls publishing via Extended Capabilities element.
# Actual functionality is managed outside hostapd.
#ftm_responder=0

# Publish fine timing measurement (FTM) initiator functionality
# This parameter only controls publishing via Extended Capabilities element.
# Actual functionality is managed outside hostapd.
#ftm_initiator=0
#
# Stationary AP config indicates that the AP doesn't move hence location data
# can be considered as always up to date. If configured, LCI data will be sent
# as a radio measurement even if the request doesn't contain a max age element
# that allows sending of such data. Default: 0.
stationary_ap=1

# Enable reduced neighbor reporting (RNR)
#rnr=0

##### Airtime policy configuration ###########################################

# Set the airtime policy operating mode:
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = static config
# 2 = per-BSS dynamic config
# 3 = per-BSS limit mode
#airtime_mode=0

# Interval (in milliseconds) to poll the kernel for updated station activity in
# dynamic and limit modes
#airtime_update_interval=200

# Static configuration of station weights (when airtime_mode=1). Kernel default
# weight is 256; set higher for larger airtime share, lower for smaller share.
# Each entry is a MAC address followed by a weight.
#airtime_sta_weight=02:01:02:03:04:05 256
#airtime_sta_weight=02:01:02:03:04:06 512

# Per-BSS airtime weight. In multi-BSS mode, set for each BSS and hostapd will
# configure station weights to enforce the correct ratio between BSS weights
# depending on the number of active stations. The *ratios* between different
# BSSes is what's important, not the absolute numbers.
# Must be set for all BSSes if airtime_mode=2 or 3, has no effect otherwise.
#airtime_bss_weight=1

# Whether the current BSS should be limited (when airtime_mode=3).
#
# If set, the BSS weight ratio will be applied in the case where the current BSS
# would exceed the share defined by the BSS weight ratio. E.g., if two BSSes are
# set to the same weights, and one is set to limited, the limited BSS will get
# no more than half the available airtime, but if the non-limited BSS has more
# stations active, that *will* be allowed to exceed its half of the available
# airtime.
#airtime_bss_limit=1

##### EDMG support ############################################################
#
# Enable EDMG capability for AP mode in the 60 GHz band. Default value is false.
# To configure channel bonding for an EDMG AP use edmg_channel below.
# If enable_edmg is set and edmg_channel is not set, EDMG CB1 will be
# configured.
#enable_edmg=1
#
# Configure channel bonding for AP mode in the 60 GHz band.
# This parameter is relevant only if enable_edmg is set.
# Default value is 0 (no channel bonding).
#edmg_channel=9

##### TESTING OPTIONS #########################################################
#
# The options in this section are only available when the build configuration
# option CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS is set while compiling hostapd. They allow
# testing some scenarios that are otherwise difficult to reproduce.
#
# Ignore probe requests sent to hostapd with the given probability, must be a
# floating point number in the range [0, 1).
#ignore_probe_probability=0.0
#
# Ignore authentication frames with the given probability
#ignore_auth_probability=0.0
#
# Ignore association requests with the given probability
#ignore_assoc_probability=0.0
#
# Ignore reassociation requests with the given probability
#ignore_reassoc_probability=0.0
#
# Corrupt Key MIC in GTK rekey EAPOL-Key frames with the given probability
#corrupt_gtk_rekey_mic_probability=0.0
#
# Include only ECSA IE without CSA IE where possible
# (channel switch operating class is needed)
#ecsa_ie_only=0
#
# Include only CSA IE without ECSA IE
# (the operating class is not mentioned)
#csa_ie_only=0

# Delay EAPOL-Key messages 1/4 and 3/4 by not sending the frame until the last
# attempt (wpa_pairwise_update_count). This will trigger a timeout on all
# previous attempts and thus delays the frame. (testing only)
#delay_eapol_tx=0
#
# Additional elements for Probe Response frames.
# This parameter can be used to add additional element(s) to the end of the
# Probe Response frames. The format for these element(s) is a hexdump of the
# raw information elements (id+len+payload for one or more elements).
# These elements are added after the 'vendor_elements'.
#presp_elements=

##### Multiple BSSID support ##################################################
#
# Above configuration is using the default interface (wlan#, or multi-SSID VLAN
# interfaces). Other BSSIDs can be added by using separator 'bss' with
# default interface name to be allocated for the data packets of the new BSS.
#
# hostapd will generate BSSID mask based on the BSSIDs that are
# configured. hostapd will verify that dev_addr & MASK == dev_addr. If this is
# not the case, the MAC address of the radio must be changed before starting
# hostapd (ifconfig wlan0 hw ether <MAC addr>). If a BSSID is configured for
# every secondary BSS, this limitation is not applied at hostapd and other
# masks may be used if the driver supports them (e.g., swap the locally
# administered bit)
#
# BSSIDs are assigned in order to each BSS, unless an explicit BSSID is
# specified using the 'bssid' parameter.
# If an explicit BSSID is specified, it must be chosen such that it:
# - results in a valid MASK that covers it and the dev_addr
# - is not the same as the MAC address of the radio
# - is not the same as any other explicitly specified BSSID
#
# Alternatively, the 'use_driver_iface_addr' parameter can be used to request
# hostapd to use the driver auto-generated interface address (e.g., to use the
# exact MAC addresses allocated to the device).
#
# Not all drivers support multiple BSSes. The exact mechanism for determining
# the driver capabilities is driver specific. With the current (i.e., a recent
# kernel) drivers using nl80211, this information can be checked with "iw list"
# (search for "valid interface combinations").
#
# Please note that hostapd uses some of the values configured for the first BSS
# as the defaults for the following BSSes. However, it is recommended that all
# BSSes include explicit configuration of all relevant configuration items.
#
#bss=wlan0_0
#ssid=test2
# most of the above items can be used here (apart from radio interface specific
# items, like channel)

#bss=wlan0_1
#bssid=00:13:10:95:fe:0b
# ...
#
# Multiple BSSID Advertisement in IEEE 802.11ax
# IEEE Std 802.11ax-2021 added a feature where instead of multiple interfaces
# on a common radio transmitting individual Beacon frames, those interfaces can
# form a set with a common Beacon frame transmitted for all. The interface
# which is brought up first is called the transmitting profile of the MBSSID
# set which transmits the Beacon frames. The remaining interfaces are called
# the non-transmitting profiles and these are advertised inside the Multiple
# BSSID element in the Beacon and Probe Response frames from the first
# interface.
#
# The transmitting interface is visible to all stations in the vicinity, however
# the stations that do not support parsing of the Multiple BSSID element will
# not be able to connect to the non-transmitting interfaces.
#
# Enhanced Multiple BSSID Advertisements (EMA)
# When enabled, the non-transmitting interfaces are split into multiple
# Beacon frames. The number of Beacon frames required to cover all the
# non-transmitting profiles is called the profile periodicity.
#
# Refer to IEEE Std 802.11-2020 for details regarding the procedure and
# required MAC address assignment.
#
# Following configuration is per radio.
# 0 = Disabled (default)
# 1 = Multiple BSSID advertisement enabled.
# 2 = Enhanced multiple BSSID advertisement enabled.
#mbssid=0
#
# Maximum number of BSSs that can be added into a Multiple BSSID set
# This is a radio level parameter. If not set (or 0), the maximum is determined
# automatically based on the configured BSSs which may limit dynamic addition
# of new BSSs.
#mbssid_max=0
#
# Multiple BSSID Index override
# This is a BSS level parameter. If not set (or 0), the BSSID index is
# determined automatically based on the configured BSSs which may limit dynamic
# addition of new BSSs.
#mbssid_index=0
#
# The transmitting interface should be added with the 'interface' option while
# the non-transmitting interfaces should be added using the 'bss' option.
# Security configuration should be added separately per interface, if required.
#
# Example:
#mbssid=2
#interface=wlan2
#ctrl_interface=/var/run/hostapd
#wpa_passphrase=0123456789
#ieee80211w=2
#sae_pwe=1
#auth_algs=1
#wpa=2
#wpa_pairwise=CCMP
#ssid=<SSID-0>
#bridge=br-lan
#wpa_key_mgmt=SAE
#bssid=00:03:7f:12:84:84
#
#bss=wlan2-1
#ctrl_interface=/var/run/hostapd
#wpa_passphrase=0123456789
#ieee80211w=2
#sae_pwe=1
#auth_algs=1
#wpa=2
#wpa_pairwise=CCMP
#ssid=<SSID-1>
#bridge=br-lan
#wpa_key_mgmt=SAE
#bssid=00:03:7f:12:84:85

wifi6e_6ghz.conf

##### hostapd configuration file ##############################################
# Empty lines and lines starting with # are ignored

# AP netdevice name (without 'ap' postfix, i.e., wlan0 uses wlan0ap for
# management frames with the Host AP driver); wlan0 with many nl80211 drivers
# Note: This attribute can be overridden by the values supplied with the '-i'
# command line parameter.
interface=wlan1

# For nl80211, this parameter can be used to request the AP interface to be
# added to the bridge automatically (brctl may refuse to do this before hostapd
# has been started to change the interface mode). If needed, the bridge
# interface is also created.
bridge=br0

# Driver interface type (hostap/wired/none/nl80211/bsd);
# default: hostap). nl80211 is used with all Linux mac80211 drivers.
# Use driver=none if building hostapd as a standalone RADIUS server that does
# not control any wireless/wired driver.
driver=nl80211

# Driver interface parameters (mainly for development testing use)
# driver_params=<params>

# hostapd event logger configuration
#
# Two output method: syslog and stdout (only usable if not forking to
# background).
#
# Module bitfield (ORed bitfield of modules that will be logged; -1 = all
# modules):
# bit 0 (1) = IEEE 802.11
# bit 1 (2) = IEEE 802.1X
# bit 2 (4) = RADIUS
# bit 3 (8) = WPA
# bit 4 (16) = driver interface
# bit 6 (64) = MLME
#
# Levels (minimum value for logged events):
#  0 = verbose debugging
#  1 = debugging
#  2 = informational messages
#  3 = notification
#  4 = warning
#
logger_syslog=-1
logger_syslog_level=2
logger_stdout=-1
logger_stdout_level=2

# Interface for separate control program. If this is specified, hostapd
# will create this directory and a UNIX domain socket for listening to requests
# from external programs (CLI/GUI, etc.) for status information and
# configuration. The socket file will be named based on the interface name, so
# multiple hostapd processes/interfaces can be run at the same time if more
# than one interface is used.
# /var/run/hostapd is the recommended directory for sockets and by default,
# hostapd_cli will use it when trying to connect with hostapd.
ctrl_interface=/var/run/hostapd

# Access control for the control interface can be configured by setting the
# directory to allow only members of a group to use sockets. This way, it is
# possible to run hostapd as root (since it needs to change network
# configuration and open raw sockets) and still allow GUI/CLI components to be
# run as non-root users. However, since the control interface can be used to
# change the network configuration, this access needs to be protected in many
# cases. By default, hostapd is configured to use gid 0 (root). If you
# want to allow non-root users to use the control interface, add a new group
# and change this value to match with that group. Add users that should have
# control interface access to this group.
#
# This variable can be a group name or gid.
#ctrl_interface_group=wheel
ctrl_interface_group=0


##### IEEE 802.11 related configuration #######################################

# SSID to be used in IEEE 802.11 management frames
ssid=Maltes awesome WiFi

# UTF-8 SSID: Whether the SSID is to be interpreted using UTF-8 encoding
utf8_ssid=1

# Country code (ISO/IEC 3166-1). Used to set regulatory domain.
# Set as needed to indicate country in which device is operating.
country_code=DE

# The third octet of the Country String (dot11CountryString)
# This parameter is used to set the third octet of the country string.
#
# All environments of the current frequency band and country (default)
#country3=0x20
# Outdoor environment only
#country3=0x4f
# Indoor environment only
country3=0x49
# Noncountry entity (country_code=XX)
#country3=0x58
# IEEE 802.11 standard Annex E table indication: 0x01 .. 0x1f
# Annex E, Table E-4 (Global operating classes)
#country3=0x04

# Enable IEEE 802.11d. This advertises the country_code and the set of allowed
# channels and transmit power levels based on the regulatory limits. The
# country_code setting must be configured with the correct country for
# IEEE 802.11d functions.
# (default: 0 = disabled)
ieee80211d=1

# Enable IEEE 802.11h. This enables radar detection and DFS support if
# available. DFS support is required on outdoor 5 GHz channels in most countries
# of the world. This can be used only with ieee80211d=1.
# (default: 0 = disabled)
ieee80211h=1

# Add Power Constraint element to Beacon and Probe Response frames
# This config option adds Power Constraint element when applicable and Country
# element is added. Power Constraint element is required by Transmit Power
# Control. This can be used only with ieee80211d=1.
# Valid values are 0..255.
#local_pwr_constraint=3

# Set Spectrum Management subfield in the Capability Information field.
# This config option forces the Spectrum Management bit to be set. When this
# option is not set, the value of the Spectrum Management bit depends on whether
# DFS or TPC is required by regulatory authorities. This can be used only with
# ieee80211d=1 and local_pwr_constraint configured.
#spectrum_mgmt_required=1

# Operation mode (a = IEEE 802.11a (5 GHz), b = IEEE 802.11b (2.4 GHz),
# g = IEEE 802.11g (2.4 GHz), ad = IEEE 802.11ad (60 GHz); a/g options are used
# with IEEE 802.11n (HT), too, to specify band). For IEEE 802.11ac (VHT), this
# needs to be set to hw_mode=a. For IEEE 802.11ax (HE) on 6 GHz this needs
# to be set to hw_mode=a. When using ACS (see channel parameter), a
# special value "any" can be used to indicate that any support band can be used.
# This special case is currently supported only with drivers with which
# offloaded ACS is used.
# Default: IEEE 802.11b
hw_mode=a

# Channel number (IEEE 802.11)
# (default: 0, i.e., not set)
# Please note that some drivers do not use this value from hostapd and the
# channel will need to be configured separately with iwconfig.
#
# If CONFIG_ACS build option is enabled, the channel can be selected
# automatically at run time by setting channel=acs_survey or channel=0, both of
# which will enable the ACS survey based algorithm.
#
# See https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_WLAN_channels#6_GHz_(802.11ax_and_802.11be)
channel=45

# Global operating class (IEEE 802.11, Annex E, Table E-4)
# This option allows hostapd to specify the operating class of the channel
# configured with the channel parameter. channel and op_class together can
# uniquely identify channels across different bands, including the 6 GHz band.
# 131 signifies channel width: 20 MHz
# 132 signifies channel width: 40 MHz
# 133 signifies channel width: 80 MHz
# 134 signifies channel width: 160 MHz
op_class=134

# ACS tuning - Automatic Channel Selection
# See: https://wireless.wiki.kernel.org/en/users/documentation/acs
#
# You can customize the ACS survey algorithm with following variables:
#
# acs_num_scans requirement is 1..100 - number of scans to be performed that
# are used to trigger survey data gathering of an underlying device driver.
# Scans are passive and typically take a little over 100ms (depending on the
# driver) on each available channel for given hw_mode. Increasing this value
# means sacrificing startup time and gathering more data wrt channel
# interference that may help choosing a better channel. This can also help fine
# tune the ACS scan time in case a driver has different scan dwell times.
#
# acs_chan_bias is a space-separated list of <channel>:<bias> pairs. It can be
# used to increase (or decrease) the likelihood of a specific channel to be
# selected by the ACS algorithm. The total interference factor for each channel
# gets multiplied by the specified bias value before finding the channel with
# the lowest value. In other words, values between 0.0 and 1.0 can be used to
# make a channel more likely to be picked while values larger than 1.0 make the
# specified channel less likely to be picked. This can be used, e.g., to prefer
# the commonly used 2.4 GHz band channels 1, 6, and 11 (which is the default
# behavior on 2.4 GHz band if no acs_chan_bias parameter is specified).
#
# Defaults:
#acs_num_scans=5
#acs_chan_bias=1:0.8 6:0.8 11:0.8

# Channel list restriction. This option allows hostapd to select one of the
# provided channels when a channel should be automatically selected.
# Channel list can be provided as range using hyphen ('-') or individual
# channels can be specified by space (' ') separated values
# Default: all channels allowed in selected hw_mode
#chanlist=100 104 108 112 116
#chanlist=1 6 11-13

# Frequency list restriction. This option allows hostapd to select one of the
# provided frequencies when a frequency should be automatically selected.
# Frequency list can be provided as range using hyphen ('-') or individual
# frequencies can be specified by comma (',') separated values
# Default: all frequencies allowed in selected hw_mode
#freqlist=2437,5955,5975
#freqlist=2437,5985-6105

# Exclude DFS channels from ACS
# This option can be used to exclude all DFS channels from the ACS channel list
# in cases where the driver supports DFS channels.
#acs_exclude_dfs=1

# Include only preferred scan channels from 6 GHz band for ACS
# This option can be used to include only preferred scan channels in the 6 GHz
# band. This can be useful in particular for devices that operate only a 6 GHz
# BSS without a collocated 2.4/5 GHz BSS.
# Default behavior is to include all PSC and non-PSC channels.
#acs_exclude_6ghz_non_psc=1

# Enable background radar feature
# This feature allows CAC to be run on dedicated radio RF chains while the
# radio(s) are otherwise running normal AP activities on other channels.
# This requires that the driver and the radio support it before feature will
# actually be enabled, i.e., this parameter value is ignored with drivers that
# do not advertise support for the capability.
# 0: Leave disabled (default)
# 1: Enable it.
#enable_background_radar=1

# Set minimum permitted max TX power (in dBm) for ACS and DFS channel selection.
# (default 0, i.e., not constraint)
min_tx_power=50

# Beacon interval in kus (1.024 ms) (default: 100; range 15..65535)
beacon_int=100

# DTIM (delivery traffic information message) period (range 1..255):
# number of beacons between DTIMs (1 = every beacon includes DTIM element)
# (default: 2)
dtim_period=2

# Maximum number of stations allowed in station table. New stations will be
# rejected after the station table is full. IEEE 802.11 has a limit of 2007
# different association IDs, so this number should not be larger than that.
# (default: 2007, docs: 255)
max_num_sta=16

# RTS/CTS threshold; -1 = disabled (default); range -1..65535
# If this field is not included in hostapd.conf, hostapd will not control
# RTS threshold and 'iwconfig wlan# rts <val>' can be used to set it.
rts_threshold=-1

# Fragmentation threshold; -1 = disabled (default); range -1, 256..2346
# If this field is not included in hostapd.conf, hostapd will not control
# fragmentation threshold and 'iwconfig wlan# frag <val>' can be used to set
# it.
fragm_threshold=-1

# Rate configuration
# Default is to enable all rates supported by the hardware. This configuration
# item allows this list be filtered so that only the listed rates will be left
# in the list. If the list is empty, all rates are used. This list can have
# entries that are not in the list of rates the hardware supports (such entries
# are ignored). The entries in this list are in 100 kbps, i.e., 11 Mbps = 110.
# If this item is present, at least one rate have to be matching with the rates
# hardware supports.
# default: use the most common supported rate setting for the selected
# hw_mode (i.e., this line can be removed from configuration file in most
# cases)
#supported_rates=10 20 55 110 60 90 120 180 240 360 480 540

# Basic rate set configuration
# List of rates (in 100 kbps) that are included in the basic rate set.
# If this item is not included, usually reasonable default set is used.
#basic_rates=10 20
#basic_rates=10 20 55 110
#basic_rates=60 120 240

# Beacon frame TX rate configuration
# This sets the TX rate that is used to transmit Beacon frames. If this item is
# not included, the driver default rate (likely lowest rate) is used.
# Legacy (CCK/OFDM rates):
#    beacon_rate=<legacy rate in 100 kbps>
# HT:
#    beacon_rate=ht:<HT MCS>
# VHT:
#    beacon_rate=vht:<VHT MCS>
# HE:
#    beacon_rate=he:<HE MCS>
#
# For example, beacon_rate=10 for 1 Mbps or beacon_rate=60 for 6 Mbps (OFDM).
#beacon_rate=10

# Short Preamble
# This parameter can be used to enable optional use of short preamble for
# frames sent at 2 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, and 11 Mbps to improve network performance.
# This applies only to IEEE 802.11b-compatible networks and this should only be
# enabled if the local hardware supports use of short preamble. If any of the
# associated STAs do not support short preamble, use of short preamble will be
# disabled (and enabled when such STAs disassociate) dynamically.
# 0 = do not allow use of short preamble (default)
# 1 = allow use of short preamble
preamble=1

# Station MAC address -based authentication
# Please note that this kind of access control requires a driver that uses
# hostapd to take care of management frame processing and as such, this can be
# used with driver=hostap or driver=nl80211, but not with driver=atheros.
# 0 = accept unless in deny list
# 1 = deny unless in accept list
# 2 = use external RADIUS server (accept/deny lists are searched first)
macaddr_acl=0

# Accept/deny lists are read from separate files (containing list of
# MAC addresses, one per line). Use absolute path name to make sure that the
# files can be read on SIGHUP configuration reloads.
#accept_mac_file=/etc/hostapd.accept
#deny_mac_file=/etc/hostapd.deny

# IEEE 802.11 specifies two authentication algorithms. hostapd can be
# configured to allow both of these or only one. Open system authentication
# should be used with IEEE 802.1X.
# Bit fields of allowed authentication algorithms:
# bit 0 = Open System Authentication
# bit 1 = Shared Key Authentication (requires WEP)
# 3 = both are allowed
auth_algs=1

# Send empty SSID in beacons and ignore probe request frames that do not
# specify full SSID, i.e., require stations to know SSID.
# default: disabled (0)
# 1 = send empty (length=0) SSID in beacon and ignore probe request for
#     broadcast SSID
# 2 = clear SSID (ASCII 0), but keep the original length (this may be required
#     with some clients that do not support empty SSID) and ignore probe
#     requests for broadcast SSID
ignore_broadcast_ssid=0

# Do not reply to broadcast Probe Request frames from unassociated STA if there
# is no room for additional stations (max_num_sta). This can be used to
# discourage a STA from trying to associate with this AP if the association
# would be rejected due to maximum STA limit.
# Default: 0 (disabled)
#no_probe_resp_if_max_sta=0

# Additional vendor specific elements for Beacon and Probe Response frames
# This parameter can be used to add additional vendor specific element(s) into
# the end of the Beacon and Probe Response frames. The format for these
# element(s) is a hexdump of the raw information elements (id+len+payload for
# one or more elements)
#vendor_elements=dd0411223301

# Additional vendor specific elements for (Re)Association Response frames
# This parameter can be used to add additional vendor specific element(s) into
# the end of the (Re)Association Response frames. The format for these
# element(s) is a hexdump of the raw information elements (id+len+payload for
# one or more elements)
#assocresp_elements=dd0411223301

# TX queue parameters (EDCF / bursting)
# tx_queue_<queue name>_<param>
# queues: data0, data1, data2, data3
#		(data0 is the highest priority queue)
# parameters:
#   aifs: AIFS (default 2)
#   cwmin: cwMin (1, 3, 7, 15, 31, 63, 127, 255, 511, 1023, 2047, 4095, 8191,
#	   16383, 32767)
#   cwmax: cwMax (same values as cwMin, cwMax >= cwMin)
#   burst: maximum length (in milliseconds with precision of up to 0.1 ms) for
#          bursting
#
# Default WMM parameters (IEEE 802.11 draft; 11-03-0504-03-000e):
# These parameters are used by the access point when transmitting frames
# to the clients.
#
# Low priority / AC_BK = background
#tx_queue_data3_aifs=7
#tx_queue_data3_cwmin=15
#tx_queue_data3_cwmax=1023
#tx_queue_data3_burst=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=31 cWmax=1023 burst=0
#
# Normal priority / AC_BE = best effort
#tx_queue_data2_aifs=3
#tx_queue_data2_cwmin=15
#tx_queue_data2_cwmax=63
tx_queue_data2_burst=2.0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=31 cWmax=127 burst=0
#
# High priority / AC_VI = video
#tx_queue_data1_aifs=1
#tx_queue_data1_cwmin=7
#tx_queue_data1_cwmax=15
#tx_queue_data1_burst=3.0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=15 cWmax=31 burst=6.0
#
# Highest priority / AC_VO = voice
#tx_queue_data0_aifs=1
#tx_queue_data0_cwmin=3
#tx_queue_data0_cwmax=7
#tx_queue_data0_burst=1.5
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=7 cWmax=15 burst=3.3

# 802.1D Tag (= UP) to AC mappings
# WMM specifies following mapping of data frames to different ACs. This mapping
# can be configured using Linux QoS/tc and sch_pktpri.o module.
# 802.1D Tag	802.1D Designation	Access Category	WMM Designation
# 1		BK			AC_BK		Background
# 2		-			AC_BK		Background
# 0		BE			AC_BE		Best Effort
# 3		EE			AC_BE		Best Effort
# 4		CL			AC_VI		Video
# 5		VI			AC_VI		Video
# 6		VO			AC_VO		Voice
# 7		NC			AC_VO		Voice
# Data frames with no priority information: AC_BE
# Management frames: AC_VO
# PS-Poll frames: AC_BE

# Wireless Multimedia Extensions (WME)
wme_enabled=1

# Default WMM parameters (IEEE 802.11 draft; 11-03-0504-03-000e):
# for 802.11a or 802.11g networks
# These parameters are sent to WMM clients when they associate.
# The parameters will be used by WMM clients for frames transmitted to the
# access point.
#
# note - txop_limit is in units of 32microseconds
# note - acm is admission control mandatory flag. 0 = admission control not
# required, 1 = mandatory
# note - Here cwMin and cmMax are in exponent form. The actual cw value used
# will be (2^n)-1 where n is the value given here. The allowed range for these
# wmm_ac_??_{cwmin,cwmax} is 0..15 with cwmax >= cwmin.
#
wmm_enabled=1
#
# WMM-PS Unscheduled Automatic Power Save Delivery [U-APSD]
# Enable this flag if U-APSD supported outside hostapd (eg., Firmware/driver)
uapsd_advertisement_enabled=1
#
# Low priority / AC_BK = background
wmm_ac_bk_cwmin=4
wmm_ac_bk_cwmax=10
wmm_ac_bk_aifs=7
wmm_ac_bk_txop_limit=0
wmm_ac_bk_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=5 cWmax=10
#
# Normal priority / AC_BE = best effort
wmm_ac_be_aifs=3
wmm_ac_be_cwmin=4
wmm_ac_be_cwmax=10
wmm_ac_be_txop_limit=0
wmm_ac_be_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=5 cWmax=7
#
# High priority / AC_VI = video
wmm_ac_vi_aifs=2
wmm_ac_vi_cwmin=3
wmm_ac_vi_cwmax=4
wmm_ac_vi_txop_limit=94
wmm_ac_vi_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=4 cWmax=5 txop_limit=188
#
# Highest priority / AC_VO = voice
wmm_ac_vo_aifs=2
wmm_ac_vo_cwmin=2
wmm_ac_vo_cwmax=3
wmm_ac_vo_txop_limit=47
wmm_ac_vo_acm=0
# Note: for IEEE 802.11b mode: cWmin=3 cWmax=4 burst=102

# Enable Multi-AP functionality
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = AP support backhaul BSS
# 2 = AP support fronthaul BSS
# 3 = AP supports both backhaul BSS and fronthaul BSS
multi_ap=0

# Static WEP key configuration
#
# The key number to use when transmitting.
# It must be between 0 and 3, and the corresponding key must be set.
# default: not set
#wep_default_key=0
# The WEP keys to use.
# A key may be a quoted string or unquoted hexadecimal digits.
# The key length should be 5, 13, or 16 characters, or 10, 26, or 32
# digits, depending on whether 40-bit (64-bit), 104-bit (128-bit), or
# 128-bit (152-bit) WEP is used.
# Only the default key must be supplied; the others are optional.
# default: not set
#wep_key0=123456789a
#wep_key1="vwxyz"
#wep_key2=0102030405060708090a0b0c0d
#wep_key3=".2.4.6.8.0.23"

# Station inactivity limit
#
# If a station does not send anything in ap_max_inactivity seconds, an
# empty data frame is sent to it in order to verify whether it is
# still in range. If this frame is not ACKed, the station will be
# disassociated and then deauthenticated. This feature is used to
# clear station table of old entries when the STAs move out of the
# range.
#
# The station can associate again with the AP if it is still in range;
# this inactivity poll is just used as a nicer way of verifying
# inactivity; i.e., client will not report broken connection because
# disassociation frame is not sent immediately without first polling
# the STA with a data frame.
# default: 300 (i.e., 5 minutes)
#ap_max_inactivity=300
#
# The inactivity polling can be disabled to disconnect stations based on
# inactivity timeout so that idle stations are more likely to be disconnected
# even if they are still in range of the AP. This can be done by setting
# skip_inactivity_poll to 1 (default 0).
skip_inactivity_poll=0
#
# BSS max idle period management
# 0 = disabled (do not advertise and manage BSS max idle period)
# 1 = enabled (advertise and manage BSS max idle period; default)
# 2 = enabled requiring protected frames (advertise and manage BSS max idle
#     period and require STAs to use protected keep-alive frames)
#bss_max_idle=1
#
# Maximum acceptable BSS maximum idle period
# If this is set to a nonzero value, the AP allows STAs to request different
# maximum idle period values. This is in the units to 1000 TUs (1.024 s)
#max_acceptable_idle_period=600
#
# Allow STA to skip group key handshake without getting disconnection when
# BSS max idle period management is enabled.
# 0 = disconnect STA if it does not reply to group key handshake (default)
# 1 = do not disconnect STA if it does not reply to group key handshake and
#     if BSS max idle period management is enabled
#no_disconnect_on_group_keyerror=0

# Disassociate stations based on excessive transmission failures or other
# indications of connection loss. This depends on the driver capabilities and
# may not be available with all drivers.
disassoc_low_ack=0

# Maximum allowed Listen Interval (how many Beacon periods STAs are allowed to
# remain asleep). Default: 65535 (no limit apart from field size)
#max_listen_interval=100

# WDS (4-address frame) mode with per-station virtual interfaces
# (only supported with driver=nl80211)
# This mode allows associated stations to use 4-address frames to allow layer 2
# bridging to be used.
wds_sta=1

# If bridge parameter is set, the WDS STA interface will be added to the same
# bridge by default. This can be overridden with the wds_bridge parameter to
# use a separate bridge.
#wds_bridge=wds-br0

# Start the AP with beaconing disabled by default.
#start_disabled=0

# Client isolation can be used to prevent low-level bridging of frames between
# associated stations in the BSS. By default, this bridging is allowed.
#ap_isolate=1

# BSS Load update period (in BUs)
# This field is used to enable and configure adding a BSS Load element into
# Beacon and Probe Response frames.
bss_load_update_period=60

# Channel utilization averaging period (in BUs)
# This field is used to enable and configure channel utilization average
# calculation with bss_load_update_period. This should be in multiples of
# bss_load_update_period for more accurate calculation.
chan_util_avg_period=600

# Fixed BSS Load value for testing purposes
# This field can be used to configure hostapd to add a fixed BSS Load element
# into Beacon and Probe Response frames for testing purposes. The format is
# <station count>:<channel utilization>:<available admission capacity>
#bss_load_test=12:80:20000

# Multicast to unicast conversion
# Request that the AP will do multicast-to-unicast conversion for ARP, IPv4, and
# IPv6 frames (possibly within 802.1Q). If enabled, such frames are to be sent
# to each station separately, with the DA replaced by their own MAC address
# rather than the group address.
#
# Note that this may break certain expectations of the receiver, such as the
# ability to drop unicast IP packets received within multicast L2 frames, or the
# ability to not send ICMP destination unreachable messages for packets received
# in L2 multicast (which is required, but the receiver can't tell the difference
# if this new option is enabled).
#
# This also doesn't implement the 802.11 DMS (directed multicast service).
#
#multicast_to_unicast=0

# Send broadcast Deauthentication frame on AP start/stop
# Default: 1 (enabled)
#broadcast_deauth=1

# Get notifications for received Management frames on control interface
# Default: 0 (disabled)
#notify_mgmt_frames=0

##### IEEE 802.11n related configuration ######################################

# ieee80211n: Whether IEEE 802.11n (HT) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
# Note: You will also need to enable WMM for full HT functionality.
# Note: hw_mode=g (2.4 GHz) and hw_mode=a (5 GHz) is used to specify the band.
ieee80211n=1

# disable_11n: Boolean (0/1) to disable HT for a specific BSS
#disable_11n=0

# ht_capab: HT capabilities (list of flags)
# LDPC coding capability: [LDPC] = supported
# Supported channel width set: [HT40-] = both 20 MHz and 40 MHz with secondary
#	channel below the primary channel; [HT40+] = both 20 MHz and 40 MHz
#	with secondary channel above the primary channel
#	(20 MHz only if neither is set)
#	Note: There are limits on which channels can be used with HT40- and
#	HT40+. Following table shows the channels that may be available for
#	HT40- and HT40+ use per IEEE 802.11n Annex J:
#	freq		HT40-		HT40+
#	2.4 GHz		5-13		1-7 (1-9 in Europe/Japan)
#	5 GHz		40,48,56,64	36,44,52,60
#	(depending on the location, not all of these channels may be available
#	for use)
#	Please note that 40 MHz channels may switch their primary and secondary
#	channels if needed or creation of 40 MHz channel maybe rejected based
#	on overlapping BSSes. These changes are done automatically when hostapd
#	is setting up the 40 MHz channel.
# HT-greenfield: [GF] (disabled if not set)
# Short GI for 20 MHz: [SHORT-GI-20] (disabled if not set)
# Short GI for 40 MHz: [SHORT-GI-40] (disabled if not set)
# Tx STBC: [TX-STBC] (disabled if not set)
# Rx STBC: [RX-STBC1] (one spatial stream), [RX-STBC12] (one or two spatial
#	streams), or [RX-STBC123] (one, two, or three spatial streams); Rx STBC
#	disabled if none of these set
# HT-delayed Block Ack: [DELAYED-BA] (disabled if not set)
# Maximum A-MSDU length: [MAX-AMSDU-7935] for 7935 octets (3839 octets if not
#	set)
# DSSS/CCK Mode in 40 MHz: [DSSS_CCK-40] = allowed (not allowed if not set)
# 40 MHz intolerant [40-INTOLERANT] (not advertised if not set)
# L-SIG TXOP protection support: [LSIG-TXOP-PROT] (disabled if not set)
ht_capab=[HT40+][SHORTGI-20][SHORTGI-40][LDPC]

# Require stations to support HT PHY (reject association if they do not)
#require_ht=1

# If set non-zero, require stations to perform scans of overlapping
# channels to test for stations which would be affected by 40 MHz traffic.
# This parameter sets the interval in seconds between these scans. Setting this
# to non-zero allows 2.4 GHz band AP to move dynamically to a 40 MHz channel if
# no co-existence issues with neighboring devices are found.
#obss_interval=0

# ht_vht_twt_responder: Whether TWT responder is enabled in HT and VHT modes
# 0 = disable; Disable TWT responder support in  HT and VHT modes (default).
# 1 = enable; Enable TWT responder support in HT and VHT modes if supported by
# the driver.
#ht_vht_twt_responder=0

##### IEEE 802.11ac related configuration #####################################

# ieee80211ac: Whether IEEE 802.11ac (VHT) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
# Note: You will also need to enable WMM for full VHT functionality.
# Note: hw_mode=a is used to specify that 5 GHz band is used with VHT.
ieee80211ac=1

# disable_11ac: Boolean (0/1) to disable VHT for a specific BSS
#disable_11ac=0

# vht_capab: VHT capabilities (list of flags)
#
# vht_max_mpdu_len: [MAX-MPDU-7991] [MAX-MPDU-11454]
# Indicates maximum MPDU length
# 0 = 3895 octets (default)
# 1 = 7991 octets
# 2 = 11454 octets
# 3 = reserved
#
# supported_chan_width: [VHT160] [VHT160-80PLUS80]
# Indicates supported Channel widths
# 0 = 160 MHz & 80+80 channel widths are not supported (default)
# 1 = 160 MHz channel width is supported
# 2 = 160 MHz & 80+80 channel widths are supported
# 3 = reserved
#
# Rx LDPC coding capability: [RXLDPC]
# Indicates support for receiving LDPC coded pkts
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Short GI for 80 MHz: [SHORT-GI-80]
# Indicates short GI support for reception of packets transmitted with TXVECTOR
# params format equal to VHT and CBW = 80Mhz
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Short GI for 160 MHz: [SHORT-GI-160]
# Indicates short GI support for reception of packets transmitted with TXVECTOR
# params format equal to VHT and CBW = 160Mhz
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Tx STBC: [TX-STBC-2BY1]
# Indicates support for the transmission of at least 2x1 STBC
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Rx STBC: [RX-STBC-1] [RX-STBC-12] [RX-STBC-123] [RX-STBC-1234]
# Indicates support for the reception of PPDUs using STBC
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = support of one spatial stream
# 2 = support of one and two spatial streams
# 3 = support of one, two and three spatial streams
# 4 = support of one, two, three and four spatial streams
# 5,6,7 = reserved
#
# SU Beamformer Capable: [SU-BEAMFORMER]
# Indicates support for operation as a single user beamformer
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# SU Beamformee Capable: [SU-BEAMFORMEE]
# Indicates support for operation as a single user beamformee
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# Compressed Steering Number of Beamformer Antennas Supported:
# [BF-ANTENNA-2] [BF-ANTENNA-3] [BF-ANTENNA-4]
#   Beamformee's capability indicating the maximum number of beamformer
#   antennas the beamformee can support when sending compressed beamforming
#   feedback
# If SU beamformer capable, set to maximum value minus 1
# else reserved (default)
#
# Number of Sounding Dimensions:
# [SOUNDING-DIMENSION-2] [SOUNDING-DIMENSION-3] [SOUNDING-DIMENSION-4]
# Beamformer's capability indicating the maximum value of the NUM_STS parameter
# in the TXVECTOR of a VHT NDP
# If SU beamformer capable, set to maximum value minus 1
# else reserved (default)
#
# MU Beamformer Capable: [MU-BEAMFORMER]
# Indicates support for operation as an MU beamformer
# 0 = Not supported or sent by Non-AP STA (default)
# 1 = Supported
#
# VHT TXOP PS: [VHT-TXOP-PS]
# Indicates whether or not the AP supports VHT TXOP Power Save Mode
#  or whether or not the STA is in VHT TXOP Power Save mode
# 0 = VHT AP doesn't support VHT TXOP PS mode (OR) VHT STA not in VHT TXOP PS
#  mode
# 1 = VHT AP supports VHT TXOP PS mode (OR) VHT STA is in VHT TXOP power save
#  mode
#
# +HTC-VHT Capable: [HTC-VHT]
# Indicates whether or not the STA supports receiving a VHT variant HT Control
# field.
# 0 = Not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#
# Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent: [MAX-A-MPDU-LEN-EXP0]..[MAX-A-MPDU-LEN-EXP7]
# Indicates the maximum length of A-MPDU pre-EOF padding that the STA can recv
# This field is an integer in the range of 0 to 7.
# The length defined by this field is equal to
# 2 pow(13 + Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent) -1 octets
#
# VHT Link Adaptation Capable: [VHT-LINK-ADAPT2] [VHT-LINK-ADAPT3]
# Indicates whether or not the STA supports link adaptation using VHT variant
# HT Control field
# If +HTC-VHTcapable is 1
#  0 = (no feedback) if the STA does not provide VHT MFB (default)
#  1 = reserved
#  2 = (Unsolicited) if the STA provides only unsolicited VHT MFB
#  3 = (Both) if the STA can provide VHT MFB in response to VHT MRQ and if the
#      STA provides unsolicited VHT MFB
# Reserved if +HTC-VHTcapable is 0
#
# Rx Antenna Pattern Consistency: [RX-ANTENNA-PATTERN]
# Indicates the possibility of Rx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Rx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Rx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
#
# Tx Antenna Pattern Consistency: [TX-ANTENNA-PATTERN]
# Indicates the possibility of Tx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Tx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Tx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
vht_capab=[VHT160][TXSTBC][RXSTBC1][SHORTGI-80][SHORTGI-160][1024-QAM][MU-BEAMFORMEE][MU-BEAMFORMER][SU-BEAMFORMEE][SU-BEAMFORMER]
#
# Require stations to support VHT PHY (reject association if they do not)
#require_vht=1

# 0 = 20 or 40 MHz operating Channel width
# 1 = 80 MHz channel width
# 2 = 160 MHz channel width
# 3 = 80+80 MHz channel width
vht_oper_chwidth=2
#
# center freq = 5 GHz + (5 * index)
# So index 42 gives center freq 5.210 GHz
# which is channel 42 in 5G band
#
#vht_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx=42
#
# center freq = 5 GHz + (5 * index)
# So index 159 gives center freq 5.795 GHz
# which is channel 159 in 5G band
#
#vht_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx=159

# Workaround to use station's nsts capability in (Re)Association Response frame
# This may be needed with some deployed devices as an interoperability
# workaround for beamforming if the AP's capability is greater than the
# station's capability. This is disabled by default and can be enabled by
# setting use_sta_nsts=1.
#use_sta_nsts=0

##### IEEE 802.11ax related configuration #####################################

#ieee80211ax: Whether IEEE 802.11ax (HE) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
ieee80211ax=1

# Require stations to support HE PHY (reject association if they do not)
#require_he=1

# disable_11ax: Boolean (0/1) to disable HE for a specific BSS
#disable_11ax=0

#he_su_beamformer: HE single user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
he_su_beamformer=1

#he_su_beamformee: HE single user beamformee support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
he_su_beamformee=1

#he_mu_beamformer: HE multiple user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
he_mu_beamformer=1

# he_bss_color: BSS color (1-63)
# used by clients to discern the source of interference
# each AP in your area needs to use a different number
he_bss_color=47

# he_bss_color_partial: BSS color AID equation
#he_bss_color_partial=0

#he_default_pe_duration: The duration of PE field in an HE PPDU in us
# Possible values are 0 us (default), 4 us, 8 us, 12 us, and 16 us
#he_default_pe_duration=0

#he_twt_required: Whether TWT is required
# 0 = not required (default)
# 1 = required
#he_twt_required=0

#he_twt_responder: Whether TWT (HE) responder is enabled
# 0 = disabled
# 1 = enabled if supported by the driver (default)
#he_twt_responder=1

#he_rts_threshold: Duration of STA transmission
# 0 = not set (default)
# unsigned integer = duration in units of 16 us
#he_rts_threshold=0

#he_er_su_disable: Disable 242-tone HE ER SU PPDU reception by the AP
# 0 = enable reception (default)
# 1 = disable reception
#he_er_su_disable=0

# HE operating channel information; see matching vht_* parameters for details.
# he_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx field is used to indicate center frequency of 80
# and 160 MHz bandwidth operation. In 80+80 MHz operation, it is the center
# frequency of the lower frequency segment. he_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx field
# is used only with 80+80 MHz bandwidth operation and it is used to transmit
# the center frequency of the second segment.
# On the 6 GHz band the center freq calculation starts from 5.950 GHz offset.
# For example idx=3 would result in 5965 MHz center frequency. In addition,
# he_oper_chwidth is ignored, and the channel width is derived from the
# configured operating class or center frequency indexes (see
# IEEE P802.11ax/D6.1 Annex E, Table E-4).
# Channel width (0 = 40 MHz. 1 = 80 Mhz)
he_oper_chwidth=1
he_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx=47
#he_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx

#he_basic_mcs_nss_set: Basic NSS/MCS set
# 16-bit combination of 2-bit values of Max HE-MCS For 1..8 SS; each 2-bit
# value having following meaning:
# 0 = HE-MCS 0-7, 1 = HE-MCS 0-9, 2 = HE-MCS 0-11, 3 = not supported
he_basic_mcs_nss_set=0x2222

#he_mu_edca_qos_info_param_count
#he_mu_edca_qos_info_q_ack
#he_mu_edca_qos_info_queue_request=1
#he_mu_edca_qos_info_txop_request
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_be_timer=255
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_aci=1
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_bk_timer=255
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_aci=2
#he_mu_edca_ac_vi_timer=255
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_aifsn=0
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_aci=3
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_ecwmin=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_ecwmax=15
#he_mu_edca_ac_vo_timer=255

# Spatial Reuse Parameter Set
#
# SR Control field value
# B0 = PSR Disallowed
# B1 = Non-SRG OBSS PD SR Disallowed
# B2 = Non-SRG Offset Present
# B3 = SRG Information Present
# B4 = HESIGA_Spatial_reuse_value15_allowed
#he_spr_sr_control
#
# Non-SRG OBSS PD Max Offset (included if he_spr_sr_control B2=1)
#he_spr_non_srg_obss_pd_max_offset

# SRG OBSS PD Min Offset (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
#he_spr_srg_obss_pd_min_offset
#
# SRG OBSS PD Max Offset (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
#he_spr_srg_obss_pd_max_offset
#
# SPR SRG BSS Color (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
# This config represents SRG BSS Color Bitmap field of Spatial Reuse Parameter
# Set element that indicates the BSS color values used by members of the
# SRG of which the transmitting STA is a member. The value is in range of 0-63.
#he_spr_srg_bss_colors=1 2 10 63
#
# SPR SRG Partial BSSID (included if he_spr_sr_control B3=1)
# This config represents SRG Partial BSSID Bitmap field of Spatial Reuse
# Parameter Set element that indicates the Partial BSSID values used by members
# of the SRG of which the transmitting STA is a member. The value range
# corresponds to one of the 64 possible values of BSSID[39:44], where the lowest
# numbered bit corresponds to Partial BSSID value 0 and the highest numbered bit
# corresponds to Partial BSSID value 63.
#he_spr_srg_partial_bssid=0 1 3 63
#
#he_6ghz_max_mpdu: Maximum MPDU Length of HE 6 GHz band capabilities.
# Indicates maximum MPDU length
# 0 = 3895 octets
# 1 = 7991 octets
# 2 = 11454 octets (default)
#he_6ghz_max_mpdu=2
#
#he_6ghz_max_ampdu_len_exp: Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent of HE 6 GHz band
# capabilities. Indicates the maximum length of A-MPDU pre-EOF padding that
# the STA can receive. This field is an integer in the range of 0 to 7.
# The length defined by this field is equal to
# 2 pow(13 + Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent) -1 octets
# 0 = AMPDU length of 8k
# 1 = AMPDU length of 16k
# 2 = AMPDU length of 32k
# 3 = AMPDU length of 65k
# 4 = AMPDU length of 131k
# 5 = AMPDU length of 262k
# 6 = AMPDU length of 524k
# 7 = AMPDU length of 1048k (default)
#he_6ghz_max_ampdu_len_exp=7
#
#he_6ghz_rx_ant_pat: Rx Antenna Pattern Consistency of HE 6 GHz capability.
# Indicates the possibility of Rx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Rx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Rx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
#     (default)
he_6ghz_rx_ant_pat=1
#
#he_6ghz_tx_ant_pat: Tx Antenna Pattern Consistency of HE 6 GHz capability.
# Indicates the possibility of Tx antenna pattern change
# 0 = Tx antenna pattern might change during the lifetime of an association
# 1 = Tx antenna pattern does not change during the lifetime of an association
#     (default)
he_6ghz_tx_ant_pat=1

# 6 GHz Access Point type
# This config is to set the 6 GHz Access Point type. Possible options are:
# 0 = Indoor AP
# 1 = Standard power AP
# 2 = Very low power AP (default)
# 3 = Indoor enabled AP
# 4 = Indoor standard power AP
# This has no impact for operation on other bands.
# See IEEE P802.11-REVme/D4.0, Table E-12 (Regulatory Info subfield encoding)
# for more details.
he_6ghz_reg_pwr_type=0
#
# 6 GHz Maximum Tx Power used in Transmit Power Envelope elements, where the
# "Transmit Power Interpretation" is set to "Regulatory client EIRP PSD".
# For Maximum Transmit Power Category subfield encoding set to default (0):
#reg_def_cli_eirp_psd=-1
# For Maximum Transmit Power Category subfield encoding set to subordinate (1):
#reg_sub_cli_eirp_psd=-1

# Unsolicited broadcast Probe Response transmission settings
# This is for the 6 GHz band only. If the interval is set to a non-zero value,
# the AP schedules unsolicited broadcast Probe Response frames to be
# transmitted for in-band discovery. Refer to
# IEEE P802.11ax/D8.0 26.17.2.3.2, AP behavior for fast passive scanning.
# Valid range: 0..20 TUs; default is 0 (disabled)
#unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval=0

#channel_usage: Whether Channel Usage procedures is supported by AP.
# 0 = Channel Usage support is disabled (default)
# 1 = Channel Usage support is enabled
#channel_usage=0

#peer_to_peer_twt: Indicates an HE AP supports negotiating a peer-to-peer
# TWT schedule that is requested by a non-AP STA to establish a
# channel-usage-aidable BSS or an off-channel TDLS direct link.
# 0 = Does not support Peer-to-peer TWT (default)
# 1 = Supports Peer-to-peer TWT
#peer_to_peer_twt=0

##### IEEE 802.11be related configuration #####################################

#ieee80211be: Whether IEEE 802.11be (EHT) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#ieee80211be=1

#disable_11be: Boolean (0/1) to disable EHT for a specific BSS
#disable_11be=0

#eht_su_beamformer: EHT single user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#eht_su_beamformer=1

#eht_su_beamformee: EHT single user beamformee support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#eht_su_beamformee=1

#eht_mu_beamformer: EHT multiple user beamformer support
# 0 = not supported (default)
# 1 = supported
#eht_mu_beamformer=1

# EHT operating channel information; see matching he_* parameters for details.
# The field eht_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx field is used to indicate center
# frequency of 40, 80, and 160 MHz bandwidth operation.
# In the 6 GHz band, eht_oper_chwidth is ignored and the channel width is
# derived from the configured operating class (IEEE P802.11be/D1.5,
# Annex E.1 - Country information and operating classes).
#eht_oper_chwidth (see vht_oper_chwidth)
#eht_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx

#eht_default_pe_duration: The duration of PE field in EHT TB PPDU
# 0 = PE field duration is the same as he_default_pe_duration (default)
# 1 = PE field duration is 20 us
#eht_default_pe_duration=0

#eht_bw320_offset: For automatic channel selection (ACS) to indicate a preferred
# 320 MHz channelization in EHT mode.
# If the channel is decided or the bandwidth is not 320 MHz, this option is
# meaningless.
# 0 = auto-detect by hostapd
# 1 = 320 MHz-1 (channel center frequency 31, 95, 159)
# 2 = 320 MHz-2 (channel center frequency 63, 127, 191)
#eht_bw320_offset=0

# Disabled subchannel bitmap (16 bits) as per IEEE P802.11be/3.0,
# Figure 9-1002c (EHT Operation Information field format). Each bit corresponds
# to a 20 MHz channel, the lowest bit corresponds to the lowest frequency. A
# bit set to 1 indicates that the channel is punctured (disabled). The default
# value is 0 indicating that all channels are active.
#punct_bitmap=0

# Preamble puncturing threshold in automatic channel selection (ACS).
# The value indicates the percentage of ideal channel average interference
# factor above which a channel should be punctured.
# Default is 0, indicates that ACS algorithm should not puncture any channel.
#punct_acs_threshold=75

# AP MLD - Whether this AP is a part of an AP MLD
# 0 = no (no MLO)
# 1 = yes (MLO)
#mld_ap=0

# AP MLD MAC address
# The configured address will be set as the interface hardware address and used
# as the AP MLD MAC address. If not set, the current interface hardware address
# will be used as the AP MLD MAC address.
#mld_addr=02:03:04:05:06:07

##### IEEE 802.1X-2004 related configuration ##################################

# Require IEEE 802.1X authorization
#ieee8021x=1

# IEEE 802.1X/EAPOL version
# hostapd is implemented based on IEEE Std 802.1X-2004 which defines EAPOL
# version 2. However, there are many client implementations that do not handle
# the new version number correctly (they seem to drop the frames completely).
# In order to make hostapd interoperate with these clients, the version number
# can be set to the older version (1) with this configuration value.
# Note: When using MACsec, eapol_version shall be set to 3, which is
# defined in IEEE Std 802.1X-2010.
#eapol_version=2

# Optional displayable message sent with EAP Request-Identity. The first \0
# in this string will be converted to ASCII-0 (nul). This can be used to
# separate network info (comma separated list of attribute=value pairs); see,
# e.g., RFC 4284.
#eap_message=hello
#eap_message=hello\0networkid=netw,nasid=foo,portid=0,NAIRealms=example.com

# WEP rekeying (disabled if key lengths are not set or are set to 0)
# Key lengths for default/broadcast and individual/unicast keys:
# 5 = 40-bit WEP (also known as 64-bit WEP with 40 secret bits)
# 13 = 104-bit WEP (also known as 128-bit WEP with 104 secret bits)
#wep_key_len_broadcast=5
#wep_key_len_unicast=5
# Rekeying period in seconds. 0 = do not rekey (i.e., set keys only once)
#wep_rekey_period=300

# EAPOL-Key index workaround (set bit7) for WinXP Supplicant (needed only if
# only broadcast keys are used)
eapol_key_index_workaround=0

# EAP reauthentication period in seconds (default: 3600 seconds; 0 = disable
# reauthentication).
# Note: Reauthentications may enforce a disconnection, check the related
# parameter wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey for details.
#eap_reauth_period=3600

# Use PAE group address (01:80:c2:00:00:03) instead of individual target
# address when sending EAPOL frames with driver=wired. This is the most common
# mechanism used in wired authentication, but it also requires that the port
# is only used by one station.
#use_pae_group_addr=1

# EAP Re-authentication Protocol (ERP) authenticator (RFC 6696)
#
# Whether to initiate EAP authentication with EAP-Initiate/Re-auth-Start before
# EAP-Identity/Request
#erp_send_reauth_start=1
#
# Domain name for EAP-Initiate/Re-auth-Start. Omitted from the message if not
# set (no local ER server). This is also used by the integrated EAP server if
# ERP is enabled (eap_server_erp=1).
#erp_domain=example.com

##### MACsec ##################################################################

# macsec_policy: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec options
# This determines how sessions are secured with MACsec (only for MACsec
# drivers).
# 0: MACsec not in use (default)
# 1: MACsec enabled - Should secure, accept key server's advice to
#    determine whether to use a secure session or not.
#
# macsec_integ_only: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec transmit mode
# This setting applies only when MACsec is in use, i.e.,
#  - macsec_policy is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0: Encrypt traffic (default)
# 1: Integrity only
#
# macsec_replay_protect: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec replay protection
# This setting applies only when MACsec is in use, i.e.,
#  - macsec_policy is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0: Replay protection disabled (default)
# 1: Replay protection enabled
#
# macsec_replay_window: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec replay protection window
# This determines a window in which replay is tolerated, to allow receipt
# of frames that have been misordered by the network.
# This setting applies only when MACsec replay protection active, i.e.,
#  - macsec_replay_protect is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0: No replay window, strict check (default)
# 1..2^32-1: number of packets that could be misordered
#
# macsec_offload: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec hardware offload
# This setting applies only when MACsec is in use, i.e.,
#  - macsec_policy is enabled
#  - the key server has decided to enable MACsec
# 0 = MACSEC_OFFLOAD_OFF (default)
# 1 = MACSEC_OFFLOAD_PHY
# 2 = MACSEC_OFFLOAD_MAC
#
# macsec_port: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec port
# Port component of the SCI
# Range: 1-65534 (default: 1)
#
# mka_priority (Priority of MKA Actor)
# Range: 0..255 (default: 255)
#
# macsec_csindex: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec cipher suite
# 0 = GCM-AES-128 (default)
# 1 = GCM-AES-256 (default)
#
# mka_cak, mka_ckn, and mka_priority: IEEE 802.1X/MACsec pre-shared key mode
# This allows to configure MACsec with a pre-shared key using a (CAK,CKN) pair.
# In this mode, instances of hostapd can act as MACsec peers. The peer
# with lower priority will become the key server and start distributing SAKs.
# mka_cak (CAK = Secure Connectivity Association Key) takes a 16-byte (128-bit)
# hex-string (32 hex-digits) or a 32-byte (256-bit) hex-string (64 hex-digits)
# mka_ckn (CKN = CAK Name) takes a 1..32-bytes (8..256 bit) hex-string
# (2..64 hex-digits)

##### Integrated EAP server ###################################################

# Optionally, hostapd can be configured to use an integrated EAP server
# to process EAP authentication locally without need for an external RADIUS
# server. This functionality can be used both as a local authentication server
# for IEEE 802.1X/EAPOL and as a RADIUS server for other devices.

# Use integrated EAP server instead of external RADIUS authentication
# server. This is also needed if hostapd is configured to act as a RADIUS
# authentication server.
eap_server=0

# Path for EAP server user database
# If SQLite support is included, this can be set to "sqlite:/path/to/sqlite.db"
# to use SQLite database instead of a text file.
#eap_user_file=/etc/hostapd.eap_user

# CA certificate (PEM or DER file) for EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS
#ca_cert=/etc/hostapd.ca.pem

# Server certificate (PEM or DER file) for EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS
#server_cert=/etc/hostapd.server.pem

# Private key matching with the server certificate for EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS
# This may point to the same file as server_cert if both certificate and key
# are included in a single file. PKCS#12 (PFX) file (.p12/.pfx) can also be
# used by commenting out server_cert and specifying the PFX file as the
# private_key.
#private_key=/etc/hostapd.server.prv

# Passphrase for private key
#private_key_passwd=secret passphrase

# An alternative server certificate and private key can be configured with the
# following parameters (with values just like the parameters above without the
# '2' suffix). The ca_cert file (in PEM encoding) is used to add the trust roots
# for both server certificates and/or client certificates).
#
# The main use case for this alternative server certificate configuration is to
# enable both RSA and ECC public keys. The server will pick which one to use
# based on the client preferences for the cipher suite (in the TLS ClientHello
# message). It should be noted that number of deployed EAP peer implementations
# do not filter out the cipher suite list based on their local configuration and
# as such, configuration of alternative types of certificates on the server may
# result in interoperability issues.
#server_cert2=/etc/hostapd.server-ecc.pem
#private_key2=/etc/hostapd.server-ecc.prv
#private_key_passwd2=secret passphrase


# Server identity
# EAP methods that provide mechanism for authenticated server identity delivery
# use this value. If not set, "hostapd" is used as a default.
#server_id=server.example.com

# Enable CRL verification.
# Note: hostapd does not yet support CRL downloading based on CDP. Thus, a
# valid CRL signed by the CA is required to be included in the ca_cert file.
# This can be done by using PEM format for CA certificate and CRL and
# concatenating these into one file. Whenever CRL changes, hostapd needs to be
# restarted to take the new CRL into use. Alternatively, crl_reload_interval can
# be used to configure periodic updating of the loaded CRL information.
# 0 = do not verify CRLs (default)
# 1 = check the CRL of the user certificate
# 2 = check all CRLs in the certificate path
#check_crl=1

# Specify whether to ignore certificate CRL validity time mismatches with
# errors X509_V_ERR_CRL_HAS_EXPIRED and X509_V_ERR_CRL_NOT_YET_VALID.
#
# 0 = ignore errors
# 1 = do not ignore errors (default)
#check_crl_strict=1

# CRL reload interval in seconds
# This can be used to reload ca_cert file and the included CRL on every new TLS
# session if difference between last reload and the current reload time in
# seconds is greater than crl_reload_interval.
# Note: If interval time is very short, CPU overhead may be negatively affected
# and it is advised to not go below 300 seconds.
# This is applicable only with check_crl values 1 and 2.
# 0 = do not reload CRLs (default)
# crl_reload_interval = 300

# If check_cert_subject is set, the value of every field will be checked
# against the DN of the subject in the client certificate. If the values do
# not match, the certificate verification will fail, rejecting the user.
# This option allows hostapd to match every individual field in the right order
# against the DN of the subject in the client certificate.
#
# For example, check_cert_subject=C=US/O=XX/OU=ABC/OU=XYZ/CN=1234 will check
# every individual DN field of the subject in the client certificate. If OU=XYZ
# comes first in terms of the order in the client certificate (DN field of
# client certificate C=US/O=XX/OU=XYZ/OU=ABC/CN=1234), hostapd will reject the
# client because the order of 'OU' is not matching the specified string in
# check_cert_subject.
#
# This option also allows '*' as a wildcard. This option has some limitation.
# It can only be used as per the following example.
#
# For example, check_cert_subject=C=US/O=XX/OU=Production* and we have two
# clients and DN of the subject in the first client certificate is
# (C=US/O=XX/OU=Production Unit) and DN of the subject in the second client is
# (C=US/O=XX/OU=Production Factory). In this case, hostapd will allow both
# clients because the value of 'OU' field in both client certificates matches
# 'OU' value in 'check_cert_subject' up to 'wildcard'.
#
# * (Allow all clients, e.g., check_cert_subject=*)
#check_cert_subject=string

# TLS Session Lifetime in seconds
# This can be used to allow TLS sessions to be cached and resumed with an
# abbreviated handshake when using EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP.
# (default: 0 = session caching and resumption disabled)
#tls_session_lifetime=3600

# TLS flags
# [ALLOW-SIGN-RSA-MD5] = allow MD5-based certificate signatures (depending on
#	the TLS library, these may be disabled by default to enforce stronger
#	security)
# [DISABLE-TIME-CHECKS] = ignore certificate validity time (this requests
#	the TLS library to accept certificates even if they are not currently
#	valid, i.e., have expired or have not yet become valid; this should be
#	used only for testing purposes)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.0] = disable use of TLSv1.0
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.0] = explicitly enable use of TLSv1.0 (this allows
#	systemwide TLS policies to be overridden)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.1] = disable use of TLSv1.1
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.1] = explicitly enable use of TLSv1.1 (this allows
#	systemwide TLS policies to be overridden)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.2] = disable use of TLSv1.2
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.2] = explicitly enable use of TLSv1.2 (this allows
#	systemwide TLS policies to be overridden)
# [DISABLE-TLSv1.3] = disable use of TLSv1.3
# [ENABLE-TLSv1.3] = enable TLSv1.3 (experimental - disabled by default)
#tls_flags=[flag1][flag2]...

# Maximum number of EAP message rounds with data (default: 100)
#max_auth_rounds=100

# Maximum number of short EAP message rounds (default: 50)
#max_auth_rounds_short=50

# Cached OCSP stapling response (DER encoded)
# If set, this file is sent as a certificate status response by the EAP server
# if the EAP peer requests certificate status in the ClientHello message.
# This cache file can be updated, e.g., by running following command
# periodically to get an update from the OCSP responder:
# openssl ocsp \
#	-no_nonce \
#	-CAfile /etc/hostapd.ca.pem \
#	-issuer /etc/hostapd.ca.pem \
#	-cert /etc/hostapd.server.pem \
#	-url http://ocsp.example.com:8888/ \
#	-respout /tmp/ocsp-cache.der
#ocsp_stapling_response=/tmp/ocsp-cache.der

# Cached OCSP stapling response list (DER encoded OCSPResponseList)
# This is similar to ocsp_stapling_response, but the extended version defined in
# RFC 6961 to allow multiple OCSP responses to be provided.
#ocsp_stapling_response_multi=/tmp/ocsp-multi-cache.der

# dh_file: File path to DH/DSA parameters file (in PEM format)
# This is an optional configuration file for setting parameters for an
# ephemeral DH key exchange. If the file is in DSA parameters format, it will
# be automatically converted into DH params. If the used TLS library supports
# automatic DH parameter selection, that functionality will be used if this
# parameter is not set. DH parameters are required if anonymous EAP-FAST is
# used.
# You can generate DH parameters file with OpenSSL, e.g.,
# "openssl dhparam -out /etc/hostapd.dh.pem 2048"
#dh_file=/etc/hostapd.dh.pem

# OpenSSL cipher string
#
# This is an OpenSSL specific configuration option for configuring the default
# ciphers. If not set, the value configured at build time ("DEFAULT:!EXP:!LOW"
# by default) is used.
# See https://www.openssl.org/docs/apps/ciphers.html for OpenSSL documentation
# on cipher suite configuration. This is applicable only if hostapd is built to
# use OpenSSL.
#openssl_ciphers=DEFAULT:!EXP:!LOW

# OpenSSL ECDH curves
#
# This is an OpenSSL specific configuration option for configuring the ECDH
# curves for EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP/FAST server. If not set, automatic curve
# selection is enabled. If set to an empty string, ECDH curve configuration is
# not done (the exact library behavior depends on the library version).
# Otherwise, this is a colon separated list of the supported curves (e.g.,
# P-521:P-384:P-256). This is applicable only if hostapd is built to use
# OpenSSL. This must not be used for Suite B cases since the same OpenSSL
# parameter is set differently in those cases and this might conflict with that
# design.
#openssl_ecdh_curves=P-521:P-384:P-256

# Fragment size for EAP methods
#fragment_size=1400

# Finite cyclic group for EAP-pwd. Number maps to group of domain parameters
# using the IANA repository for IKE (RFC 2409).
#pwd_group=19

# Configuration data for EAP-SIM database/authentication gateway interface.
# This is a text string in implementation specific format. The example
# implementation in eap_sim_db.c uses this as the UNIX domain socket name for
# the HLR/AuC gateway (e.g., hlr_auc_gw). In this case, the path uses "unix:"
# prefix. If hostapd is built with SQLite support (CONFIG_SQLITE=y in .config),
# database file can be described with an optional db=<path> parameter.
#eap_sim_db=unix:/tmp/hlr_auc_gw.sock
#eap_sim_db=unix:/tmp/hlr_auc_gw.sock db=/tmp/hostapd.db

# EAP-SIM DB request timeout
# This parameter sets the maximum time to wait for a database request response.
# The parameter value is in seconds.
#eap_sim_db_timeout=1

# Encryption key for EAP-FAST PAC-Opaque values. This key must be a secret,
# random value. It is configured as a 16-octet value in hex format. It can be
# generated, e.g., with the following command:
# od -tx1 -v -N16 /dev/random | colrm 1 8 | tr -d ' '
#pac_opaque_encr_key=000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f

# EAP-FAST authority identity (A-ID)
# A-ID indicates the identity of the authority that issues PACs. The A-ID
# should be unique across all issuing servers. In theory, this is a variable
# length field, but due to some existing implementations requiring A-ID to be
# 16 octets in length, it is strongly recommended to use that length for the
# field to provide interoperability with deployed peer implementations. This
# field is configured in hex format.
#eap_fast_a_id=101112131415161718191a1b1c1d1e1f

# EAP-FAST authority identifier information (A-ID-Info)
# This is a user-friendly name for the A-ID. For example, the enterprise name
# and server name in a human-readable format. This field is encoded as UTF-8.
#eap_fast_a_id_info=test server

# Enable/disable different EAP-FAST provisioning modes:
#0 = provisioning disabled
#1 = only anonymous provisioning allowed
#2 = only authenticated provisioning allowed
#3 = both provisioning modes allowed (default)
#eap_fast_prov=3

# EAP-FAST PAC-Key lifetime in seconds (hard limit)
#pac_key_lifetime=604800

# EAP-FAST PAC-Key refresh time in seconds (soft limit on remaining hard
# limit). The server will generate a new PAC-Key when this number of seconds
# (or fewer) of the lifetime remains.
#pac_key_refresh_time=86400

# EAP-TEAP authentication type
# 0 = inner EAP (default)
# 1 = Basic-Password-Auth
# 2 = Do not require Phase 2 authentication if client can be authenticated
#     during Phase 1
#eap_teap_auth=0

# EAP-TEAP authentication behavior when using PAC
# 0 = perform inner authentication (default)
# 1 = skip inner authentication (inner EAP/Basic-Password-Auth)
#eap_teap_pac_no_inner=0

# EAP-TEAP behavior with Result TLV
# 0 = include with Intermediate-Result TLV (default)
# 1 = send in a separate message (for testing purposes)
#eap_teap_separate_result=0

# EAP-TEAP identities
# 0 = allow any identity type (default)
# 1 = require user identity
# 2 = require machine identity
# 3 = request user identity; accept either user or machine identity
# 4 = request machine identity; accept either user or machine identity
# 5 = require both user and machine identity
#eap_teap_id=0

# EAP-TEAP tunneled EAP method behavior
# 0 = minimize roundtrips by merging start of the next EAP method with the
#     crypto-binding of the previous one.
# 1 = complete crypto-binding before starting the next EAP method
#eap_teap_method_sequence=0

# EAP-SIM and EAP-AKA protected success/failure indication using AT_RESULT_IND
# (default: 0 = disabled).
#eap_sim_aka_result_ind=1

# EAP-SIM and EAP-AKA identity options
# 0 = do not use pseudonyms or fast reauthentication
# 1 = use pseudonyms, but not fast reauthentication
# 2 = do not use pseudonyms, but use fast reauthentication
# 3 = use pseudonyms and use fast reauthentication (default)
# 4 = do not use pseudonyms or fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
# 5 = use pseudonyms, but not fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
# 6 = do not use pseudonyms, but use fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
# 7 = use pseudonyms and use fast reauthentication and allow
#     EAP-Response/Identity to be used without method specific identity exchange
#eap_sim_id=3

# IMSI privacy key (PEM encoded RSA 2048-bit private key) for decrypting
# permanent identity when using EAP-SIM/AKA/AKA'.
#imsi_privacy_key=imsi-privacy-key.pem

# EAP-SIM and EAP-AKA fast re-authentication limit
# Maximum number of fast re-authentications allowed after each full
# authentication.
#eap_sim_aka_fast_reauth_limit=1000

# Trusted Network Connect (TNC)
# If enabled, TNC validation will be required before the peer is allowed to
# connect. Note: This is only used with EAP-TTLS and EAP-FAST. If any other
# EAP method is enabled, the peer will be allowed to connect without TNC.
#tnc=1

# EAP Re-authentication Protocol (ERP) - RFC 6696
#
# Whether to enable ERP on the EAP server.
#eap_server_erp=1


##### RADIUS client configuration #############################################
# for IEEE 802.1X with external Authentication Server, IEEE 802.11
# authentication with external ACL for MAC addresses, and accounting

# The own IP address of the access point (used as NAS-IP-Address)
#own_ip_addr=127.0.0.1

# NAS-Identifier string for RADIUS messages. When used, this should be unique
# to the NAS within the scope of the RADIUS server. Please note that hostapd
# uses a separate RADIUS client for each BSS and as such, a unique
# nas_identifier value should be configured separately for each BSS. This is
# particularly important for cases where RADIUS accounting is used
# (Accounting-On/Off messages are interpreted as clearing all ongoing sessions
# and that may get interpreted as applying to all BSSes if the same
# NAS-Identifier value is used.) For example, a fully qualified domain name
# prefixed with a unique identifier of the BSS (e.g., BSSID) can be used here.
#
# When using IEEE 802.11r, nas_identifier must be set and must be between 1 and
# 48 octets long.
#
# It is mandatory to configure either own_ip_addr or nas_identifier to be
# compliant with the RADIUS protocol. When using RADIUS accounting, it is
# strongly recommended that nas_identifier is set to a unique value for each
# BSS.
#nas_identifier=ap.example.com

# RADIUS client forced local IP address for the access point
# Normally the local IP address is determined automatically based on configured
# IP addresses, but this field can be used to force a specific address to be
# used, e.g., when the device has multiple IP addresses.
#radius_client_addr=127.0.0.1

# RADIUS client forced local interface. Helps run properly with VRF
# Default is none set which allows the network stack to pick the appropriate
# interface automatically.
# Example below binds to eth0
#radius_client_dev=eth0

# RADIUS authentication server
#auth_server_addr=127.0.0.1
#auth_server_port=1812
#auth_server_shared_secret=secret

# RADIUS accounting server
#acct_server_addr=127.0.0.1
#acct_server_port=1813
#acct_server_shared_secret=secret

# Secondary RADIUS servers; to be used if primary one does not reply to
# RADIUS packets. These are optional and there can be more than one secondary
# server listed.
#auth_server_addr=127.0.0.2
#auth_server_port=1812
#auth_server_shared_secret=secret2
#
#acct_server_addr=127.0.0.2
#acct_server_port=1813
#acct_server_shared_secret=secret2

# RADIUS/TLS instead of RADIUS/UDP
#auth_server_addr=127.0.0.1
#auth_server_port=2083
#auth_server_type=TLS
#auth_server_shared_secret=radsec
#auth_server_ca_cert=<path to trusted CA certificate(s)>
#auth_server_client_cert=<path to client certificate>
#auth_server_private_key=<path to private key>
#auth_server_private_key_passwd=<password for decrypting private key>

# Retry interval for trying to return to the primary RADIUS server (in
# seconds). RADIUS client code will automatically try to use the next server
# when the current server is not replying to requests. If this interval is set,
# primary server will be retried after configured amount of time even if the
# currently used secondary server is still working.
#radius_retry_primary_interval=600

# Message-Authenticator attribute requirement for non-EAP cases
# hostapd requires Message-Authenticator attribute to be included in all cases
# where RADIUS is used for EAP authentication. This is also required for cases
# where RADIUS is used for MAC ACL (macaddr_acl=2) by default, but that case
# can be configured to not require this for compatibility with RADIUS servers
# that do not include the attribute. This is not recommended due to potential
# security concerns, but can be used as a temporary workaround in networks where
# the connection to the RADIUS server is secure.
# 0 = Do not require Message-Authenticator in MAC ACL response
# 1 = Require Message-Authenticator in all authentication cases (default)
#radius_require_message_authenticator=1

# Interim accounting update interval
# If this is set (larger than 0) and acct_server is configured, hostapd will
# send interim accounting updates every N seconds. Note: if set, this overrides
# possible Acct-Interim-Interval attribute in Access-Accept message. Thus, this
# value should not be configured in hostapd.conf, if RADIUS server is used to
# control the interim interval.
# This value should not be less 600 (10 minutes) and must not be less than
# 60 (1 minute).
#radius_acct_interim_interval=600

# Request Chargeable-User-Identity (RFC 4372)
# This parameter can be used to configure hostapd to request CUI from the
# RADIUS server by including Chargeable-User-Identity attribute into
# Access-Request packets.
#radius_request_cui=1

# Dynamic VLAN mode; allow RADIUS authentication server to decide which VLAN
# is used for the stations. This information is parsed from following RADIUS
# attributes based on RFC 3580 and RFC 2868: Tunnel-Type (value 13 = VLAN),
# Tunnel-Medium-Type (value 6 = IEEE 802), Tunnel-Private-Group-ID (value
# VLANID as a string). Optionally, the local MAC ACL list (accept_mac_file) can
# be used to set static client MAC address to VLAN ID mapping.
# Dynamic VLAN mode is also used with VLAN ID assignment based on WPA/WPA2
# passphrase from wpa_psk_file or vlan_id parameter from sae_password.
# 0 = disabled (default); only VLAN IDs from accept_mac_file will be used
# 1 = optional; use default interface if RADIUS server does not include VLAN ID
# 2 = required; reject authentication if RADIUS server does not include VLAN ID
#dynamic_vlan=0

# Per-Station AP_VLAN interface mode
# If enabled, each station is assigned its own AP_VLAN interface.
# This implies per-station group keying and ebtables filtering of inter-STA
# traffic (when passed through the AP).
# If the sta is not assigned to any VLAN, then its AP_VLAN interface will be
# added to the bridge given by the "bridge" configuration option (see above).
# Otherwise, it will be added to the per-VLAN bridge.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#per_sta_vif=0

# VLAN interface list for dynamic VLAN mode is read from a separate text file.
# This list is used to map VLAN ID from the RADIUS server to a network
# interface. Each station is bound to one interface in the same way as with
# multiple BSSIDs or SSIDs. Each line in this text file is defining a new
# interface and the line must include VLAN ID and interface name separated by
# white space (space or tab).
# If no entries are provided by this file, the station is statically mapped
# to <bss-iface>.<vlan-id> interfaces.
# Each line can optionally also contain the name of a bridge to add the VLAN to
#vlan_file=/etc/hostapd.vlan

# Interface where 802.1q tagged packets should appear when a RADIUS server is
# used to determine which VLAN a station is on.  hostapd creates a bridge for
# each VLAN.  Then hostapd adds a VLAN interface (associated with the interface
# indicated by 'vlan_tagged_interface') and the appropriate wireless interface
# to the bridge.
#vlan_tagged_interface=eth0

# Bridge (prefix) to add the wifi and the tagged interface to. This gets the
# VLAN ID appended. It defaults to brvlan%d if no tagged interface is given
# and br%s.%d if a tagged interface is given, provided %s = tagged interface
# and %d = VLAN ID.
#vlan_bridge=brvlan

# When hostapd creates a VLAN interface on vlan_tagged_interfaces, it needs
# to know how to name it.
# 0 = vlan<XXX>, e.g., vlan1
# 1 = <vlan_tagged_interface>.<XXX>, e.g. eth0.1
#vlan_naming=0

# Arbitrary RADIUS attributes can be added into Access-Request and
# Accounting-Request packets by specifying the contents of the attributes with
# the following configuration parameters. There can be multiple of these to
# add multiple attributes. These parameters can also be used to override some
# of the attributes added automatically by hostapd.
# Format: <attr_id>[:<syntax:value>]
# attr_id: RADIUS attribute type (e.g., 26 = Vendor-Specific)
# syntax: s = string (UTF-8), d = integer, x = octet string
# value: attribute value in format indicated by the syntax
# If syntax and value parts are omitted, a null value (single 0x00 octet) is
# used.
#
# Additional Access-Request attributes
# radius_auth_req_attr=<attr_id>[:<syntax:value>]
# Examples:
# Operator-Name = "Operator"
#radius_auth_req_attr=126:s:Operator
# Service-Type = Framed (2)
#radius_auth_req_attr=6:d:2
# Connect-Info = "testing" (this overrides the automatically generated value)
#radius_auth_req_attr=77:s:testing
# Same Connect-Info value set as a hexdump
#radius_auth_req_attr=77:x:74657374696e67

#
# Additional Accounting-Request attributes
# radius_acct_req_attr=<attr_id>[:<syntax:value>]
# Examples:
# Operator-Name = "Operator"
#radius_acct_req_attr=126:s:Operator

# If SQLite support is included, path to a database from which additional
# RADIUS request attributes are extracted based on the station MAC address.
#
# The schema for the radius_attributes table is:
# id | sta | reqtype | attr   :   multi-key (sta, reqtype)
# id   = autonumber
# sta  = station MAC address in `11:22:33:44:55:66` format.
# type = `auth` | `acct` | NULL (match any)
# attr = existing config file format, e.g. `126:s:Test Operator`
#radius_req_attr_sqlite=radius_attr.sqlite

# Dynamic Authorization Extensions (RFC 5176)
# This mechanism can be used to allow dynamic changes to user session based on
# commands from a RADIUS server (or some other disconnect client that has the
# needed session information). For example, Disconnect message can be used to
# request an associated station to be disconnected.
#
# This is disabled by default. Set radius_das_port to non-zero UDP port
# number to enable.
#radius_das_port=3799
#
# DAS client (the host that can send Disconnect/CoA requests) and shared secret
# Format: <IP address> <shared secret>
# IP address 0.0.0.0 can be used to allow requests from any address.
#radius_das_client=192.168.1.123 shared secret here
#
# DAS Event-Timestamp time window in seconds
#radius_das_time_window=300
#
# DAS require Event-Timestamp
#radius_das_require_event_timestamp=1
#
# DAS require Message-Authenticator
#radius_das_require_message_authenticator=1

##### RADIUS authentication server configuration ##############################

# hostapd can be used as a RADIUS authentication server for other hosts. This
# requires that the integrated EAP server is also enabled and both
# authentication services are sharing the same configuration.

# File name of the RADIUS clients configuration for the RADIUS server. If this
# commented out, RADIUS server is disabled.
#radius_server_clients=/etc/hostapd.radius_clients

# The UDP port number for the RADIUS authentication server
#radius_server_auth_port=1812

# The UDP port number for the RADIUS accounting server
# Commenting this out or setting this to 0 can be used to disable RADIUS
# accounting while still enabling RADIUS authentication.
#radius_server_acct_port=1813

# Use IPv6 with RADIUS server (IPv4 will also be supported using IPv6 API)
#radius_server_ipv6=1


##### WPA/IEEE 802.11i configuration ##########################################

# Enable WPA. Setting this variable configures the AP to require WPA (either
# WPA-PSK or WPA-RADIUS/EAP based on other configuration). For WPA-PSK, either
# wpa_psk or wpa_passphrase must be set and wpa_key_mgmt must include WPA-PSK.
# Instead of wpa_psk / wpa_passphrase, wpa_psk_radius might suffice.
# For WPA-RADIUS/EAP, ieee8021x must be set (but without dynamic WEP keys),
# RADIUS authentication server must be configured, and WPA-EAP must be included
# in wpa_key_mgmt.
# This field is a bit field that can be used to enable WPA (IEEE 802.11i/D3.0)
# and/or WPA2 (full IEEE 802.11i/RSN):
# bit0 = WPA
# bit1 = IEEE 802.11i/RSN (WPA2) (dot11RSNAEnabled)
# Note that WPA3 is also configured with bit1 since it uses RSN just like WPA2.
# In other words, for WPA3, wpa=2 is used the configuration (and
# wpa_key_mgmt=SAE for WPA3-Personal instead of wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-PSK).
wpa=2

# Extended Key ID support for Individually Addressed frames
#
# Extended Key ID allows to rekey PTK keys without the impacts the "normal"
# PTK rekeying with only a single Key ID 0 has. It can only be used when the
# driver supports it and RSN/WPA2 is used with a CCMP/GCMP pairwise cipher.
#
# 0 = force off, i.e., use only Key ID 0 (default)
# 1 = enable and use Extended Key ID support when possible
# 2 = identical to 1 but start with Key ID 1 when possible
extended_key_id=1

# WPA pre-shared keys for WPA-PSK. This can be either entered as a 256-bit
# secret in hex format (64 hex digits), wpa_psk, or as an ASCII passphrase
# (8..63 characters) that will be converted to PSK. This conversion uses SSID
# so the PSK changes when ASCII passphrase is used and the SSID is changed.
# wpa_psk (dot11RSNAConfigPSKValue)
# wpa_passphrase (dot11RSNAConfigPSKPassPhrase)
#wpa_psk=0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef
wpa_passphrase=myPW1234

# Optionally, WPA PSKs can be read from a separate text file (containing list
# of (PSK,MAC address) pairs. This allows more than one PSK to be configured.
# Use absolute path name to make sure that the files can be read on SIGHUP
# configuration reloads.
#wpa_psk_file=/etc/hostapd.wpa_psk

# Optionally, WPA passphrase can be received from RADIUS authentication server
# This requires macaddr_acl to be set to 2 (RADIUS) for wpa_psk_radius values
# 1 and 2.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = optional; use default passphrase/psk if RADIUS server does not include
#	Tunnel-Password
# 2 = required; reject authentication if RADIUS server does not include
#	Tunnel-Password
# 3 = ask RADIUS server during 4-way handshake if there is no locally
#	configured PSK/passphrase for the STA
#
# The Tunnel-Password attribute in Access-Accept can contain either the
# 8..63 character ASCII passphrase or a 64 hex character encoding of the PSK.
#
#wpa_psk_radius=0

# Set of accepted key management algorithms (WPA-PSK, WPA-EAP, or both). The
# entries are separated with a space. WPA-PSK-SHA256 and WPA-EAP-SHA256 can be
# added to enable SHA256-based stronger algorithms.
# WPA-PSK = WPA-Personal / WPA2-Personal
# WPA-PSK-SHA256 = WPA2-Personal using SHA256
# WPA-EAP = WPA-Enterprise / WPA2-Enterprise
# WPA-EAP-SHA256 = WPA2-Enterprise using SHA256
# SAE = SAE (WPA3-Personal)
# WPA-EAP-SUITE-B-192 = WPA3-Enterprise with 192-bit security/CNSA suite
# FT-PSK = FT with passphrase/PSK
# FT-EAP = FT with EAP
# FT-EAP-SHA384 = FT with EAP using SHA384
# FT-SAE = FT with SAE
# FILS-SHA256 = Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA256
# FILS-SHA384 = Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA384
# FT-FILS-SHA256 = FT and Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA256
# FT-FILS-SHA384 = FT and Fast Initial Link Setup with SHA384
# OWE = Opportunistic Wireless Encryption (a.k.a. Enhanced Open)
# DPP = Device Provisioning Protocol
# OSEN = Hotspot 2.0 online signup with encryption
# (dot11RSNAConfigAuthenticationSuitesTable)
wpa_key_mgmt=SAE

# Set of accepted cipher suites (encryption algorithms) for pairwise keys
# (unicast packets). This is a space separated list of algorithms:
# CCMP = AES in Counter mode with CBC-MAC (CCMP-128)
# TKIP = Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
# CCMP-256 = AES in Counter mode with CBC-MAC with 256-bit key
# GCMP = Galois/counter mode protocol (GCMP-128)
# GCMP-256 = Galois/counter mode protocol with 256-bit key
# Group cipher suite (encryption algorithm for broadcast and multicast frames)
# is automatically selected based on this configuration. If only CCMP is
# allowed as the pairwise cipher, group cipher will also be CCMP. Otherwise,
# TKIP will be used as the group cipher. The optional group_cipher parameter can
# be used to override this automatic selection.
#
# (dot11RSNAConfigPairwiseCiphersTable)
rsn_pairwise=CCMP CCMP-256 GCMP GCMP-256

# Optional override for automatic group cipher selection
# This can be used to select a specific group cipher regardless of which
# pairwise ciphers were enabled for WPA and RSN. It should be noted that
# overriding the group cipher with an unexpected value can result in
# interoperability issues and in general, this parameter is mainly used for
# testing purposes.
#group_cipher=CCMP

# Time interval for rekeying GTK (broadcast/multicast encryption keys) in
# seconds. (dot11RSNAConfigGroupRekeyTime)
# This defaults to 86400 seconds (once per day) when using CCMP/GCMP as the
# group cipher and 600 seconds (once per 10 minutes) when using TKIP as the
# group cipher.
wpa_group_rekey=86400

# Rekey GTK when any STA that possesses the current GTK is leaving the BSS.
# (dot11RSNAConfigGroupRekeyStrict)
#wpa_strict_rekey=1

# The number of times EAPOL-Key Message 1/2 in the RSN Group Key Handshake is
# retried per GTK Handshake attempt. (dot11RSNAConfigGroupUpdateCount)
# This value should only be increased when stations are constantly
# deauthenticated during GTK rekeying with the log message
# "group key handshake failed...".
# You should consider to also increase wpa_pairwise_update_count then.
# Range 1..4294967295; default: 4
wpa_group_update_count=4

# Time interval for rekeying GMK (master key used internally to generate GTKs
# (in seconds).
wpa_gmk_rekey=86400

# Maximum lifetime for PTK in seconds. This can be used to enforce rekeying of
# PTK to mitigate some attacks against TKIP deficiencies.
# Warning: PTK rekeying is buggy with many drivers/devices and with such
# devices, the only secure method to rekey the PTK without Extended Key ID
# support requires a disconnection. Check the related parameter
# wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey for details.
#wpa_ptk_rekey=600

# Workaround for PTK rekey issues
#
# PTK0 rekeys (rekeying the PTK without "Extended Key ID for Individually
# Addressed Frames") can degrade the security and stability with some cards.
# To avoid such issues hostapd can replace those PTK rekeys (including EAP
# reauthentications) with disconnects.
#
# Available options:
# 0 = always rekey when configured/instructed (default)
# 1 = only rekey when the local driver is explicitly indicating it can perform
#	this operation without issues
# 2 = never allow PTK0 rekeys
#wpa_deny_ptk0_rekey=0

# The number of times EAPOL-Key Message 1/4 and Message 3/4 in the RSN 4-Way
# Handshake are retried per 4-Way Handshake attempt.
# (dot11RSNAConfigPairwiseUpdateCount)
# Range 1..4294967295; default: 4
#wpa_pairwise_update_count=4

# Workaround for key reinstallation attacks
#
# This parameter can be used to disable retransmission of EAPOL-Key frames that
# are used to install keys (EAPOL-Key message 3/4 and group message 1/2). This
# is similar to setting wpa_group_update_count=1 and
# wpa_pairwise_update_count=1, but with no impact to message 1/4 and with
# extended timeout on the response to avoid causing issues with stations that
# may use aggressive power saving have very long time in replying to the
# EAPOL-Key messages.
#
# This option can be used to work around key reinstallation attacks on the
# station (supplicant) side in cases those station devices cannot be updated
# for some reason. By removing the retransmissions the attacker cannot cause
# key reinstallation with a delayed frame transmission. This is related to the
# station side vulnerabilities CVE-2017-13077, CVE-2017-13078, CVE-2017-13079,
# CVE-2017-13080, and CVE-2017-13081.
#
# This workaround might cause interoperability issues and reduced robustness of
# key negotiation especially in environments with heavy traffic load due to the
# number of attempts to perform the key exchange is reduced significantly. As
# such, this workaround is disabled by default (unless overridden in build
# configuration). To enable this, set the parameter to 1.
#wpa_disable_eapol_key_retries=1

# Enable IEEE 802.11i/RSN/WPA2 pre-authentication. This is used to speed up
# roaming be pre-authenticating IEEE 802.1X/EAP part of the full RSN
# authentication and key handshake before actually associating with a new AP.
# (dot11RSNAPreauthenticationEnabled)
#rsn_preauth=1
#
# Space separated list of interfaces from which pre-authentication frames are
# accepted (e.g., 'eth0' or 'eth0 wlan0wds0'. This list should include all
# interface that are used for connections to other APs. This could include
# wired interfaces and WDS links. The normal wireless data interface towards
# associated stations (e.g., wlan0) should not be added, since
# pre-authentication is only used with APs other than the currently associated
# one.
#rsn_preauth_interfaces=eth0

# ieee80211w: Whether management frame protection (MFP) is enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = optional
# 2 = required
ieee80211w=2
# The most common configuration options for this based on the PMF (protected
# management frames) certification program are:
# PMF enabled: ieee80211w=1 and wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-EAP WPA-EAP-SHA256
# PMF required: ieee80211w=2 and wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-EAP-SHA256
# (and similarly for WPA-PSK and WPA-PSK-SHA256 if WPA2-Personal is used)
# WPA3-Personal-only mode: ieee80211w=2 and wpa_key_mgmt=SAE

# Group management cipher suite
# Default: AES-128-CMAC (BIP)
# Other options (depending on driver support):
# BIP-GMAC-128
# BIP-GMAC-256
# BIP-CMAC-256
# Note: All the stations connecting to the BSS will also need to support the
# selected cipher. The default AES-128-CMAC is the only option that is commonly
# available in deployed devices.
group_mgmt_cipher=AES-128-CMAC

# Beacon Protection (management frame protection for Beacon frames)
# This depends on management frame protection being enabled (ieee80211w != 0)
# and beacon protection support indication from the driver.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
beacon_prot=1

# SPP (Signaling and Payload Protected) A-MSDU.
# This depends on driver support and CCMP/GCMP cipher suite being used.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled if driver indicates support for this
#spp_amsdu=1

# Association SA Query maximum timeout (in TU = 1.024 ms; for MFP)
# (maximum time to wait for a SA Query response)
# dot11AssociationSAQueryMaximumTimeout, 1...4294967295
#assoc_sa_query_max_timeout=1000

# Association SA Query retry timeout (in TU = 1.024 ms; for MFP)
# (time between two subsequent SA Query requests)
# dot11AssociationSAQueryRetryTimeout, 1...4294967295
#assoc_sa_query_retry_timeout=201

# ocv: Operating Channel Validation
# This is a countermeasure against multi-channel on-path attacks.
# Enabling this depends on the driver's support for OCV when the driver SME is
# used. If hostapd SME is used, this will be enabled just based on this
# configuration.
# Enabling this automatically also enables ieee80211w, if not yet enabled.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
# 2 = enabled in workaround mode - Allow STA that claims OCV capability to
#     connect even if the STA doesn't send OCI or negotiate PMF. This
#     workaround is to improve interoperability with legacy STAs which are
#     wrongly copying reserved bits of RSN capabilities from the AP's
#     RSNE into (Re)Association Request frames. When this configuration is
#     enabled, the AP considers STA is OCV capable only when the STA indicates
#     MFP capability in (Re)Association Request frames and sends OCI in
#     EAPOL-Key msg 2/4/FT Reassociation Request frame/FILS (Re)Association
#     Request frame; otherwise, the AP disables OCV for the current connection
#     with the STA. Enabling this workaround mode reduced OCV protection to
#     some extend since it allows misbehavior to go through. As such, this
#     should be enabled only if interoperability with misbehaving STAs is
#     needed.
#ocv=1

# disable_pmksa_caching: Disable PMKSA caching
# This parameter can be used to disable caching of PMKSA created through EAP
# authentication. RSN preauthentication may still end up using PMKSA caching if
# it is enabled (rsn_preauth=1).
# 0 = PMKSA caching enabled (default)
# 1 = PMKSA caching disabled
#disable_pmksa_caching=0

# okc: Opportunistic Key Caching (aka Proactive Key Caching)
# Allow PMK cache to be shared opportunistically among configured interfaces
# and BSSes (i.e., all configurations within a single hostapd process).
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
okc=1

# SAE password
# This parameter can be used to set passwords for SAE. By default, the
# wpa_passphrase value is used if this separate parameter is not used, but
# wpa_passphrase follows the WPA-PSK constraints (8..63 characters) even though
# SAE passwords do not have such constraints. If the BSS enabled both SAE and
# WPA-PSK and both values are set, SAE uses the sae_password values and WPA-PSK
# uses the wpa_passphrase value.
#
# Each sae_password entry is added to a list of available passwords. This
# corresponds to the dot11RSNAConfigPasswordValueEntry. sae_password value
# starts with the password (dot11RSNAConfigPasswordCredential). That value can
# be followed by optional peer MAC address (dot11RSNAConfigPasswordPeerMac) and
# by optional password identifier (dot11RSNAConfigPasswordIdentifier). In
# addition, an optional VLAN ID specification can be used to bind the station
# to the specified VLAN whenever the specific SAE password entry is used.
#
# If the peer MAC address is not included or is set to the wildcard address
# (ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff), the entry is available for any station to use. If a
# specific peer MAC address is included, only a station with that MAC address
# is allowed to use the entry.
#
# If the password identifier (with non-zero length) is included, the entry is
# limited to be used only with that specified identifier.

# The last matching (based on peer MAC address and identifier) entry is used to
# select which password to use. Setting sae_password to an empty string has a
# special meaning of removing all previously added entries.
#
# sae_password uses the following encoding:
#<password/credential>[|mac=<peer mac>][|vlanid=<VLAN ID>]
#[|pk=<m:ECPrivateKey-base64>][|id=<identifier>]
# Examples:
#sae_password=secret
#sae_password=really secret|mac=ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
#sae_password=example secret|mac=02:03:04:05:06:07|id=pw identifier
#sae_password=example secret|vlanid=3|id=pw identifier
#
# SAE passwords can also be read from a separate file in which each line
# contains and entry in the same format as sae_password uses.
#sae_password_file=/tc/hostapd.sae_passwords

# SAE threshold for anti-clogging mechanism (dot11RSNASAEAntiCloggingThreshold)
# This parameter defines how many open SAE instances can be in progress at the
# same time before the anti-clogging mechanism is taken into use.
#sae_anti_clogging_threshold=5 (deprecated)
#anti_clogging_threshold=5

# Maximum number of SAE synchronization errors (dot11RSNASAESync)
# The offending SAE peer will be disconnected if more than this many
# synchronization errors happen.
#sae_sync=3

# Enabled SAE finite cyclic groups
# SAE implementation are required to support group 19 (ECC group defined over a
# 256-bit prime order field). This configuration parameter can be used to
# specify a set of allowed groups. If not included, only the mandatory group 19
# is enabled.
# The group values are listed in the IANA registry:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/ipsec-registry/ipsec-registry.xml#ipsec-registry-9
# Note that groups 1, 2, 5, 22, 23, and 24 should not be used in production
# purposes due limited security (see RFC 8247). Groups that are not as strong as
# group 19 (ECC, NIST P-256) are unlikely to be useful for production use cases
# since all implementations are required to support group 19.
#sae_groups=19 20 21

# Require MFP for all associations using SAE
# This parameter can be used to enforce negotiation of MFP for all associations
# that negotiate use of SAE. This is used in cases where SAE-capable devices are
# known to be MFP-capable and the BSS is configured with optional MFP
# (ieee80211w=1) for legacy support. The non-SAE stations can connect without
# MFP while SAE stations are required to negotiate MFP if sae_require_mfp=1.
#sae_require_mfp=0

# SAE Confirm behavior
# By default, AP will send out only SAE Commit message in response to a received
# SAE Commit message. This parameter can be set to 1 to override that behavior
# to send both SAE Commit and SAE Confirm messages without waiting for the STA
# to send its SAE Confirm message first.
#sae_confirm_immediate=0

# SAE mechanism for PWE derivation
# 0 = hunting-and-pecking loop only (default without password identifier)
# 1 = hash-to-element only (default with password identifier)
# 2 = both hunting-and-pecking loop and hash-to-element enabled
# Note: The default value is likely to change from 0 to 2 once the new
# hash-to-element mechanism has received more interoperability testing.
# When using SAE password identifier, the hash-to-element mechanism is used
# regardless of the sae_pwe parameter value.
#sae_pwe=0

# FILS Cache Identifier (16-bit value in hexdump format)
#fils_cache_id=0011

# FILS Realm Information
# One or more FILS realms need to be configured when FILS is enabled. This list
# of realms is used to define which realms (used in keyName-NAI by the client)
# can be used with FILS shared key authentication for ERP.
#fils_realm=example.com
#fils_realm=example.org

# FILS DH Group for PFS
# 0 = PFS disabled with FILS shared key authentication (default)
# 1-65535 DH Group to use for FILS PFS
#fils_dh_group=0

# OWE DH groups
# OWE implementations are required to support group 19 (NIST P-256). All groups
# that are supported by the implementation (e.g., groups 19, 20, and 21 when
# using OpenSSL) are enabled by default. This configuration parameter can be
# used to specify a limited set of allowed groups. The group values are listed
# in the IANA registry:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/ipsec-registry/ipsec-registry.xml#ipsec-registry-10
#owe_groups=19 20 21

# OWE PTK derivation workaround
# Initial OWE implementation used SHA256 when deriving the PTK for all OWE
# groups. This was supposed to change to SHA384 for group 20 and SHA512 for
# group 21. This parameter can be used to enable workaround for interoperability
# with stations that use SHA256 with groups 20 and 21. By default (0) only the
# appropriate hash function is accepted. When workaround is enabled (1), the
# appropriate hash function is tried first and if that fails, SHA256-based PTK
# derivation is attempted. This workaround can result in reduced security for
# groups 20 and 21, but is required for interoperability with older
# implementations. There is no impact to group 19 behavior. The workaround is
# disabled by default and can be enabled by uncommenting the following line.
#owe_ptk_workaround=1

# OWE transition mode configuration
# Pointer to the matching open/OWE BSS
#owe_transition_bssid=<bssid>
# SSID in same format as ssid2 described above.
#owe_transition_ssid=<SSID>
# Alternatively, OWE transition mode BSSID/SSID can be configured with a
# reference to a BSS operated by this hostapd process.
#owe_transition_ifname=<ifname>

# DHCP server for FILS HLP
# If configured, hostapd will act as a DHCP relay for all FILS HLP requests
# that include a DHCPDISCOVER message and send them to the specific DHCP
# server for processing. hostapd will then wait for a response from that server
# before replying with (Re)Association Response frame that encapsulates this
# DHCP response. own_ip_addr is used as the local address for the communication
# with the DHCP server.
#dhcp_server=127.0.0.1

# DHCP server UDP port
# Default: 67
#dhcp_server_port=67

# DHCP relay UDP port on the local device
# Default: 67; 0 means not to bind any specific port
#dhcp_relay_port=67

# DHCP rapid commit proxy
# If set to 1, this enables hostapd to act as a DHCP rapid commit proxy to
# allow the rapid commit options (two message DHCP exchange) to be used with a
# server that supports only the four message DHCP exchange. This is disabled by
# default (= 0) and can be enabled by setting this to 1.
#dhcp_rapid_commit_proxy=0

# Wait time for FILS HLP (dot11HLPWaitTime) in TUs
# default: 30 TUs (= 30.72 milliseconds)
#fils_hlp_wait_time=30

# FILS Discovery frame transmission minimum and maximum interval settings.
# If fils_discovery_max_interval is non-zero, the AP enables FILS Discovery
# frame transmission. These values use TUs as the unit and have allowed range
# of 0-10000. fils_discovery_min_interval defaults to 20.
# This feature is currently supported only when ieee80211ax is enabled for
# the radio and disable_11ax is not set for the BSS.
#fils_discovery_min_interval=20
#fils_discovery_max_interval=0

# Transition Disable indication
# The AP can notify authenticated stations to disable transition mode in their
# network profiles when the network has completed transition steps, i.e., once
# sufficiently large number of APs in the ESS have been updated to support the
# more secure alternative. When this indication is used, the stations are
# expected to automatically disable transition mode and less secure security
# options. This includes use of WEP, TKIP (including use of TKIP as the group
# cipher), and connections without PMF.
# Bitmap bits:
# bit 0 (0x01): WPA3-Personal (i.e., disable WPA2-Personal = WPA-PSK and only
#	allow SAE to be used)
# bit 1 (0x02): SAE-PK (disable SAE without use of SAE-PK)
# bit 2 (0x04): WPA3-Enterprise (move to requiring PMF)
# bit 3 (0x08): Enhanced Open (disable use of open network; require OWE)
# (default: 0 = do not include Transition Disable KDE)
#transition_disable=0x01

# PASN ECDH groups
# PASN implementations are required to support group 19 (NIST P-256). If this
# parameter is not set, only group 19 is supported by default. This
# configuration parameter can be used to specify a limited set of allowed
# groups. The group values are listed in the IANA registry:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/ipsec-registry/ipsec-registry.xml#ipsec-registry-10
#pasn_groups=19 20 21

# PASN comeback after time in TUs
# In case the AP is temporarily unable to handle a PASN authentication exchange
# due to a too large number of parallel operations, this value indicates to the
# peer after how many TUs it can try the PASN exchange again.
# (default: 10 TUs)
#pasn_comeback_after=10

# Unauthenticated PASN activated (dot11NoAuthPASNActivated)
# This indicates whether PASN without mutual authentication is allowed.
# (default: 1 = activated)
#pasn_noauth=1

# SSID protection in 4-way handshake
# The IEEE 802.11i-2004 RSN design did not provide means for protecting the
# SSID in the general case. IEEE P802.11REVme/D6.0 added support for this in
# 4-way handshake. This capability allows a STA to confirm that the AP has the
# same understanding on which SSID is being used for an association in a
# protected manner in cases where both the AP and the STA has this capability.
# This can be used to mitigate CVE-2023-52424 (a.k.a. the SSID Confusion
# Attack).
#
# Ideally, this capability would be enabled by default on the AP, but since this
# is new functionality with limited testing, the default is to disable this for
# now and require explicitly configuration to enable. The default behavior is
# like to change once this capability has received more testing.
#
# 0 = SSID protection in 4-way handshake disabled (default)
# 1 = SSID protection in 4-way handshake enabled
#
#ssid_protection=0

# Known STA Identification
# IEEE Std 802.11-2024 adds a mechanism that allows the SA Query procedure on
# (re)association to the previously used AP to be skipped when that AP still
# has a valid security association. This can speed up cases where a STA needs to
# reassociate back to the same AP to update some association parameters.
#
# 0 = Do not process Known STA Identification (default)
# 1 = Allow Known STA Identification to be used to skip SA Query procedure
#known_sta_identification=0

# RSNE/RSNXE override
#
# These parameters can be used to configure RSN parameters for STAs that support
# the override elements. The RSN parameters for STAs that do not support these
# mechanisms are configured in the referenced configuration parameters. The AP
# allows STAs to use either of the configured sets for negotiating RSN
# parameters.
#
# The main purpose of this mechanism is to make the AP look like it is using an
# older security mechanism (e.g., WPA2-Personal) to older STAs while allowing
# new stations use newer security mechanisms (e.g., WPA3-Personal) based on the
# override values. This might be needed to work around issues with deployed
# STAs that do not implement RSNE extensibility correctly and may fail to
# connect when the AP is using a transition mode like WPA3-Personal transition
# mode.
#
# Key management; see wpa_key_mgmt for RSNE configuration
#rsn_override_key_mgmt=<accepted key management algorithms>
#
# Pairwise cipher suites; see rsn_pairwise for RSNE configuration
#rsn_override_pairwise=<accepted cipher suites)
#
# Management frame protection (MFP/PMF); see ieee80211w for RSNE configuration
# 0 = disabled
# 1 = optional
# 2 = required
#rsn_override_mfp=<0/1/2>
#
# Second set of similar parameters. These are required to be used for
# Wi-Fi 7 (EHT/MLO) associations with RSN overriding and can optionally be used
# in cases that do not use Wi-Fi 7.
#rsn_override_key_mgmt_2
#rsn_override_pairwise_2
#rsn_override_mfp_2
#
# The RSNXE is normally included if any of the extended RSN capabilities is
# enabled/supported. When using RSN overriding, a separate RSNXOE is included
# and it may be more interoperable to omit the RSNXE completely. This
# configuration parameter can be used to do that.
# 0 = Include the RSNXE if any extended RSN capability is enabled/supported
#     (default).
# 1 = Do not include the RSNXE.
#rsn_override_omit_rsnxe=0
#
# Example configuration for WPA2-Personal/PMF-optional in RSNE and
# WPA3-Personal/PMF-required/MLO in override elements
#wpa_key_mgmt=WPA-PSK
#rsn_pairwise=CCMP
#ieee80211w=1
#rsn_override_key_mgmt=SAE
#rsn_override_pairwise=GCMP-256
#rsn_override_mfp=2
#rsn_override_key_mgmt_2=SAE-EXT-KEY
#rsn_override_pairwise_2=GCMP-256
#rsn_override_mfp_2=2
#beacon_prot=1
#sae_groups=19 20
#sae_require_mfp=1
#sae_pwe=2


##### IEEE 802.11r configuration ##############################################

# Mobility Domain identifier (dot11FTMobilityDomainID, MDID)
# MDID is used to indicate a group of APs (within an ESS, i.e., sharing the
# same SSID) between which a STA can use Fast BSS Transition.
# 2-octet identifier as a hex string.
#mobility_domain=a1b2

# PMK-R0 Key Holder identifier (dot11FTR0KeyHolderID)
# 1 to 48 octet identifier.
# This is configured with nas_identifier (see RADIUS client section above).

# Default lifetime of the PMK-R0 in seconds; range 60..4294967295
# (default: 14 days / 1209600 seconds; 0 = disable timeout)
# (dot11FTR0KeyLifetime)
#ft_r0_key_lifetime=1209600

# Maximum lifetime for PMK-R1; applied only if not zero
# PMK-R1 is removed at latest after this limit.
# Removing any PMK-R1 for expiry can be disabled by setting this to -1.
# (default: 0)
#r1_max_key_lifetime=0

# PMK-R1 Key Holder identifier (dot11FTR1KeyHolderID)
# 6-octet identifier as a hex string.
# Defaults to BSSID.
#r1_key_holder=000102030405

# Reassociation deadline in time units (TUs / 1.024 ms; range 1000..65535)
# (dot11FTReassociationDeadline)
#reassociation_deadline=1000

# List of R0KHs in the same Mobility Domain
# format: <MAC address> <NAS Identifier> <256-bit key as hex string>
# This list is used to map R0KH-ID (NAS Identifier) to a destination MAC
# address when requesting PMK-R1 key from the R0KH that the STA used during the
# Initial Mobility Domain Association.
#r0kh=02:01:02:03:04:05 r0kh-1.example.com 000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f
#r0kh=02:01:02:03:04:06 r0kh-2.example.com 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff
# And so on.. One line per R0KH.
# Wildcard entry:
# Upon receiving a response from R0KH, it will be added to this list, so
# subsequent requests won't be broadcast. If R0KH does not reply, it will be
# temporarily blocked (see rkh_neg_timeout).
#r0kh=ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff * 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff

# List of R1KHs in the same Mobility Domain
# format: <MAC address> <R1KH-ID> <256-bit key as hex string>
# This list is used to map R1KH-ID to a destination MAC address when sending
# PMK-R1 key from the R0KH. This is also the list of authorized R1KHs in the MD
# that can request PMK-R1 keys.
#r1kh=02:01:02:03:04:05 02:11:22:33:44:55 000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f
#r1kh=02:01:02:03:04:06 02:11:22:33:44:66 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff
# And so on.. One line per R1KH.
# Wildcard entry:
# Upon receiving a request from an R1KH not yet known, it will be added to this
# list and thus will receive push notifications.
#r1kh=00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:00:00 00112233445566778899aabbccddeeff

# Optionally, the list of RxKHs can be read from a text file. Format is the same
# as specified above. File shall contain both r0kh and r1kh. Once this variable
# is set, RxKHs can be reloaded at runtime without bringing down an interface
# using the RELOAD_RXKHS command.
#rxkh_file=<path>

# Timeout (seconds) for newly discovered R0KH/R1KH (see wildcard entries above)
# Special values: 0 -> do not expire
# Warning: do not cache implies no sequence number validation with wildcards
#rkh_pos_timeout=86400 (default = 1 day)

# Timeout (milliseconds) for requesting PMK-R1 from R0KH using PULL request
# and number of retries.
#rkh_pull_timeout=1000 (default = 1 second)
#rkh_pull_retries=4 (default)

# Timeout (seconds) for non replying R0KH (see wildcard entries above)
# Special values: 0 -> do not cache
# default: 60 seconds
#rkh_neg_timeout=60

# Note: The R0KH/R1KH keys used to be 128-bit in length before the message
# format was changed. That shorter key length is still supported for backwards
# compatibility of the configuration files. If such a shorter key is used, a
# 256-bit key is derived from it. For new deployments, configuring the 256-bit
# key is recommended.

# Whether PMK-R1 push is enabled at R0KH
# 0 = do not push PMK-R1 to all configured R1KHs (default)
# 1 = push PMK-R1 to all configured R1KHs whenever a new PMK-R0 is derived
#pmk_r1_push=1

# Whether to enable FT-over-DS
# 0 = FT-over-DS disabled
# 1 = FT-over-DS enabled (default)
#ft_over_ds=1

# Whether to generate FT response locally for PSK networks
# This avoids use of PMK-R1 push/pull from other APs with FT-PSK networks as
# the required information (PSK and other session data) is already locally
# available.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#ft_psk_generate_local=0

##### Neighbor table ##########################################################
# Maximum number of entries kept in AP table (either for neighbor table or for
# detecting Overlapping Legacy BSS Condition). The oldest entry will be
# removed when adding a new entry that would make the list grow over this
# limit. Note! WFA certification for IEEE 802.11g requires that OLBC is
# enabled, so this field should not be set to 0 when using IEEE 802.11g.
# default: 255
#ap_table_max_size=255

# Number of seconds of no frames received after which entries may be deleted
# from the AP table. Since passive scanning is not usually performed frequently
# this should not be set to very small value. In addition, there is no
# guarantee that every scan cycle will receive beacon frames from the
# neighboring APs.
# default: 60
#ap_table_expiration_time=3600

# Maximum number of stations to track on the operating channel
# This can be used to detect dualband capable stations before they have
# associated, e.g., to provide guidance on which colocated BSS to use.
# Default: 0 (disabled)
#track_sta_max_num=100

# Maximum age of a station tracking entry in seconds
# Default: 180
#track_sta_max_age=180

# Do not reply to group-addressed Probe Request from a station that was seen on
# another radio.
# Default: Disabled
#
# This can be used with enabled track_sta_max_num configuration on another
# interface controlled by the same hostapd process to restrict Probe Request
# frame handling from replying to group-addressed Probe Request frames from a
# station that has been detected to be capable of operating on another band,
# e.g., to try to reduce likelihood of the station selecting a 2.4 GHz BSS when
# the AP operates both a 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz BSS concurrently.
#
# Note: Enabling this can cause connectivity issues and increase latency for
# discovering the AP.
#no_probe_resp_if_seen_on=wlan1

# Reject authentication from a station that was seen on another radio.
# Default: Disabled
#
# This can be used with enabled track_sta_max_num configuration on another
# interface controlled by the same hostapd process to reject authentication
# attempts from a station that has been detected to be capable of operating on
# another band, e.g., to try to reduce likelihood of the station selecting a
# 2.4 GHz BSS when the AP operates both a 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz BSS concurrently.
#
# Note: Enabling this can cause connectivity issues and increase latency for
# connecting with the AP.
#no_auth_if_seen_on=wlan1

##### Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) #############################################

# WPS state
# 0 = WPS disabled (default)
# 1 = WPS enabled, not configured
# 2 = WPS enabled, configured
#wps_state=2

# Whether to manage this interface independently from other WPS interfaces
# By default, a single hostapd process applies WPS operations to all configured
# interfaces. This parameter can be used to disable that behavior for a subset
# of interfaces. If this is set to non-zero for an interface, WPS commands
# issued on that interface do not apply to other interfaces and WPS operations
# performed on other interfaces do not affect this interface.
#wps_independent=0

# AP can be configured into a locked state where new WPS Registrar are not
# accepted, but previously authorized Registrars (including the internal one)
# can continue to add new Enrollees.
#ap_setup_locked=1

# Universally Unique IDentifier (UUID; see RFC 4122) of the device
# This value is used as the UUID for the internal WPS Registrar. If the AP
# is also using UPnP, this value should be set to the device's UPnP UUID.
# If not configured, UUID will be generated based on the local MAC address.
#uuid=12345678-9abc-def0-1234-56789abcdef0

# Note: If wpa_psk_file is set, WPS is used to generate random, per-device PSKs
# that will be appended to the wpa_psk_file. If wpa_psk_file is not set, the
# default PSK (wpa_psk/wpa_passphrase) will be delivered to Enrollees. Use of
# per-device PSKs is recommended as the more secure option (i.e., make sure to
# set wpa_psk_file when using WPS with WPA-PSK).

# When an Enrollee requests access to the network with PIN method, the Enrollee
# PIN will need to be entered for the Registrar. PIN request notifications are
# sent to hostapd ctrl_iface monitor. In addition, they can be written to a
# text file that could be used, e.g., to populate the AP administration UI with
# pending PIN requests. If the following variable is set, the PIN requests will
# be written to the configured file.
#wps_pin_requests=/var/run/hostapd_wps_pin_requests

# Device Name
# User-friendly description of device; up to 32 octets encoded in UTF-8
#device_name=Wireless AP

# Manufacturer
# The manufacturer of the device (up to 64 ASCII characters)
#manufacturer=Company

# Model Name
# Model of the device (up to 32 ASCII characters)
#model_name=WAP

# Model Number
# Additional device description (up to 32 ASCII characters)
#model_number=123

# Serial Number
# Serial number of the device (up to 32 characters)
#serial_number=12345

# Primary Device Type
# Used format: <categ>-<OUI>-<subcateg>
# categ = Category as an integer value
# OUI = OUI and type octet as a 4-octet hex-encoded value; 0050F204 for
#       default WPS OUI
# subcateg = OUI-specific Sub Category as an integer value
# Examples:
#   1-0050F204-1 (Computer / PC)
#   1-0050F204-2 (Computer / Server)
#   5-0050F204-1 (Storage / NAS)
#   6-0050F204-1 (Network Infrastructure / AP)
#device_type=6-0050F204-1

# OS Version
# 4-octet operating system version number (hex string)
#os_version=01020300

# Config Methods
# List of the supported configuration methods
# Available methods: usba ethernet label display ext_nfc_token int_nfc_token
#	nfc_interface push_button keypad virtual_display physical_display
#	virtual_push_button physical_push_button
#config_methods=label virtual_display virtual_push_button keypad

# WPS capability discovery workaround for PBC with Windows 7
# Windows 7 uses incorrect way of figuring out AP's WPS capabilities by acting
# as a Registrar and using M1 from the AP. The config methods attribute in that
# message is supposed to indicate only the configuration method supported by
# the AP in Enrollee role, i.e., to add an external Registrar. For that case,
# PBC shall not be used and as such, the PushButton config method is removed
# from M1 by default. If pbc_in_m1=1 is included in the configuration file,
# the PushButton config method is left in M1 (if included in config_methods
# parameter) to allow Windows 7 to use PBC instead of PIN (e.g., from a label
# in the AP).
#pbc_in_m1=1

# Static access point PIN for initial configuration and adding Registrars
# If not set, hostapd will not allow external WPS Registrars to control the
# access point. The AP PIN can also be set at runtime with hostapd_cli
# wps_ap_pin command. Use of temporary (enabled by user action) and random
# AP PIN is much more secure than configuring a static AP PIN here. As such,
# use of the ap_pin parameter is not recommended if the AP device has means for
# displaying a random PIN.
#ap_pin=12345670

# Skip building of automatic WPS credential
# This can be used to allow the automatically generated Credential attribute to
# be replaced with pre-configured Credential(s).
#skip_cred_build=1

# Additional Credential attribute(s)
# This option can be used to add pre-configured Credential attributes into M8
# message when acting as a Registrar. If skip_cred_build=1, this data will also
# be able to override the Credential attribute that would have otherwise been
# automatically generated based on network configuration. This configuration
# option points to an external file that much contain the WPS Credential
# attribute(s) as binary data.
#extra_cred=hostapd.cred

# Credential processing
#   0 = process received credentials internally (default)
#   1 = do not process received credentials; just pass them over ctrl_iface to
#	external program(s)
#   2 = process received credentials internally and pass them over ctrl_iface
#	to external program(s)
# Note: With wps_cred_processing=1, skip_cred_build should be set to 1 and
# extra_cred be used to provide the Credential data for Enrollees.
#
# wps_cred_processing=1 will disabled automatic updates of hostapd.conf file
# both for Credential processing and for marking AP Setup Locked based on
# validation failures of AP PIN. An external program is responsible on updating
# the configuration appropriately in this case.
#wps_cred_processing=0

# Whether to enable SAE (WPA3-Personal transition mode) automatically for
# WPA2-PSK credentials received using WPS.
# 0 = only add the explicitly listed WPA2-PSK configuration (default)
# 1 = add both the WPA2-PSK and SAE configuration and enable PMF so that the
#     AP gets configured in WPA3-Personal transition mode (supports both
#     WPA2-Personal (PSK) and WPA3-Personal (SAE) clients).
#wps_cred_add_sae=0

# AP Settings Attributes for M7
# By default, hostapd generates the AP Settings Attributes for M7 based on the
# current configuration. It is possible to override this by providing a file
# with pre-configured attributes. This is similar to extra_cred file format,
# but the AP Settings attributes are not encapsulated in a Credential
# attribute.
#ap_settings=hostapd.ap_settings

# Multi-AP backhaul BSS config
# Used in WPS when multi_ap=2 or 3. Defines "backhaul BSS" credentials.
# These are passed in WPS M8 instead of the normal (fronthaul) credentials
# if the Enrollee has the Multi-AP subelement set. Backhaul SSID is formatted
# like ssid2. The key is set like wpa_psk or wpa_passphrase.
#multi_ap_backhaul_ssid="backhaul"
#multi_ap_backhaul_wpa_psk=0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef0123456789abcdef
#multi_ap_backhaul_wpa_passphrase=secret passphrase

# Multi-AP Profile
# Indicate the supported Multi-AP profile (default: 2)
# 1 = Supports Multi-AP profile 1 as defined in Wi-Fi EasyMesh specification
# 2 = Supports Multi-AP profile 2 as defined in Wi-Fi EasyMesh specification
#multi_ap_profile=2

# Multi-AP client disallow
# Used to disallow profile specific backhaul STA association
# Bitmap of the disallowed Profile-X profiles
# 1 = Profile-1 Backhaul STA association disallowed
# 2 = Profile-2 Backhaul STA association disallowed
#multi_ap_client_disallow=0

# Multi-AP VLAN ID
# A valid non-zero VLAN ID will be used to update Default IEEE 802.1Q Setting
#multi_ap_vlanid=0

# WPS UPnP interface
# If set, support for external Registrars is enabled.
#upnp_iface=br0

# Friendly Name (required for UPnP)
# Short description for end use. Should be less than 64 characters.
#friendly_name=WPS Access Point

# Manufacturer URL (optional for UPnP)
#manufacturer_url=http://www.example.com/

# Model Description (recommended for UPnP)
# Long description for end user. Should be less than 128 characters.
#model_description=Wireless Access Point

# Model URL (optional for UPnP)
#model_url=http://www.example.com/model/

# Universal Product Code (optional for UPnP)
# 12-digit, all-numeric code that identifies the consumer package.
#upc=123456789012

# WPS RF Bands (a = 5G, b = 2.4G, g = 2.4G, ag = dual band, ad = 60 GHz)
# This value should be set according to RF band(s) supported by the AP if
# hw_mode is not set. For dual band dual concurrent devices, this needs to be
# set to ag to allow both RF bands to be advertized.
#wps_rf_bands=ag

# NFC password token for WPS
# These parameters can be used to configure a fixed NFC password token for the
# AP. This can be generated, e.g., with nfc_pw_token from wpa_supplicant. When
# these parameters are used, the AP is assumed to be deployed with a NFC tag
# that includes the matching NFC password token (e.g., written based on the
# NDEF record from nfc_pw_token).
#
#wps_nfc_dev_pw_id: Device Password ID (16..65535)
#wps_nfc_dh_pubkey: Hexdump of DH Public Key
#wps_nfc_dh_privkey: Hexdump of DH Private Key
#wps_nfc_dev_pw: Hexdump of Device Password

# Application Extension attribute for Beacon and Probe Response frames
# This parameter can be used to add application extension into WPS IE. The
# contents of this parameter starts with 16-octet (32 hexdump characters) of
# UUID to identify the specific application and that is followed by the actual
# application specific data.
#wps_application_ext=<hexdump>

##### Wi-Fi Direct (P2P) ######################################################

# Enable P2P Device management
#manage_p2p=1

# Allow cross connection
#allow_cross_connection=1

##### Device Provisioning Protocol (DPP) ######################################

# Name for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request
#dpp_name=Test

# MUD URL for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request (optional)
#dpp_mud_url=https://example.com/mud

# JSON node name of additional data for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request
#dpp_extra_conf_req_name=org.example

# JSON node data of additional data for Enrollee's DPP Configuration Request
#dpp_extra_conf_req_value="abc":123

#dpp_connector
#dpp_netaccesskey
#dpp_netaccesskey_expiry
#dpp_csign
#dpp_controller

# DPP Relay port number
# TCP port to listen to for incoming connections from a Controller. This can be
# used to allow Controller initiated exchanges in addition to the
# Controller-as-responder cases covered by the dpp_controller parameter.
#dpp_relay_port=12345

# Configurator Connectivity indication
# 0: no Configurator is currently connected (default)
# 1: advertise that a Configurator is available
#dpp_configurator_connectivity=0

# DPP PFS
# 0: allow PFS to be used or not used (default)
# 1: require PFS to be used (note: not compatible with DPP R1)
# 2: do not allow PFS to be used
#dpp_pfs=0

#### TDLS (IEEE 802.11z-2010) #################################################

# Prohibit use of TDLS in this BSS
#tdls_prohibit=1

# Prohibit use of TDLS Channel Switching in this BSS
#tdls_prohibit_chan_switch=1

##### IEEE 802.11v-2011 #######################################################

# Time advertisement
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 2 = UTC time at which the TSF timer is 0
#time_advertisement=2

# Local time zone as specified in 8.3 of IEEE Std 1003.1-2004:
# stdoffset[dst[offset][,start[/time],end[/time]]]
#time_zone=EST5

# WNM-Sleep Mode (extended sleep mode for stations)
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled (allow stations to use WNM-Sleep Mode)
#wnm_sleep_mode=1

# WNM-Sleep Mode GTK/IGTK workaround
# Normally, WNM-Sleep Mode exit with management frame protection negotiated
# would result in the current GTK/IGTK getting added into the WNM-Sleep Mode
# Response frame. Some station implementations may have a vulnerability that
# results in GTK/IGTK reinstallation based on this frame being replayed. This
# configuration parameter can be used to disable that behavior and use EAPOL-Key
# frames for GTK/IGTK update instead. This would likely be only used with
# wpa_disable_eapol_key_retries=1 that enables a workaround for similar issues
# with EAPOL-Key. This is related to station side vulnerabilities CVE-2017-13087
# and CVE-2017-13088. To enable this AP-side workaround, set the parameter to 1.
#wnm_sleep_mode_no_keys=0

# BSS Transition Management
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#bss_transition=1

# Proxy ARP
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#proxy_arp=1

# IPv6 Neighbor Advertisement multicast-to-unicast conversion
# This can be used with Proxy ARP to allow multicast NAs to be forwarded to
# associated STAs using link layer unicast delivery.
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#na_mcast_to_ucast=0

##### IEEE 802.11u-2011 #######################################################

# Enable Interworking service
#interworking=0

# Access Network Type
# 0 = Private network
# 1 = Private network with guest access
# 2 = Chargeable public network
# 3 = Free public network
# 4 = Personal device network
# 5 = Emergency services only network
# 14 = Test or experimental
# 15 = Wildcard
#access_network_type=0

# Whether the network provides connectivity to the Internet
# 0 = Unspecified
# 1 = Network provides connectivity to the Internet
#internet=1

# Additional Step Required for Access
# Note: This is only used with open network, i.e., ASRA shall ne set to 0 if
# RSN is used.
#asra=0

# Emergency services reachable
#esr=0

# Unauthenticated emergency service accessible
#uesa=0

# Venue Info (optional)
# The available values are defined in IEEE Std 802.11u-2011, 7.3.1.34.
# Example values (group,type):
# 0,0 = Unspecified
# 1,7 = Convention Center
# 1,13 = Coffee Shop
# 2,0 = Unspecified Business
# 7,1  Private Residence
#venue_group=7
#venue_type=1

# Homogeneous ESS identifier (optional; dot11HESSID)
# If set, this shall be identifical to one of the BSSIDs in the homogeneous
# ESS and this shall be set to the same value across all BSSs in homogeneous
# ESS.
#hessid=02:03:04:05:06:07

# Roaming Consortium List
# Arbitrary number of Roaming Consortium OIs can be configured with each line
# adding a new OI to the list. The first three entries are available through
# Beacon and Probe Response frames. Any additional entry will be available only
# through ANQP queries. Each OI is between 3 and 15 octets and is configured as
# a hexstring.
#roaming_consortium=021122
#roaming_consortium=2233445566

# Venue Name information
# This parameter can be used to configure one or more Venue Name Duples for
# Venue Name ANQP information. Each entry has a two or three character language
# code (ISO-639) separated by colon from the venue name string.
# Note that venue_group and venue_type have to be set for Venue Name
# information to be complete.
#venue_name=eng:Example venue
#venue_name=fin:Esimerkkipaikka
# Alternative format for language:value strings:
# (double quoted string, printf-escaped string)
#venue_name=P"eng:Example\nvenue"

# Venue URL information
# This parameter can be used to configure one or more Venue URL Duples to
# provide additional information corresponding to Venue Name information.
# Each entry has a Venue Number value separated by colon from the Venue URL
# string. Venue Number indicates the corresponding venue_name entry (1 = 1st
# venue_name, 2 = 2nd venue_name, and so on; 0 = no matching venue_name)
#venue_url=1:http://www.example.com/info-eng
#venue_url=2:http://www.example.com/info-fin

# Network Authentication Type
# This parameter indicates what type of network authentication is used in the
# network.
# format: <network auth type indicator (1-octet hex str)> [redirect URL]
# Network Authentication Type Indicator values:
# 00 = Acceptance of terms and conditions
# 01 = On-line enrollment supported
# 02 = http/https redirection
# 03 = DNS redirection
#network_auth_type=00
#network_auth_type=02http://www.example.com/redirect/me/here/

# IP Address Type Availability
# format: <1-octet encoded value as hex str>
# (ipv4_type & 0x3f) << 2 | (ipv6_type & 0x3)
# ipv4_type:
# 0 = Address type not available
# 1 = Public IPv4 address available
# 2 = Port-restricted IPv4 address available
# 3 = Single NATed private IPv4 address available
# 4 = Double NATed private IPv4 address available
# 5 = Port-restricted IPv4 address and single NATed IPv4 address available
# 6 = Port-restricted IPv4 address and double NATed IPv4 address available
# 7 = Availability of the address type is not known
# ipv6_type:
# 0 = Address type not available
# 1 = Address type available
# 2 = Availability of the address type not known
#ipaddr_type_availability=14

# Domain Name
# format: <variable-octet str>[,<variable-octet str>]
#domain_name=example.com,another.example.com,yet-another.example.com

# 3GPP Cellular Network information
# format: <MCC1,MNC1>[;<MCC2,MNC2>][;...]
#anqp_3gpp_cell_net=244,91;310,026;234,56

# NAI Realm information
# One or more realm can be advertised. Each nai_realm line adds a new realm to
# the set. These parameters provide information for stations using Interworking
# network selection to allow automatic connection to a network based on
# credentials.
# format: <encoding>,<NAI Realm(s)>[,<EAP Method 1>][,<EAP Method 2>][,...]
# encoding:
#	0 = Realm formatted in accordance with IETF RFC 4282
#	1 = UTF-8 formatted character string that is not formatted in
#	    accordance with IETF RFC 4282
# NAI Realm(s): Semi-colon delimited NAI Realm(s)
# EAP Method: <EAP Method>[:<[AuthParam1:Val1]>][<[AuthParam2:Val2]>][...]
# EAP Method types, see:
# http://www.iana.org/assignments/eap-numbers/eap-numbers.xhtml#eap-numbers-4
# AuthParam (Table 8-188 in IEEE Std 802.11-2012):
# ID 2 = Non-EAP Inner Authentication Type
#	1 = PAP, 2 = CHAP, 3 = MSCHAP, 4 = MSCHAPV2
# ID 3 = Inner authentication EAP Method Type
# ID 5 = Credential Type
#	1 = SIM, 2 = USIM, 3 = NFC Secure Element, 4 = Hardware Token,
#	5 = Softoken, 6 = Certificate, 7 = username/password, 9 = Anonymous,
#	10 = Vendor Specific
#nai_realm=0,example.com;example.net
# EAP methods EAP-TLS with certificate and EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 with
# username/password
#nai_realm=0,example.org,13[5:6],21[2:4][5:7]

# Arbitrary ANQP-element configuration
# Additional ANQP-elements with arbitrary values can be defined by specifying
# their contents in raw format as a hexdump of the payload. Note that these
# values will override ANQP-element contents that may have been specified in the
# more higher layer configuration parameters listed above.
# format: anqp_elem=<InfoID>:<hexdump of payload>
# For example, AP Geospatial Location ANQP-element with unknown location:
#anqp_elem=265:0000
# For example, AP Civic Location ANQP-element with unknown location:
#anqp_elem=266:000000

# GAS Address 3 behavior
# 0 = P2P specification (Address3 = AP BSSID) workaround enabled by default
#     based on GAS request Address3
# 1 = IEEE 802.11 standard compliant regardless of GAS request Address3
# 2 = Force non-compliant behavior (Address3 = AP BSSID for all cases)
#gas_address3=0

# QoS Map Set configuration
#
# Comma delimited QoS Map Set in decimal values
# (see IEEE Std 802.11-2012, 8.4.2.97)
#
# format:
# [<DSCP Exceptions[DSCP,UP]>,]<UP 0 range[low,high]>,...<UP 7 range[low,high]>
#
# There can be up to 21 optional DSCP Exceptions which are pairs of DSCP Value
# (0..63 or 255) and User Priority (0..7). This is followed by eight DSCP Range
# descriptions with DSCP Low Value and DSCP High Value pairs (0..63 or 255) for
# each UP starting from 0. If both low and high value are set to 255, the
# corresponding UP is not used.
#
# default: not set
#qos_map_set=53,2,22,6,8,15,0,7,255,255,16,31,32,39,255,255,40,47,255,255

##### Hotspot 2.0 #############################################################

# Enable Hotspot 2.0 support
#hs20=1

# Disable Downstream Group-Addressed Forwarding (DGAF)
# This can be used to configure a network where no group-addressed frames are
# allowed. The AP will not forward any group-address frames to the stations and
# random GTKs are issued for each station to prevent associated stations from
# forging such frames to other stations in the BSS.
#disable_dgaf=1

# OSU Server-Only Authenticated L2 Encryption Network
#osen=1

# ANQP Domain ID (0..65535)
# An identifier for a set of APs in an ESS that share the same common ANQP
# information. 0 = Some of the ANQP information is unique to this AP (default).
#anqp_domain_id=1234

# Deauthentication request timeout
# If the RADIUS server indicates that the station is not allowed to connect to
# the BSS/ESS, the AP can allow the station some time to download a
# notification page (URL included in the message). This parameter sets that
# timeout in seconds. If the RADIUS server provides no URL, this value is
# reduced to two seconds with an additional trigger for immediate
# deauthentication when the STA acknowledges reception of the deauthentication
# imminent indication. Note that setting this value to 0 will prevent delivery
# of the notification to the STA, so a value of at least 1 should be used here
# for normal use cases.
#hs20_deauth_req_timeout=60

# Operator Friendly Name
# This parameter can be used to configure one or more Operator Friendly Name
# Duples. Each entry has a two or three character language code (ISO-639)
# separated by colon from the operator friendly name string.
#hs20_oper_friendly_name=eng:Example operator
#hs20_oper_friendly_name=fin:Esimerkkioperaattori

# Connection Capability
# This can be used to advertise what type of IP traffic can be sent through the
# hotspot (e.g., due to firewall allowing/blocking protocols/ports).
# format: <IP Protocol>:<Port Number>:<Status>
# IP Protocol: 1 = ICMP, 6 = TCP, 17 = UDP
# Port Number: 0..65535
# Status: 0 = Closed, 1 = Open, 2 = Unknown
# Each hs20_conn_capab line is added to the list of advertised tuples.
#hs20_conn_capab=1:0:2
#hs20_conn_capab=6:22:1
#hs20_conn_capab=17:5060:0

# WAN Metrics
# format: <WAN Info>:<DL Speed>:<UL Speed>:<DL Load>:<UL Load>:<LMD>
# WAN Info: B0-B1: Link Status, B2: Symmetric Link, B3: At Capabity
#    (encoded as two hex digits)
#    Link Status: 1 = Link up, 2 = Link down, 3 = Link in test state
# Downlink Speed: Estimate of WAN backhaul link current downlink speed in kbps;
#	1..4294967295; 0 = unknown
# Uplink Speed: Estimate of WAN backhaul link current uplink speed in kbps
#	1..4294967295; 0 = unknown
# Downlink Load: Current load of downlink WAN connection (scaled to 255 = 100%)
# Uplink Load: Current load of uplink WAN connection (scaled to 255 = 100%)
# Load Measurement Duration: Duration for measuring downlink/uplink load in
# tenths of a second (1..65535); 0 if load cannot be determined
#hs20_wan_metrics=01:8000:1000:80:240:3000

# Operating Class Indication
# List of operating classes the BSSes in this ESS use. The Global operating
# classes in Table E-4 of IEEE Std 802.11-2012 Annex E define the values that
# can be used in this.
# format: hexdump of operating class octets
# for example, operating classes 81 (2.4 GHz channels 1-13) and 115 (5 GHz
# channels 36-48):
#hs20_operating_class=5173

# Terms and Conditions information
#
# hs20_t_c_filename contains the Terms and Conditions filename that the AP
# indicates in RADIUS Access-Request messages.
#hs20_t_c_filename=terms-and-conditions
#
# hs20_t_c_timestamp contains the Terms and Conditions timestamp that the AP
# indicates in RADIUS Access-Request messages. Usually, this contains the number
# of seconds since January 1, 1970 00:00 UTC showing the time when the file was
# last modified.
#hs20_t_c_timestamp=1234567
#
# hs20_t_c_server_url contains a template for the Terms and Conditions server
# URL. This template is used to generate the URL for a STA that needs to
# acknowledge Terms and Conditions. Unlike the other hs20_t_c_* parameters, this
# parameter is used on the authentication server, not the AP.
# Macros:
# @1@ = MAC address of the STA (colon separated hex octets)
#hs20_t_c_server_url=https://example.com/t_and_c?addr=@1@&ap=123

# OSU and Operator icons
# <Icon Width>:<Icon Height>:<Language code>:<Icon Type>:<Name>:<file path>
#hs20_icon=32:32:eng:image/png:icon32:/tmp/icon32.png
#hs20_icon=64:64:eng:image/png:icon64:/tmp/icon64.png

# OSU SSID (see ssid2 for format description)
# This is the SSID used for all OSU connections to all the listed OSU Providers.
#osu_ssid="example"

# OSU Providers
# One or more sets of following parameter. Each OSU provider is started by the
# mandatory osu_server_uri item. The other parameters add information for the
# last added OSU provider. osu_nai specifies the OSU_NAI value for OSEN
# authentication when using a standalone OSU BSS. osu_nai2 specifies the OSU_NAI
# value for OSEN authentication when using a shared BSS (Single SSID) for OSU.
#
#osu_server_uri=https://example.com/osu/
#osu_friendly_name=eng:Example operator
#osu_friendly_name=fin:Esimerkkipalveluntarjoaja
#[email protected]
#[email protected]
#osu_method_list=1 0
#osu_icon=icon32
#osu_icon=icon64
#osu_service_desc=eng:Example services
#osu_service_desc=fin:Esimerkkipalveluja
#
#osu_server_uri=...

# Operator Icons
# Operator icons are specified using references to the hs20_icon entries
# (Name subfield). This information, if present, is advertsised in the
# Operator Icon Metadata ANQO-element.
#operator_icon=icon32
#operator_icon=icon64

##### Multiband Operation (MBO) ###############################################
#
# MBO enabled
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = enabled
#mbo=1
#
# Cellular data connection preference
# 0 = Excluded - AP does not want STA to use the cellular data connection
# 1 = AP prefers the STA not to use cellular data connection
# 255 = AP prefers the STA to use cellular data connection
#mbo_cell_data_conn_pref=1

##### Optimized Connectivity Experience (OCE) #################################
#
# Enable OCE specific features (bitmap)
# BIT(0) - Reserved
# Set BIT(1) (= 2) to enable OCE in STA-CFON mode
# Set BIT(2) (= 4) to enable OCE in AP mode
# Default is 0 = OCE disabled
#oce=0

# RSSI-based association rejection
#
# Reject STA association if RSSI is below given threshold (in dBm)
# Allowed range: -60 to -90 dBm; default = 0 (rejection disabled)
# Note: This rejection happens based on a signal strength detected while
# receiving a single frame and as such, there is significant risk of the value
# not being accurate and this resulting in valid stations being rejected. As
# such, this functionality is not recommended to be used for purposes other than
# testing.
#rssi_reject_assoc_rssi=-75
#
# Association retry delay in seconds allowed by the STA if RSSI has not met the
# threshold (range: 0..255, default=30).
#rssi_reject_assoc_timeout=30

# Ignore Probe Request frames if RSSI is below given threshold (in dBm)
# Allowed range: -60 to -90 dBm; default = 0 (rejection disabled)
#rssi_ignore_probe_request=-75

##### Fast Session Transfer (FST) support #####################################
#
# The options in this section are only available when the build configuration
# option CONFIG_FST is set while compiling hostapd. They allow this interface
# to be a part of FST setup.
#
# FST is the transfer of a session from a channel to another channel, in the
# same or different frequency bands.
#
# For detals, see IEEE Std 802.11ad-2012.

# Identifier of an FST Group the interface belongs to.
#fst_group_id=bond0

# Interface priority within the FST Group.
# Announcing a higher priority for an interface means declaring it more
# preferable for FST switch.
# fst_priority is in 1..255 range with 1 being the lowest priority.
#fst_priority=100

# Default LLT value for this interface in milliseconds. The value used in case
# no value provided during session setup. Default is 50 ms.
# fst_llt is in 1..4294967 range (due to spec limitation, see 10.32.2.2
# Transitioning between states).
#fst_llt=100

##### Radio measurements / location ###########################################

# The content of a LCI measurement subelement
#lci=<Hexdump of binary data of the LCI report>

# The content of a location civic measurement subelement
#civic=<Hexdump of binary data of the location civic report>

# Enable neighbor report via radio measurements
#rrm_neighbor_report=1

# Enable link measurement report via radio measurements
#rrm_link_measurement_report=1

# Enable beacon report via radio measurements
#rrm_beacon_report=1

# Publish fine timing measurement (FTM) responder functionality
# This parameter only controls publishing via Extended Capabilities element.
# Actual functionality is managed outside hostapd.
#ftm_responder=0

# Publish fine timing measurement (FTM) initiator functionality
# This parameter only controls publishing via Extended Capabilities element.
# Actual functionality is managed outside hostapd.
#ftm_initiator=0
#
# Stationary AP config indicates that the AP doesn't move hence location data
# can be considered as always up to date. If configured, LCI data will be sent
# as a radio measurement even if the request doesn't contain a max age element
# that allows sending of such data. Default: 0.
stationary_ap=1

# Enable reduced neighbor reporting (RNR)
#rnr=0

##### Airtime policy configuration ###########################################

# Set the airtime policy operating mode:
# 0 = disabled (default)
# 1 = static config
# 2 = per-BSS dynamic config
# 3 = per-BSS limit mode
#airtime_mode=0

# Interval (in milliseconds) to poll the kernel for updated station activity in
# dynamic and limit modes
#airtime_update_interval=200

# Static configuration of station weights (when airtime_mode=1). Kernel default
# weight is 256; set higher for larger airtime share, lower for smaller share.
# Each entry is a MAC address followed by a weight.
#airtime_sta_weight=02:01:02:03:04:05 256
#airtime_sta_weight=02:01:02:03:04:06 512

# Per-BSS airtime weight. In multi-BSS mode, set for each BSS and hostapd will
# configure station weights to enforce the correct ratio between BSS weights
# depending on the number of active stations. The *ratios* between different
# BSSes is what's important, not the absolute numbers.
# Must be set for all BSSes if airtime_mode=2 or 3, has no effect otherwise.
#airtime_bss_weight=1

# Whether the current BSS should be limited (when airtime_mode=3).
#
# If set, the BSS weight ratio will be applied in the case where the current BSS
# would exceed the share defined by the BSS weight ratio. E.g., if two BSSes are
# set to the same weights, and one is set to limited, the limited BSS will get
# no more than half the available airtime, but if the non-limited BSS has more
# stations active, that *will* be allowed to exceed its half of the available
# airtime.
#airtime_bss_limit=1

##### EDMG support ############################################################
#
# Enable EDMG capability for AP mode in the 60 GHz band. Default value is false.
# To configure channel bonding for an EDMG AP use edmg_channel below.
# If enable_edmg is set and edmg_channel is not set, EDMG CB1 will be
# configured.
#enable_edmg=1
#
# Configure channel bonding for AP mode in the 60 GHz band.
# This parameter is relevant only if enable_edmg is set.
# Default value is 0 (no channel bonding).
#edmg_channel=9

##### TESTING OPTIONS #########################################################
#
# The options in this section are only available when the build configuration
# option CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS is set while compiling hostapd. They allow
# testing some scenarios that are otherwise difficult to reproduce.
#
# Ignore probe requests sent to hostapd with the given probability, must be a
# floating point number in the range [0, 1).
#ignore_probe_probability=0.0
#
# Ignore authentication frames with the given probability
#ignore_auth_probability=0.0
#
# Ignore association requests with the given probability
#ignore_assoc_probability=0.0
#
# Ignore reassociation requests with the given probability
#ignore_reassoc_probability=0.0
#
# Corrupt Key MIC in GTK rekey EAPOL-Key frames with the given probability
#corrupt_gtk_rekey_mic_probability=0.0
#
# Include only ECSA IE without CSA IE where possible
# (channel switch operating class is needed)
#ecsa_ie_only=0
#
# Include only CSA IE without ECSA IE
# (the operating class is not mentioned)
#csa_ie_only=0

# Delay EAPOL-Key messages 1/4 and 3/4 by not sending the frame until the last
# attempt (wpa_pairwise_update_count). This will trigger a timeout on all
# previous attempts and thus delays the frame. (testing only)
#delay_eapol_tx=0
#
# Additional elements for Probe Response frames.
# This parameter can be used to add additional element(s) to the end of the
# Probe Response frames. The format for these element(s) is a hexdump of the
# raw information elements (id+len+payload for one or more elements).
# These elements are added after the 'vendor_elements'.
#presp_elements=

##### Multiple BSSID support ##################################################
#
# Above configuration is using the default interface (wlan#, or multi-SSID VLAN
# interfaces). Other BSSIDs can be added by using separator 'bss' with
# default interface name to be allocated for the data packets of the new BSS.
#
# hostapd will generate BSSID mask based on the BSSIDs that are
# configured. hostapd will verify that dev_addr & MASK == dev_addr. If this is
# not the case, the MAC address of the radio must be changed before starting
# hostapd (ifconfig wlan0 hw ether <MAC addr>). If a BSSID is configured for
# every secondary BSS, this limitation is not applied at hostapd and other
# masks may be used if the driver supports them (e.g., swap the locally
# administered bit)
#
# BSSIDs are assigned in order to each BSS, unless an explicit BSSID is
# specified using the 'bssid' parameter.
# If an explicit BSSID is specified, it must be chosen such that it:
# - results in a valid MASK that covers it and the dev_addr
# - is not the same as the MAC address of the radio
# - is not the same as any other explicitly specified BSSID
#
# Alternatively, the 'use_driver_iface_addr' parameter can be used to request
# hostapd to use the driver auto-generated interface address (e.g., to use the
# exact MAC addresses allocated to the device).
#
# Not all drivers support multiple BSSes. The exact mechanism for determining
# the driver capabilities is driver specific. With the current (i.e., a recent
# kernel) drivers using nl80211, this information can be checked with "iw list"
# (search for "valid interface combinations").
#
# Please note that hostapd uses some of the values configured for the first BSS
# as the defaults for the following BSSes. However, it is recommended that all
# BSSes include explicit configuration of all relevant configuration items.
#
#bss=wlan0_0
#ssid=test2
# most of the above items can be used here (apart from radio interface specific
# items, like channel)

#bss=wlan0_1
#bssid=00:13:10:95:fe:0b
# ...
#
# Multiple BSSID Advertisement in IEEE 802.11ax
# IEEE Std 802.11ax-2021 added a feature where instead of multiple interfaces
# on a common radio transmitting individual Beacon frames, those interfaces can
# form a set with a common Beacon frame transmitted for all. The interface
# which is brought up first is called the transmitting profile of the MBSSID
# set which transmits the Beacon frames. The remaining interfaces are called
# the non-transmitting profiles and these are advertised inside the Multiple
# BSSID element in the Beacon and Probe Response frames from the first
# interface.
#
# The transmitting interface is visible to all stations in the vicinity, however
# the stations that do not support parsing of the Multiple BSSID element will
# not be able to connect to the non-transmitting interfaces.
#
# Enhanced Multiple BSSID Advertisements (EMA)
# When enabled, the non-transmitting interfaces are split into multiple
# Beacon frames. The number of Beacon frames required to cover all the
# non-transmitting profiles is called the profile periodicity.
#
# Refer to IEEE Std 802.11-2020 for details regarding the procedure and
# required MAC address assignment.
#
# Following configuration is per radio.
# 0 = Disabled (default)
# 1 = Multiple BSSID advertisement enabled.
# 2 = Enhanced multiple BSSID advertisement enabled.
#mbssid=0
#
# Maximum number of BSSs that can be added into a Multiple BSSID set
# This is a radio level parameter. If not set (or 0), the maximum is determined
# automatically based on the configured BSSs which may limit dynamic addition
# of new BSSs.
#mbssid_max=0
#
# Multiple BSSID Index override
# This is a BSS level parameter. If not set (or 0), the BSSID index is
# determined automatically based on the configured BSSs which may limit dynamic
# addition of new BSSs.
#mbssid_index=0
#
# The transmitting interface should be added with the 'interface' option while
# the non-transmitting interfaces should be added using the 'bss' option.
# Security configuration should be added separately per interface, if required.
#
# Example:
#mbssid=2
#interface=wlan2
#ctrl_interface=/var/run/hostapd
#wpa_passphrase=0123456789
#ieee80211w=2
#sae_pwe=1
#auth_algs=1
#wpa=2
#wpa_pairwise=CCMP
#ssid=<SSID-0>
#bridge=br-lan
#wpa_key_mgmt=SAE
#bssid=00:03:7f:12:84:84
#
#bss=wlan2-1
#ctrl_interface=/var/run/hostapd
#wpa_passphrase=0123456789
#ieee80211w=2
#sae_pwe=1
#auth_algs=1
#wpa=2
#wpa_pairwise=CCMP
#ssid=<SSID-1>
#bridge=br-lan
#wpa_key_mgmt=SAE
#bssid=00:03:7f:12:84:85